+ All Categories
Home > Documents > FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

Date post: 01-Jan-2017
Category:
Upload: hoangque
View: 270 times
Download: 4 times
Share this document with a friend
315
FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT Project Expansion for Manufacture of Value Added Products In the Existing Pig Iron Complex Project Proponents M/s. SLR METALIKS LIMITED Narayanadevarakere Village, Hagaribommanahalli Taluk, Bellary District, Karnataka State Consultant M/s. ULTRA-TECH Environmental Consultancy & Laboratory Unit No. 206, 224-225, Jai Commercial Complex, Eastern Express High Way, Opp.Cadbury, Khopat, Thane (West)-400 601 & Under the guidance of VTU, Belgaum NABET Accreditation of Consultant Sl.No. 93 of List A of MoEF - O.M. No.J-11013/77/2004/IA II(I) Dated 30.09.2011, Sl.No. 132 of List of Consultants with Provisional Accreditation (Rev.02) Dated 01.11.2012
Transcript
Page 1: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

FINALENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

ProjectExpansion for Manufacture of Value Added Products

In the Existing Pig Iron Complex

Project ProponentsM/s. SLR METALIKS LIMITED

Narayanadevarakere Village, Hagaribommanahalli Taluk,Bellary District, Karnataka State

ConsultantM/s. ULTRA-TECH Environmental Consultancy & Laboratory

Unit No. 206, 224-225, Jai CommercialComplex, Eastern Express High Way,

Opp.Cadbury, Khopat, Thane (West)-400 601&

Under the guidance of VTU, Belgaum

NABET Accreditation of ConsultantSl.No. 93 of List A of MoEF - O.M. No.J-11013/77/2004/IA II(I) Dated 30.09.2011,

Sl.No. 132 of List of Consultants with Provisional Accreditation (Rev.02) Dated 01.11.2012

Page 2: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT
Page 3: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

CONTENTSChapters

Chapter.No.

Particulars Pg.no.

1.0 Introduction1.1 Project background 11.2 Purpose of environmental impact assessment 11.3 Background of the project proponent 31.4 Brief description of the project 31.4.1 Nature and size of the project 31.4.2 Features of the proposed project 61.4.3 Location of the project site 61.4.4 Approvals available for the exiting industry 101.5 Importance of the project to the country & region 101.5.1 Domestic steel demand 101.5.2 Demand supply gap, imports vs indigenous production 121.5.3 Employment generation due to the project 121.6 Objective and scope of EIA studies 121.7 Methodology of EIA studies 131.7.1 Existing environmental status 131.7.2 Identification of impacts and mitigation measures 171.8 Terms of References (TOR) from MoEF and their compliances 172.0 Project Description2.1 Type of project 182.1.1 Production capacity & product mix 182.1.2 Interlinked/interdependent projects 192.1.3 Categorization of the project 192.2 Need (justification) for expansion of the industry 192.3 Description of location 202.3.1 Basis for selection of the site 202.3.2 Location features of the project 212.3.3 Project lay out 282.4 Size and magnitude of operation (plant facilities & infrastructure) 282.4.1 Land area 282.4.2 Activities during construction phase 292.4.3 Manpower 302.4.4 Project investment 302.5 Proposed schedule for approval & implementation 312.6 Technology & process description 312.6.1 Manufacturing process for steel mill 31

Page 4: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

2.6.2 Manufacturing process for rolling mill 332.6.3 Manufacturing process for metallurgical coke 342.6.4 Power generation process (based on coke oven off–gas) 402.6.5 Producer gas plant 402.6.6 Pulverized coal injection system 432.7 Raw material & products 442.8 Transportation of raw material & products 472.9 Power requirement, source & utilization 492.10 Fuel requirement 492.11 Water requirement, source & utilization 512.12 Source of pollution & their management / disposal 522.12.1 Waste water management 532.12.2 Gaseous emissions and APC measures 532.12.3 Solid waste management 533.0 Description of environment3.1 Introduction 573.1.1 Methodology 573.1.2 Study area 583.1.3 Study period 593.2 Establishment of baseline 603.2.1 Meteorological data 603.3 Air quality 683.3.1 Analytical techniques for air quality monitoring 683.3.2 Air quality monitoring 683.3.3 Methodology adopted for the study 693.3.3.1 Air quality at the project site 723.3.3.2 Air quality in the downwind direction (Rajapura) 733.3.3.3 Air quality at other locations 743.3.3.4 Observations 753.4 Noise environment 763.4.1 Observations 773.5 Water environment 783.5.1 Reconnaissance survey 783.5.2 Analytical techniques for water quality monitoring 793.5.3 Surface water 813.5.4 Ground water 813.5.5 Observations 863.6 Soil quality 863.7 Land use pattern 88

Page 5: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

3.8 Geology 893.8.1 Mineral resources 903.8.2 Geomorphology 903.9 Hydrology profile 913.9.1 Hydrogeology 913.9.1.1 Occurrence and movement of ground water in rock formations 913.9.1.2 Depth of groundwater and seasonal variation 913.9.1.3 Litholog 923.9.1.4 Drawdown and recovery 923.9.1.5 Geophysical investigations 923.9.1.6 Pathways of pollutants 933.9.1.7 Drainage and water bodies 953.9.1.8 Ground water potential 953.10 Ecology 963.10.1 Flora and fauna 963.10.1.1 Floristic analysis 973.10.1.2 Agricultural pattern 1003.10.2 Faunal composition 1003.10.2.1 Fishes 1033.11 Socio-economics of the study area 1033.11.1 Demography and social status 1043.11.2 About Hagari Bommanahalli taluk 1043.11.3 Cultivation 1043.11.4 Industrialization 1053.11.5 Statistics at a glance 1063.11.6 Places of interest 1114.0 Anticipated environmental impacts & mitigation measures

4.1 Introduction 1124.2 Identification & characterization of impacts 1134.2.1 Construction Phase 1134.2.2 Operation phase 1134.2.3 Impact Matrix 1144.3 Impact during construction phase 1184.3.1 Land environment 1184.3.2 Water environment 1184.3.3 Air environment 1194.3.4 Impact on noise level 1194.3.5 Impact on Biological environment 1204.3.6 Impact on Socio-Economic status 121

Page 6: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

4.4 Operational phase impact 1214.4.1 Impact on air quality 1214.4.1.1 Source of air pollution 1214.4.1.2 Fugitive emissions 1234.4.1.3 Fugitive emission control 1234.4.1.4 Preproject air quality 1264.4.1.5 GLC emissions 1264.4.1.6 Dispersion studies 1264.4.2 Water environment 1674.4.2.1 Source of water 1674.4.2.2 Discharge rate 1684.4.2.3 Distance of project from water tap point 1684.4.2.4 Surface hydrology 1684.4.2.5 Water usage 1694.4.2.6 Impact of water withdrawl from river 1694.4.2.7 Water conservation plan 1704.4.2.8 Treatment and utilization of effluent 1714.4.2.9 Rain water harvesting system 1734.4.2.10 Aquafier management plan 1754.4.2.11 Leachate study for the stock piles 1764.4.2.12 Flood hazard 176

4.4.2.13 Management plant to prevent the water pollution due to proposedactivity 177

4.5 Noise environment 1824.6 Solid waste management 1844.7 Soil quality 1854.8 Biological environment 1854.9 Socio-economic impact 1864.10 Green belt development 1884.10.1 Selection of species 1884.10.2 Specific location of plantations 1904.11 Occupational health care 1904.12 Traffic density and survey 1924.13 CREP norms and compliance 1964.14 Carbon credit project 1985.0 Analysis of alternatives

5.1 Sitting of project 1995.1.1 Environment guidelines 1995.1.2 General criterion for selection of location 200

Page 7: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

5.1.3 Site requirement and proposed location 2005.2 Environmental features of site 2015.3 Technology process 2025.4 No project option 2026.0 Environment monitoring program6.1 Introduction 2036.2 Environmental monitoring and reporting procedure 2036.3 Objectives of monitoring 2046.4 Monitoring methods and data analysis 2046.4.1 Air quality monitoring 2046.4.2 Noise levels 2056.4.3 Water and wastewater quality monitoring 2056.4.4 Land environment 2066.4.5 Biological environment 2066.4.6 Socio-economic environment 2066.5 Reporting schedules of the monitoring data 2076.6 Infrastructure for monitoring of environmental protection measures 2076.7 Sampling schedule and locations 2086.8 Compliances to environmental statutes 2106.9 Monitoring of compliances to statutory conditions 2116.10 Financial allocation for environmental aspects 2116.11 Success indicators 2117.0 Additional studies7.1 Public hearing and consultation 2127.2 Risk assessment 2127.2.1 Purpose 2127.2.2 Objectives 2137.3 Disaster management plan (DMP) 2137.3.1 Objectives 2137.3.2 Elements of on-site emergency plan 2237.3.3 Organization 2147.3.4 Duty allocation 2147.4 Industrial hazards and safety 2167.4.1 Hazard identification 2167.4.2 Fire Figurehting facilities 2187.5 On-Site Management Plan 2187.5.1 Structure of On-site management plan 2197.5.2 Scope of onsite emergency plan 2197.6 Emergency 2197.6.1 Methodology 2207.6.2 Structure of emergency management 2207.6.3 Infrastructure at emergency control centre 2217.6.4 Emergency medical facilities 2227.7 Identification and assessment of hazards 222

Page 8: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

7.8 Risk Analysis 2247.9 Risk management measures 2277.9.1 Furnace 2277.9.2 Hot metal & slag 2287.9.3 Respiratory hazards 2287.9.4 Heat and hot liquid 2297.9.5 Physical Hazards 2307.9.6 Heavy Loads / Grinding & Cutting / Rolling 2307.9.7 Musculoskeletal Disorders 2317.9.8 Control Hazards, Preferably At Their Source 2327.9.9 Noise 2327.10 Health And Safety Measures For The Workers 2327.10.1 Safety Of Personnel 2347.11 Following Safety Slogans Will Be Displayed 2367.12 Emergency Action Plans 2367.12.1 Emergency action plan for cylinder fire: 2367.12.2 Emergency action plan for electric fire: 2377.12.3 Emergency action plan for office fire 2377.12.4 Emergency action plan for oil fire: 2377.12.5 Emergency action plan for medical aid: 2377.13 Natural hazards 2397.13.1 Emergency action plan for tornado/high winds 2397.13.2 Emergency action plan for earthquakes 2397.13.3 Emergency action plan for bomb threat 2407.14 Social impact assessment, R & R action plan 2417.14.1 Existing social status 2417.14.2 Economic status in the region: land use pattern 2428.0 Project benefits8.1 Improvements In Physical Infrastructure 2448.2 Site area improvement 2448.2.1 Industrial area (processing area)/ residential area (non processing area) 2458.2.2 Green-Belt 2458.3 Improvements In The Social Infrastructure 2458.3.1 Connectivity 2468.4 Employment Potential – Skilled, Semi-Skilled And Unskilled 2468.5 Other Tangible Benefits 2479.0 Environmental cost benefit analysis 25010 Environmental management plan10.1 Introduction 25110.2 Need 25110.3 Objectives 25210.4 Environment Components 25210.4.1 Air Environment 25210.4.2 Water Environment 252

Page 9: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

10.4.3 Solid waste 25310.4.4 Aesthetic (Noise & Odour) Environment 25310.4.5 Biological Environment 25310.4.6 Work-zone Comfort Environment 25410.4.7 Socio-Economic Environment 25410.5 Environment management Hierarchy 25610.6 Checklist Of Statutory Obligations 25610.7 Records Of Waste Generation To Be Maintained As Per Following: 26010.8 Environmental Organization 26010.8.1 Environment Management Cell 26110.9 Environmental Monitoring Schedule 26210.10 Schedules 26310.10.1 Daily Compliance 26310.10.2 Monthly Compliance 26310.10.3 Quarterly Compliance 26310.10.4 Yearly Compliance 26310.10.5 Consent Compliance 26410.11 Steering Committee 26410.12 Construction phase Management 26511 Summary and conclusions 26712 Disclosure of consultants 269

Page 10: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

AnnexuresAnnexure Particulars

1 Executive summary

2 TOR issued by MoEF and their compliances

3 Public hearing proceedings & compliances

4 Layout of proposed projects

5 Topo map of 10 km radius, 1:50,000 Scale

6 Land use & Land cover map of the stud area

7 Environmental Monitoring reports for the existing industry8 CREP Norms9 KIADB land allotment copy

10 Water with-drawl permission letter

11 MOU with coal suppliers

12 CFO from KSPCB & its compliances for the existing industry

13 EC from MoEF & its compliances for the existing industry

14 Certified copy of EC compliance

15 Certified copy of CFO compliance

16 Recent monitoring report from KSPCB

17 Site location map with contours of 10km radius , 1:50,000 scale

18 DEM map of 10 km radius, 1:50,000 Scale

19 Energy balance for the manufacturing activities

20 Hydro geomorphology map

21 Groundwater level map

22 Occupational health monitoring statistics

23 Quality, Environment, Safety and Health policy

Page 11: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

TablesSl.No. Particulars Pg.

no.1.1 Salient Features of the proposed Project 31.2 List of industries around 25km of site 71.3 Environmental attributes and frequency of monitoring 162.1 Products and Capacity of the Existing Industry 182.2 Proposed Plants and their Capacities 182.3 Co-ordinates of the project site 212.4 Environmental Features of the proposed project site 222.5 Land Area Utilization 292.6 Project Schedule for Approval & Implementation 312.7 Characteristics of coking coal 352.8 Capacity of Coke Oven batteries 362.9 Characteristics of coke oven off gas 382.10 Specification of metallurgical coke 382.11 Specification of B grade coal 422.12 PCI coal specification 442.13 Characteristics of raw materials & additives 442.14 Raw materials Requirement, transportation & Storage details 452.15A Material balance for energy optimising furnace 462.15B Material balance for ladle refining furnace 462.15C Material balance for rolling mill 472.15D Material balance for continous casting machine 472.16 Transportation of raw materials 482.17 Power Requirement for Expansion Project 492.18 Furnaces & Utilization of Fuels 492.19 Furnace oil specification 502.20 HSD specification 502.21 BF gas specification 50

2.22 Water Balance with Water Consumption and Waste WaterGeneration 52

2.23 Waste Water Treatment and Discharge 532.24 Gaseous Emissions APC Measures 542.25 Solid waste characteristics and storage 552.26 Solid Waste Management 563.1 Meteorological data of project site for the year 2013 613.2 Predominant wind directions 633.3 Techniques adopted/Protocols for ambient air quality monitoring 683.4 Ambient Air Sampling Stations 703.5 Air quality data analysis at the project site 72

Page 12: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

3.6 Air quality data at Rajapura, A9 (downwind direction) 733.7 Air quality data analysis 74

3.8Ambient air quality standards – MoEF as per the notification dated16th November 2009 for industrial, residential & rural areas 75

3.9 Noise level monitoring stations 763.10 Noise level Limits as per Environmental Protection Rules 773.11 Water sampling stations 783.12 Protocol for surface water quality monitoring 793.13 Protocol for ground water quality monitoring 803.14 Analysis of surface water samples 823.15 Ground water quality 843.16 Observations 863.17 Soil sampling stations 863.18 Physico-chemical characteristics of soil 883.19 Land utilization pattern of the Bellary District 88

3.20 The main Rock types noticed in the study area and theirsuccession 90

3.21 Pumping recovery test 923.22 Geophysical investigation 933.23 Resistivity data 933.24 List of Wild Mammals Found in the Study Area 1013.25 List of Birds Commonly Found in the Area 1023.26 Fish Fauna observed in the Study Area 1033.27 Demographic Details 1053.28 Taluk Statistics 1064.1 Impact Identification Matrix 1154.2A Characteristics of Environmental Impacts from Construction Phase 1164.2B Characteristics of Environmental Impacts from Operational Phase 1174.3 Noise levels generated from construction equipments 1204.4 Noise of different equipments 1204.5 Details of Stack & Gaseous Emissions from point source 1224.6 Sources of Fugitive emissions 1234.7 Dust extraction system 1234.8 Fugitive emission sources 1244.9 A &4.9 B Air pollution sources 128

4.10 Air pollution sources with emission rates in g/s 130

4.11 Predicted incremental short-term concentrations due to theproposed project (existing + proposed) 135

4.12 Predicted incremental short-term concentrations due to theproposed project (proposed) 136

Page 13: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

4.13 Resultant maximum concentration 24 hr max (proposed) 1654.14 Characteristics of untreated and treated effluents 1714.15 Treatment and utilization of Effluents 1726.1 Post project monitoring schedule 209

6.2Financial allocation/budgetary provisions for environmentalmanagement aspects 211

7.1 Organization chart of onsite emergency plan 214

7.2 Identified hazards 223

7.3 Identification of health hazards 224

7.4 Risk analysis 2267.5 Health register 2357.6 Comparitive occupations 2438.1 Budget for Corporate Social Responsibility Activities 248

10.1 Environment Management Cell 261

10.2 Job of Environment Management Cell 262

10.3 Monitoring Schedule 26210.4 Consent Compliance 26412.1 List of functional area experts 27012.2 Laboratories details 271

Page 14: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

FiguresSl.No. Particulars Pg.

no.1.1 Location of Project Site in Bellary District 92.1 Location of the proposed project site on the Toposheet 232.2A Google Map of Project Location 242.2B Google Map of Project Location 242.3 Proposed Project Site Photographs 252.4 Site Surroundings Photographs 262.5 Existing plant photos 272.6 Process flow chart of Steel Making Unit 332.7 Process flow chart of Rolling Mill 342.8 Process flow chart for Coke Oven plant 392.9 Flow chart of power generation scheme 402.10 Process flow chart for Producer gas 422.11 Flow diagram of pulverized coal injection 433.1 Topo map showing 10 km radius around the project site 593.2 Wind rose diagram at Bellary IMD (0830 HRS IST) 643.3 Location of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations 713.4 Location of Ambient Noise Level Monitoring Stations 773.5 Location of Water Quality Sampling Stations 813.6 Location of Soil sampling stations 873.7 Land Use Map of the Bellary District 894.1 Google map showing stacks- existing & proposal 1334.2 Google map showing baseline monitoring locations 134

4.3Suspended Particulate Matter (PM10) isotherms for the proposedproject (existing + proposed) 137

4.4Suspended Particulate Matter (PM10) isotherms for the proposedproject (existing + proposed) 140

4.5Sulfur di-oxide (SO2) isotherms for proposed project (existing+proposed) 143

4.6 Sulfur di-oxide (SO2) isotherms for proposed project (proposed) 146

4.7 Oxides of nitrogen (NOx) isotherms for proposed project (existing +proposed) 149

4.8 Oxides of nitrogen (NOx) isotherms for proposed project (proposed) 152

4.9 Carbon monoxide (CO) isotherms for proposed project (existing +proposed) 155

4.10 Carbon monoxide (CO) isotherms for proposed project ( proposed) 1604.11 Treatment Scheme for Domestic Effluent Stream 17310.1 Structures of EMP 255

Page 15: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

CHAPTER -1

INTRODUCTION

Page 16: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT
Page 17: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

1

CHAPTER - 1INTRODUCTION

1.1 PROJECT BACKGROUNDM/s SLR Metaliks Ltd have already established and operating an iron making industry

consisting of 262 m3 blast furnace with 2,00,000 TPA capacity, 33 m2 sinter plant

(3,31,000 TPA) and 6 MW B.F. off gas based power plant at Narayanadevarakere

Village, Hagaribommanahalli Taluk, Bellary District, Karnataka State. Presently, the

pig iron produced in the industry is sold to other industries for use in steel making and

foundries. Granulated slag is sold for use as raw material to cement industries.

Granulated slag is used internally for civil works as a replacement to sand. Un-

granulated slag is used again in civil works as a replacement to aggregate. Sinter

produced is completely utilized as a captive source of blast furnace raw material.

Power generated from captive source is completely utilized in the industry it-self.

All the existing units are fully operational. Now M/s SLR Metaliks Ltd propose to

improve viability of the plant by value addition to the existing hot metal production by

installing additional and balancing facilities to produce more valuable downstream

products with ready market opportunity. Towards this objective, the company

proposes establish 3.0 Lakh TPA steel plant, 3.2 Lakh TPA rolling mill, 1.2 Lakh TPA

Coke oven plant, 9.0 MW coke oven off gas based power plant, 120 TPD oxygen

plant , 10 TPH Pulverized coal injection and 15000NM3/hr Producer gas plant in the

existing plant.

1.2 PURPOSE OF ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

Every developmental activity invariably has some impact and more often adverse

consequence to the environment. Mankind as it is developed today cannot live

without taking up these developmental activities for his food, security or other needs.

Consequently, there is a need for harmonious developmental activities with the

environmental concern. EIA is one of the tools available with the planners to achieve

the above goal. It is desirable to ensure that the developmental options under

consideration are sustainable. Hence, the environmental consequence must be

characterized early in the project cycle and accounted for in the project design. The

objective of EIA is to foresee the potential environmental problems that would arise

out of the proposed development and address them in the project planning and

design stage. This can often prevent future liabilities and expensive consequences of

Page 18: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

2

the project activity. The EIA process should allow for communication of this

information to:

1. Project proponent

2. The regulatory agencies

3. All stake holders and interest groups

EIA study is in particular essential for the industries causing significant environmental

impacts. Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF), Government of India has

issued EIA Notification dated 14-09-2006 in which guidelines are given for conduct of

EIA study and also the list of industries attracting the said notification.

The proposed industry is listed under EIA Notification dated 14-09-2006 and as

amended in December 2009 of Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF),

Government of India. As per this notification the industry is categorized under

Schedule 3(a), for Primary Metallurgical Industries (Ferrous & Non Ferrous) and

Category-A. As per the notification, prior Environmental Clearance (EC) from MoEF

is mandatory before establishment of this industry. Hence, the industry has to follow

due course of procedure to secure EC including application to MOEF for EC

clearance, terms of references from MOEF for conduct of EIA studies, public

hearing/consultations and deliberation of project at Expert Appraisal Committee of

MOEF. Accordingly, the project proponents have submitted prescribed application

along with pre-feasibility report to the MOEF New Delhi seeking terms of references

for conduct of EIA studies. MOEF New Delhi has deliberated the project in the 13th

EAC meeting dated 18.11.2013 and specified the TOR for conduct of EIA studies and

preparation of EIA report. Accordingly, EIA studies were conducted and the report is

prepared for submission to authorities. With EIA report and other documents the

industry has to approach KSPCB to conduct public hearing/consultations.

Final EIA report is to be prepared based on draft EIA report accommodating the

compliances to the observations made during public hearing/consultations. The

report will then be submitted to MOEF New Delhi for final environmental clearance.

Page 19: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

3

1.3 BACK GROUND OF PROJECT PROPONENTM/s SLR Metaliks Ltd incorporated on 17.11.2005 for manufacture of steel and allied

products. They have already set up and operating a 33 m2 Sinter Plant, 262 m3 Blast

Furnace with Waste gas based Captive Power Plant (CPP) of 6 MW capacity at Sy

Nos. 633, 646, 643 & others, Narayanadevarakere Village, Hagaribommanahalli

Taluk, Bellary District, Karnataka State. The other group of companies of M/s SLR

are M/s A.R. Co-extruded Films Ltd., A.R. Plastics Pvt. Ltd., Raj Polypack Pvt. Ltd.,

Goel Polypack Pvt. Ltd., M/s Uttar Bharat Hydro Power Projects and INS Finance and

Investment Pvt. Ltd. M/s SLR are already engaged in the business of manufacturing

and selling of Pig Iron.

1.4 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT1.4.1 NATURE AND SIZE OF THE PROJECTThe salient features of the proposed project are given in Table-1.1.

Table-1.1 Salient Features of the proposed ProjectSl.No. Parameter Details

1 Project Expansion for utilization of the existing pig iron capacity forthe production of downstream high value products.

2 Project ProponentsM/s S L R METALIKS LIMITED Narayandevarakere Village-583 222, Lokappanahola Near Mariyammanahalli,Hagaribommanahalli Tq. Bellary Dist., Karnataka State.

3 Location of the site

Plot / Survey No. R.S. No.:633,646, 643 & others

Village Narayandevarakere,Lokappanahola- 583 222,

Tehsil Hagaribommanahalli

District Bellary

State Karnataka

4 Proposed capacity

Steel plant 3,00,000 TPA

Rolling mill 3,20,000 TPA

Coke oven plant 1,20,000 TPA

Coke oven off gas basedpower plant 1 x 9.0 MW

Air separation plant 120 TPD Oxygen capacity

Producer gas plant 15000 Nm3/hr

Pulverized coal injection 10 Ton/Hr

Page 20: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

4

5 Existing capacity

PRODUCTS QUANTITY

Pig Iron 2,00,000 TPAGranulated Slag 60,000 TPAUNITS CAPACITYBlast Furnace 1 x 262 m3

Sinter Plant 1 x 33 m2

Pig Casting Machine 2 x 500 TPD

BF Gas based captivePower Plant 1 x 6 MW

6 Sl. No. in theSchedule

Schedule-3(a) for Metallurgical industries (ferrous & nonferrous) as per EIA Notification dated 14th September 2006and as amended in December 2009.

7 Location Features

The location of the proposed site and its immediatesurroundings is a barren land and moderately undulated withshrubs. It is consisting of rocky & sandy soil, not suiTable forcultivation. Nearest village Lokappanahola is 1.5km, nearesttown Hospet is 9.2 km and nearest high way SH-25 is 4.29km from the site.

8 Total man power Construction phase : 400 NosOperation phase : 950 Nos

9 Land area

The industry possesses 50 acres land for the existingactivities. Expansion is proposed in the additionally procuredland. 90 acres of land is already allocated by KIADB andanother 100 acres is under process by KIADB forestablishment of the proposed plants.

10 Basic Raw materialrequirement

Plant Raw material Quantity

Steel plant

1. Hot Metal fromBF2. Pig /PI Scrap3. Plant ReturnScrap4. DRI5. Fe-Alloys6. Lime &Dolomite

2,33,000,TPA12,000, TPA16,000, TPA

40,000 TPA39,68,130,TPA36,000, TPA

Rolling millSteel shop Billets andpurchased

3,20,000,TPA33,000 TPA

Coke oven plant Coking Coal 1,71,428,TPA

Pulverized coalinjection

Anthrasite &bituminous coal 16,800 TPA

Producer gasplant

Thermal Coal – Bgrade 47,000 TPA

Coke oven off gasbased power plant Coke oven off gas 125, TPH

Page 21: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

5

11 Water requirement& Source

Requirement : 3005 KLPD,Source : Tungabhadra river

12 Power requirement& source

Total power requirement : 20 MWSource-1. Captive power from Coke oven gas waste heatbased power plant : 9.0 MW,

Source-2. KPTCL supply- 11 MW

Source-3. 3 x 1250 kVA D.G. set for emergency purpose forsupply of cooling water/lighting in case of power failure.

13 Project Investment INR 482 Crores (for expansion)

14 Investment for EMP Capital investment on EMP : Rs. 3174.00 LakhsOperating/running cost on EMP : Rs. 318.00 Lakhs

15Effluent and theirtreatment &utilization

Domestic effluent: 32 KLPD, stabilized in septic tank, treatedin STP and then utilized for dust suppression or greenerydevelopment. Industrial effluent is mainly the purge fromcirculating cooling water and Boiler blow down.

16Sources of airpollution & controlmeasures

1. Flue gases from 45 T/h boiler at coke oven waste gasbased power plant and 50T/H reheating furnace. Thesegases are vented through stacks of adequate height.

2. Vent gases from furnaces present in steel plant, rolling mill,and Coke oven. These are dedusted in venturi wet scrubbers,cyclone separators or in bag filters and then vented throughstack of adequate height.

3. Fugitive emission at pulverizers, screens, conveyors,furnace charging and discharging etc. These are suckedthrough vacuum suction hoods, dedusted and vented throughstacks of sufficient height.

17Sources of solidwaste &management

Solid waste obtained are,1. Slag from steel mill furnace. Will be used for civil works &bricks manufacturing after metal recovery.2. Scraps, cut ends steel mill, rolling mill. These are recycledto SMS.3. Ash from PGP will be used for brick manufacturing4. Coke fines and coal fines will be reused in coke oven plantor sinter plant.5. Mill scale from caster and rolling mill: this is used in sinterprocess.

Page 22: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

6

1.4.2 FEATURES OF THE PROPOSED PROJECT1. The proposed plant will be cost effective, environmentally friendly & energy

efficient. This will help in making liquid steel efficiently & economically of best

quality.

2. All safety aspects will be addressed as per the statutory laws applicable to PCI,

steel melting shop, rolling mill. Safety acts, environment acts, factory acts etc. will

be strictly followed.

3. Hospet-Bellary region in Karnataka State is a high potential zone in terms of iron

and steel and allied industries because of the accessibility to raw material like rich

iron ore and dolomite.

4. M/s SLR Metaliks Ltd. are conscious of the importance of environmental aspects

to the project and thus have implemented all the environmental guidelines in the

forefront in maintaining high environmental quality in the industry as exemplified in

various certifications received.

1.4.3 LOCATION OF THE PROJECT SITEThe proposed project is proposed to be located at Sy No. 633, 646, 643 and others

Narayanadevarakere Village, Hagaribommanahalli Taluk, Bellary District, Karnataka

State. The location of project site in the district map of Bellary is shown in Figure-1.1.

The location was selected based on the following features.

As the proposal is for expansion of the existing industry, the proposed

project is to be located adjacent to the existing site.

Raw material availability at competitive price around the proposed

project.

Port facilities at Chennai, Mangalore and Goa which are well connected

by rail route.

Tungabhadra river water availability.

Railway facilities within 10 kms.

Availability of sufficient land to cater to all needs of pig iron and

associated steel industry.

Availability of skilled man power.

Schools, Colleges, Training Institutions, Hospitals, etc. are at 4 – 30 km

radius of the site.

Page 23: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

7

Statutory permissions are available for the existing industry at the

proposed site

List of industries in 25km radius from the project site is given in Table- 1.2

Table -1.2 List of Industries in 25km Radius of the Project Site

Sl.No. Project Sector Location

1. BMM Integrated Steel Plant Iron and Steel Dhanapur, Bellary,Karnataka

2. Kej Minerals Iron ore beneficiation &Pelletization plant Iron and Steel Taranagar, Bellary,

Karnataka

3. Rukminirama Integrated Steel Plant Iron and Steel Harabbihalu,Bellary, Karnataka

4. Donimalai Iron Ore Mine Expansion Iron OreMining

Donimalai, Bellary,Karnataka

5. S.J. Harvi Iron Ore Mine Iron OreMining

Lakshmipura,Bellary, Karnataka

6. Thimmappanagudi Iron Mine Iron OreMining

Thimmappanagudi,Bellary, Karnataka

7. Janekunta Iron Ore Mine Iron OreMining

Janekunta, Bellary,Karnataka

8. Subbarayanahalli Iron Ore Mine Expansion Iron OreMining Bellary, Karnataka

9. Donimalai Iron Ore Mine Expansion Iron OreMining Bellary, Karnataka

10. Jaisingpur Iron Ore Mine Expansion Iron OreMining Bellary, Karnataka

11. Ramgad Iron Ore Mine Expansion Iron OreMining Bellary, Karnataka

12. Dhruvdesh Integrated Steel Plant Iron and Steel Hirebangal, Koppal,Karnataka

13. Trivista Sponge Iron Plant Iron and Steel Koppal, Karnataka14. Aditya Pig Iron Plant Iron and Steel Koppal, Karnataka

15. Kirloskar Pig Iron Plant Expansion Iron and Steel Bevinpalli, Koppal,Karnataka

16. Gallant Integrated Steel Plant Iron and Steel Halvarthi, Koppal,Karnataka

17. Kirloskar Pig Iron Plant Expansion Iron and Steel Bevinhalli, Koppal,Karnataka

18. Xindia Steel Plant Iron and Steel Koppal, Karnataka

19. Kalyani Steels Ltd. (Hospet division) Iron and Steel Ginigera, Koppal,Karnataka

20. Mukand Steels Ltd. Iron and Steel Ginigera, Koppal,Karnataka

21. Kirloskar Ferrous Industries Ltd. Iron and Steel Benihavalli, Koppal,Karnataka

Page 24: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

8

22. ILC steels Iron and Steel Koppal, Karnataka23. HRG alloy and steels Iron and Steel Koppal, Karnataka

24. Coca cola Iron and Steel Koppal, Karnataka25. RBSSN mining & benification plant Iron and Steel Hospet karnataka26. MSPL mining site Iron and Steel Hospet karnataka

27. Swastik steels Iron and Steel Hospet karnataka28. M/S venkatagiri iron ore mines Iron and Steel Hospet karnataka29. Hare Krishna metaliks Iron and Steel Koppal, Karnataka30. Ultratech cement Cement plant Koppal, Karnataka

31. K.O.F. limited Oil, Oilcake,Oils Seeds), Hospet

32. Pumpasara distillery ltd. Rectified spiritand I.M.FI, Hospet

33. India Sugar’s and Refinance Sugar Hospet34. Minerals Sales private ltd. Sponge Iron Hospet35. Kariganur Iron& Steel Pvt. Ltd. Hospet. Sponge Iron Hospet

36. M.S.P.L Ltd. (Vijaya Oxygen) Gas plant Hosalli

37. Tungabhadra Fertilisers & Chemicals PvtLtd, Fertilizer Munirabad RS

38. Bhoruka Power Corporation Ltd, Power plant Shivapura39. Scan Ispat Limited Sponge iron Ginigera Village

40. K.P.R. Fertilizers Ltd Fertiliser Halavarthi village

Page 25: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

9

Figure - 1.1 Location of Project Site in Bellary DistrictM/s S L R Metaliks Limited, Narayanadevarakere, Lokappana Hola, H.B Halli Tq., Bellary Dist

Page 26: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

10

1.4.4 APPROVALS AVAILABLE FOR THE EXISTING INDUSTRY

1. Consent for operation from KSPCB for the year 2013-2014.

2. Authorization for handling hazardous waste from KSPCB up to 30-06-2015.

3. Permission from Water resource dept GOK for withdrawal of water from

Tungabhadra River.

4. License from Chief Controller of explosives for storage & handling of liquid

Nitrogen.

5. License from village Panchayath.

6. Approval from Single window agency, KUM, GOK.

7. Layout approval from Director of Factories & Boilers, GOK.

8. Sanction of power from KPTCL.

9. Approval for electrical installations by CEIG, GOK.

10.Approval for boiler from Director of Factories & Boilers, GOK.

1.5 IMPORTANCEOF THE PROJECT TO THE COUNTRY &REGION1.5.1 DOMESTIC STEEL DEMANDIn India, a major part of steel is consumed in engineering applications, followed by

automobiles and construction. The growth of steel, as is well known, is dependent

upon the growth of economy, industrial production and infrastructure sectors. The

automobile industry is on a growth path and this is likely to continue. The two-

wheeler, four-wheeler and commercial vehicle sector are all doing well. Therefore

demand for steel from these sectors is likely continue in future.

In India, apparent consumption of steel increased from 14.8 million tonnes in 1991-92

to 43.5 million tonnes in 2006-07. As per the National Steel Policy - 2005 of Govt. of

India, the demand-supply scenario for steel up to 2020 is as given below:

National Steel Policy of Government of India have considered growth rate of 7.3%

per annum. The actual growth of consumption during 2005-2006, according to Steel

Ministry, was 13.88%. Even if we assume a lower growth rate of 10% per annum, the

demand for the year 2014-15, it will be 97.67 million tons. In terms of crude steel, the

demand works out 105.5 million tons for 2015. Production of crude steel during 2005-

06 was 42.1 million tonnes. It can be seen from the above that demand is likely to be

more than double in the next ten years. Based on the assessment of steel market

(considering the boom in construction sector and industrial applications) and the

Page 27: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

11

resources available to the promoters, it is recommended to set up a 0.2 Mt/yr pig iron

plant.

The domestic demand of steel is to increase 13.3% in 2011. The global steel demand

this year is expected to increase by 5.9%, according to the data made available by

the World Steel Association (WSA). India, with an expected growth in steel demand

of 13.3%, will lead the steel demand in the world.

The association (WSA), whose members produce 85% of the total steel made in the

world, in its newsletter about the ‘short range outlook’ on steel in 2011 and 2012,

said, “India is expected to show strong growth in steel use in the coming years due to

its strong domestic economy, massive infrastructure needs and expansion of

industrial production.” It further says that in 2012, India’s steel demand will touch

14.3%, reaching 79 million tonnes (mt) per year. In 2010, India produced 67 mt steel

and is the fifth-largest steelmaker in the world with China as the leader, followed by

Japan, US and Russia.

It is clear from the data that the steel demand will continue to be driven by the

growing economies, led by India. Even as the consumption is growing in the western

world, WSA predicts that by 2012, steel use in the developed world will still be at 14%

below the 2007 level whereas in the emerging and developing economies, it will be

38% above. In 2012, the emerging and developing economies will account for 72% of

world steel demand in contrast to 61% in 2007, WSA noted.

State-owned Steel Authority of India, too, is ramping up production to reach 24 million

tons from a shade under 14 million tons, currently. The capacity will come in phases

over the next little years. The demand for alloy and special steels in the country is

increasing in the last few years as the consumption of steel has increased by 12%

since year 1998. It finds major use in the forging, automobile, auto component,

railway etc. There is huge domestic demand for alloy and special steels and this

demand is likely to continue in future.

In view of the present encouraging industrial trend for use of steel in the country ,

which is likely to continue in future, M/s. SRL have proposed to expand its activity in

steel production capacity at economical cost.

Page 28: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

12

1.5.2 DEMAND SUPPLY GAP, IMPORTS vs INDIGENOUS PRODUCTIONThe scope for raising the total consumption of steel is huge in India, given that per

capita steel consumption is only 40 kg – compared to 150 kg across the world and

250 kg in China.

The National Steel Policy has envisaged steel production to reach 110 million tons by

2019-20. However, based on the assessment of the current ongoing projects, both in

greenfield and brownfield, Ministry of Steel has projected that the steel capacity in the

county is likely to be 124.06 million tons by 2011-12. Further, based on the status of

MOUs signed by the private producers with the various State Governments, it is

expected that India’s steel capacity would be nearly 293 million tons by 2020.

India has been a net importer of steel but in recent years due to the commissioning of

capacities in the range of 8-10 million tons, we might become a net exporter.

Therefore production of steel at the regional level will be highly beneficial & help in

reduction of imports.

1.5.3 EMPLOYMENT GENERATION DUE TO THE PROJECTThe total direct employment potential during operational phase of the proposed

project is about 950 people. However, the commencement of this industry will create

indirect employment opportunities to more than 1,000 people in terms of

transportation, vehicle maintenance, petty shops etc. In addition, about 400 persons

will be employed during the construction phase of the project.

1.6 OBJECTIVE AND SCOPE OF EIA STUDIESThe overall objective of any EIA studies is to identify and assess the adverse and

beneficial impacts of the project in the planning stage itself, so that necessary

mitigation measures to prevent or minimize these adverse impacts could be planned

early and cost effectively. In view of this objective, the scope of EIA study broadly

includes:

i. Introduction along with scope of EIA studies (Chapter-1).

ii. Preliminary details of project including type, need and location of project

and the magnitude of project activities (Chapter-2).

iii. Project description including process, resource required and products

formed along with sources of pollution and built in mitigation measures with

respect to wastewater, gaseous emissions and solid wastes (Chapter-2).

Page 29: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

13

iv. Existing baseline status of the relevant environmental parameters in the

specified study area through primary and secondary source. The

environmental parameters include meteorology, air, water, land, soil, noise,

ecology and socio economics (Chapter-3).

v. Anticipated environmental impacts of the proposed project on environment

and measures for mitigation of the predicted adverse impacts, air pollution

dispersion modeling studies (Chapter-4).

vi. Analysis of alternatives for the technology & site (Chapter-5)

vii. Technical aspects of monitoring the effectiveness of mitigation measures.

It includes laboratory and other facilities monitoring facilities, environmental

parameters to be monitored, data to be analyzed and sampling location and

schedule. It also includes budgetary provision and procurement schedule for

the monitoring facilities (Chapter-6).

viii. Additional studies relevant to the project such as public consultation, risk

assessment and social impact assessment with R.R. Action plan (Chapter-7).

ix. Project benefits in terms of improvement in social and physical

infrastructures in the region of the proposed project (Chapter-8).

x. Environmental cost benefit analysis of the project (Chapter-9).

xi. Administrative aspects of environmental management plan to ensure that

the mitigation measures implemented and their effectiveness monitored

(Chapter-10).

xii. Summary and conclusions consisting of overall justification of project. It

also includes the summary of significant adverse effects along with the

measures to overcome the same (Chapter-11).

xiii. Preparation of EIA document as per MoEF guidelines. It includes all the

above Information of items from i to xii.

1.7 METHODOLOGY OF EIA STUDIES1.7.1 EXISTING ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS

The environmental influence due to the project is likely to cover a radial

distance of about 10 km around the factory premises. Therefore, the study area for

monitoring of environmental parameters covers 10 km distance from the project site.

The environmental parameters, which are likely to be affected by the activities of the

project, were identified. They include air, noise, water, soil, land use, ecology, socio-

economics etc. The existing status of these environmental parameters for study area

Page 30: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

14

is collected from both primary and secondary sources. Primary source data were

collected through environmental monitoring survey of representative locations of the

study area during the post monsoon period of 11th December 2013 to 11th March

2014. The reconnaissance survey was conducted and the sampling locations were

identified based on:

i.Existing topography and location of surface water bodies like ponds and

steams.

ii.Meteorological conditions (predominant wind directions).

iii.Location of towns, villages and other sensitive areas present in the vicinity of

the proposed project site.

iv.Representative areas for baseline conditions

v. Accessibility, power availability and security to the monitoring

equipment.

Secondary data were collected from various organizations to substantiate the primary

data. The data thus collected was compared with the standards prescribed for the

respective environmental parameters. The environmental parameters monitored and

the frequency of monitoring is given in Table-1.3. The methodologies adopted for

studying individual components of environment are briefly described below.

1. MICRO METEOROLOGYA temporary automatic weather monitoring station was installed to record

meteorological parameters at plant site. The parameters like hourly wind speed, wind

direction, temperature and relative humidity were recorded on hourly basis

continuously during the study period. Wind speed and wind direction data recorded

were used for computation of relative percentage frequencies at different wind

directions. The meteorological data thus collected has been used for interpretation of

the existing Ambient Air Quality status, and the same data has been used for

prediction of impacts on future scenario due to the activities of the project.

2. AMBIENT AIR QUALITYThe status of the existing ambient air quality in the study region has been assessed

through a network of 12 air monitoring locations with one AAQM location in down

wind direction during the study period within a radial distance of 10 km distance from

the project site.

Page 31: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

15

The monitoring network was so designed that a representative baseline scenario is

obtained in upwind, downwind and crosswind directions. These monitoring sites have

been established keeping in view the available data on predominant wind direction

and wind speed of this particular region. The existing ambient air quality status (AAQ)

has been monitored at each station on 24 hourly basis. The monitoring was done as

per NAAQ standards-2009 and CPCB guidelines. Maximum, minimum and average

values have been computed from the data collected at all individual sampling stations

to represent the ambient air quality status.

3. NOISE ENVIRONMENTNoise monitoring has been carried out at 10 different locations to identify the impact

of project activities on the surroundings in the study area. Noise levels were

recorded at an interval of 10 s for about 30 minutes during the day and night times to

compute the day equivalent, night equivalent and day-night equivalent level.

4. LAND ENVIRONMENT

Field surveys were conducted to delineate classification of land use pattern, cropping

pattern, vegetation cover in the study area. Representative soil samples were

collected from 3 different sampling locations within an area of 10 km radius around

the plant site. They were analyzed to assess their physico-chemical characteristics.

Standard procedures were followed for sampling and analysis. The samples collected

were assessed for their suitability for the growth of plant species and crops.

5. SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENTSocio economic data including demographic pattern, population density, education

and medical facilities, livelihood, economic and health status, transport facility were

collected for the study area from primary and secondary sources for the study area

and analyzed.

Page 32: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

16

Table-1.3 Environmental Attributes and Frequency of Monitoring

Sl.

NoAttribute Parameters Frequency of Monitoring

1Micrometeorology

Wind speed (hourly) &direction, temperature,relative humidity and rainfall

At project site continuous for 3months hourly recording.

2Ambient airquality

PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx &PAH At 12 locations

24 hourly samples twice aweek for the project site

3Gaseousemissions

PM, SO2, NOx, Fortnightly

4Surface (river)water quality

Physical, chemical &bacteriological parameters

Grab samples have beencollected once during thestudy period.

5Ground waterquality

Physical, chemical &bacteriological parametersfor 8 locations.

6 Ecology Terrestrial and aquatic floraand fauna in the region. Secondary data.

7 Noise levels Noise levels in dB (A) at 10locations.

Recording at hourly interval for24 hrs, once a month perlocation during study period.

8Soilcharacteristics

Parameters related toagriculture potential at 3locations.

Once during the study period.

9 Land use Trend of land use change fordifferent categories.

Based on data published indistrict census handbook.

10Socio- economicaspects Socio-economic parameters

Based on the data collectedfrom the secondary source.

11 Geology Geological history Based on the siteinvestigation.

12 Hydrology

Drainage area and patternnature of streams. Aquifercharacteristics recharge anddischarge areas.

Based on the siteinvestigation.

13 Risk assessment

To identify areas wheredisaster can occur due to fire& explosives & release oftoxic substance.

Identification of possible risksat the proposed project,quantification of risk throughmodeling.

Page 33: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

17

1.7.2 IDENTIFICATION OF IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES

The likely impacts of various activities of the proposed project on the environment

were identified. These impacts were assessed for their significance based on the

background environmental quality in the area and the magnitude of the impact. All

components of the environment were considered and wherever possible impacts

were evaluated in quantitative / qualitative terms. Estimated impacts have been

superimposed over the baseline (pre-project) status of environmental quality. The

resultant (post-project) quality of environmental parameters is reviewed with respect

to the permissible limits. Thereby, the preventive and mitigation measures were

formulated and incorporated in the environmental plan.

1.8 TERMS OF REFERENCES (TOR) FROM MOEF AND THEIR COMPLIANCES

Terms of References for conduct of EIA studies were specified to this project by

Environmental Appraisal Committee, MoEF New Delhi during their 13th meeting

(Proceedings No. 13.2.17) held on 18/11/2013 & subsequently TOR was issued on

16/1/14. Copy of the TOR is given as Annexure-2. The EIA studies were conducted

based on these TOR and accordingly the EIA report is prepared. The list of TOR and

their compliances is given in Annexure-2. Additional considerations are also made

based on site conditions.

Page 34: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT
Page 35: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

CHAPTER -2

PROJECTDESCRIPTION

Page 36: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT
Page 37: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

18

CHAPTER - 2

PROJECT DESCRIPTION

2.1 TYPE OF PROJECT

2.1.1 PRODUCTION CAPACITY & PRODUCT MIX

The present proposal is for expansion of the existing iron making industry for

manufacture of downstream and associated products. M/s SLR has finalized the

capacities of plant facilities based on product mix of the proposed expansion project.

The production capacity and the plant facilities established in the existing industry

and those proposed for expansion are given in Table-2.1 and Table-2.2, respectively.

Table-2.1 Products and Capacity of the Existing Industry

Table-2.2 Proposed Plants and their Capacities

Steel plant will be added in the industry to convert hot metal produced from blast

furnace into special steel, a high value and much needed product. Similarly the rolling

mill based on steel plant capacity will be established to cater additional market and to

realize higher returns to the product. Coke oven plant will be established to

manufacture metallurgical coke for captive utilization in BF plant. Further an air

separation plant will be established for generation of oxygen and nitrogen for their

captive use in steel plant. In addition, a captive power plant based on coke oven off

Products Quantity1. Pig Iron 2,00,000 TPA2. Granulated Slag 60,000 TPA

Plants Capacity1. Blast Furnace 1 x 262 m3

2. Sinter Plant 1 x 33 m2

3. Pig Casting Machine 2 x 500 TPD4. BF Gas based captive Power Plant 1 x 6 MW

Sl. No. Plant Capacity

1 Steel plant 3,00,000 TPA2 Rolling mill 3,20,000 TPA3 Coke oven plant 1,20,000 TPA4 Coke oven off gas based power plant 1 x 9.0 MW5 Pulverized coal injection 10 TPH6 Air separation plant 120 TPD Oxygen capacity7 Producer gas plant 15000 Nm3/hr

Page 38: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

19

gas will also be established along with coke oven plant. Producer gas is used in

Reheating furnace of rolling mill. Pulverized coal injection will be used in Mini blast

furnace to decrease coke consumption.

2.1.2 INTERLINKED/INTERDEPENDENT PROJECTS

The power generated from coke oven plant is based on waste heat present in coke

oven off gas and the power generated is used only for captive consumption.

2.1.3 CATEGORIZATION OF THE PROJECT

The proposed industry is listed under EIA Notification dated 14-09-2006 and as

amended in December 2009 of Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF),

Government of India. As per this notification the industry is Classified under Schedule

3(a), for Primary Metallurgical Industries (Ferrous & Non Ferrous) and Category-A.

2.2 NEED (JUSTIFICATION) FOR EXPANSION OF THE INDUSTRYThe industry M/s. SLR Metaliks ltd with its present operational capacity is not

economically viable. There is huge demand for steel in the country. Further, the

Bellary region in Karnataka State is a potential zone for establishment of iron and

steel industries because of its accessibility to natural resources including water and

raw material like rich iron ore, dolomite, manganese ore etc. Establishment of the

steel industry with its own resources will meet the national interest of development

through self-realization. Further, it helps to enhance the status of this underdeveloped

rural area through improvement in roads, communication, job opportunities and other

infrastructural facilities. The Government of Karnataka envisaged the policy to

encourage iron and steel industries in the state. Hence, M/s. SLR proposes to

increase the production activity of the industry by establishing facility for manufacture

of downstream and associated products.

The expansion will be done in the vicinity of the existing premises. Administrative and

ancillary infrastructure facility will be made use of in expansion of the project. Hence,

the expansion will be achieved with minimum resources.

In these days of high competition, escalating cost of production, power and raw

materials it is essential to produce steel at economic cost. In the present industry this

Page 39: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

20

is to be achieved by modernization of technology, value addition, recovery and use of

wastes and enhancement of capacity with minimal resources.

2.3 DESCRIPTION OF LOCATION

2.3.1 BASIS FOR SELECTION OF THE SITE

The proposed project is expansion of the existing project and therefore associated

with activities of the existing industry. The proposed steel plant will utilize the hot

metal produced in the existing pig iron plant. Similarly the coke produced from the

proposed coke oven will be utilized in the existing blast furnace. Hence, the proposed

facility is essentially to be located adjacent to the existing project site. Hence, no

alternate sites are considered.

The expansion project is proposed to be located East side of the existing industrial

premises. 90 acres of land is already allotted by KIADB for the proposed expansion

project and another 100 acres is under process by KIADB. Expansion is proposed in

the additionally allotted land for the proposed plants.

No significant change expected in land cover or topography. The proposed land is

non-agriculture, rocky, sandy, un-cultivated barren land. It does not require clearance

of existing land, vegetation or buildings. The choice of the land confers several

advantages, which are summarized below.

1. The site is connected to mines through rail-line and highways. SH- 25 is4.29 km South East from the site and NH 13 at a distance of 6.5 km East fromthe project site. Railway line is at 7.2 km NE from the site.2. Ecologically sensitive areas like forest land, national park, heritage locationetc are not in the vicinity. T.B. dam back water is at a distance of 700m to3000m from the proposed facilities depending upon the water level.3. Water has been allocated form T.B. Board by GOK.4. Housing facilities, educational facilities, recreational facilities and otheramenities are available at Hosapete located at 9.2 km NE.5. No incidence of cyclones, earth quake, floods or landslides in the region.

Considering the above, the site adjacent to the existing industry located at

Narayanadevanakere village is selected for the expansion project.

Page 40: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

21

2.3.2 LOCATION FEATURES OF THE PROJECT

The proposed site for the expansion is located at Sy Nos. 633, 646, 643 and others,

Narayanadeverakere Village, Hagaribommanahalli Taluk, Bellary District, Karnataka.

SH-25 joining Harihar and NH-13 is located at a distance of about 4.29 kms

SouthEast, NH-13 joining Hospet and Chitradurga is located at a distance of about

6.5 km east. District head quarter Bellary town is located at 85 km E from the site.

District Bellary has rich deposits of Iron ore. Hospet & Sandur area provide an

assured and continuous supply of raw materials. The location is very well connected

by Road & Rail. Environmental features of the site are given in Table-2.4.

The altitude of the site is in the range of 505 m above MSL. The co-ordinates of the

site are given in Table-2.3. Land-use pattern around the project site is basically rural

& agrarian with few scattered industries. The land is nearly plane sloping towards

north. The proposed land is un-cultivated or barren rocky,sandy land. It is free from

trees or other vegetation of any worth. It is covered with only the shrubs and bushes.

District Bellary has rich deposits of Iron ore. Hospet & Sandur area provide an

assured and continuous supply of raw materials. Location of proposed unit is shown

in Figure- 1.1. The photographs of proposed expansion site are shown in Figure-2.4

to 2.6.

Table-2.3 Co-Ordinates of the Project Site

Direction East Longitude North Latitude

North- West(p1) 76°19'04.44"E 15°11'09.36"N

North-East (p2) 76°19'23.18"E 15°11'9.51"N

East (p3) 76°19'29.35"E 15°10'56.84"N

South-East(p4) 76°19'21.66"E 15°10'47.85"N

South-West(p5) 76°19'15.22"E 15°10'59.31"NWest(p6) 76°19'5.03"E 15°11'2.70"N

The ash pond is located at 76°19'22.22"E, 15°10'59.31"N

Page 41: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

22

Table-2.4 Environmental Features of the Proposed Project Site

Sl.No. Features Particulars

1 Location

Sy Nos. 633, 646, 643 and others,Narayanadevarakere Village,HagaribommanahalliTaluk, Bellary District,Karnataka.

2 Present land use Barren uncultivated land

3 Latitude/Longitude 15°11'8.15" N / 76°19'13.57" E

4 Average altitude 505 m above MSL

5 Topography Nearly plain, free from trees or any richvegetation, sloping towards NE.

6 Soil type Red soil mixed loamy

7 Temperature range Max. : 270C to 420C and Min. : 140C to 260C

8 Average humidity 65 %

9 Annual normal rain fall 760 mm (average of 10 Years)

10 Average wind speed 5.3-7.8 km/hr

11 Predominant winddirection

NE and SW

12 Present land use Barren vacant land

13 Nearest villageLokappanahola village at 1.5 km S.E.fromthe proposed site. No settlement inpredominant wind direction ie NE & SW

14 Nearest high ways S.H.-25 : 4.3 km SE. and NH-13 : 6.5 km E

15 Nearest Railway station S C Railway Line (Vyasanakere Railwaystation) :7.2 km, NE

16 Nearest air strip Hubli, 170 km W

17 Nearest town Hospet, 9.2 km NE

18 Nearest industries

BMM Ispat Steel Ltd, 6.9 km E,Sandur Manganese & Iron Ore (closed unit)& Star Metaliks & Power 7.12 km ERukmini rama steels ltd. 3.6km SW

19 Nearest water body /river

Tungabhadra river: 5 kmTungabhadra reservoir back water: 700mNW from the expansion project site.Dhayanakere : 8.6 km SE

20 Nearest Archaelogicalplace

Hampi (world Heritage site) : 25 km, NE

Page 42: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

23

21 Nearest National park /Reserved Forest

Gunda Reserved Forest : 7.5 km, NENandi Banda Reserved Forest : 6.2km, SRamgad Reserved Forest : 9.5 km, E

22 Ecologically sensitivelocations

Tungabhadra reservoir back water: 700mmNW from the expansion project site andTungabhadra river : 5 kmGunda Reserved forest : 6.2 km, NEThere are no Defence installation, noNational park, no wild life sanctuary and noBiosphere Reserve within 25 km from the site

Figure - 2.1 Location of the proposed project site on the Toposheet

(Toposheet: 57A/4, 57A/7, 57A/8, Scale–1:50,000)

Page 43: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

24

Figure - 2.2A Google Map of Project Locatio

Figure - 2.2B Google Map Existing & Proposed Sites

Proposed site

Existing plant

Page 44: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

25

North Direction North Direction

South Direction South Direction

East Direction East Direction

West Direction West Direction

Figure-2.3 Proposed Project Site Photographs

Page 45: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

26

North Direction North Direction

South Direction South Direction

West Direction West Direction

East Direction East Direction

Figure-2.4 Site Surroundings Photographs

Page 46: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

27

North Direction South Direction

East Direction West Direction

Greenbelt Greenbelt

Greenbelt MBF

Figure-2.5 Existing plant photos

Page 47: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

28

Figure-2.5 Existing plant photos

2.3.3 PROJECT LAY OUTThe project site layout is enclosed as Annexure-4.

2.4 SIZE AND MAGNITUDE OF OPERATION (PLANT FACILITIES &INFRASTRUCTURE)

2.4.1 LAND AREAThe proposed site is located at Narayandevarakere, Lokappanahola Village, Near

Hagaribommanahalli Tq., Bellary Dist., Karnataka State. The industry possesses 50

acres land for the existing activities. The extent land provided for the proposed

project is 190 acres. 90 acres of land is already acquired through KIADB for the

proposed expansion project and another 100 acres is under acquisition through

KIADB. 65 acre land will be utilized for green belt and greenery development, 76

acres will be built up area for establishment of project facility and 49 acre will be

vacant open land for future development. The utilization of land for different

applications is given in Table-2.5.

Power Plant Sinter Plant

Dry GCP in MBF ESP in sinter plant

Page 48: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

29

The proposed land is barren uncultivated rocky, sandy land. It is covered with only

the scanty shrubs and bushes. It does not require clearance of existing land,

vegetation or buildings. No significant change in land cover or topography. Land-use

pattern around the project site is basically rural & agrarian with few scattered

industries.

Table-2.5 Land Area Utilization

Land UtilizationPresent,

Acres

Addition after proposedexpansion,

AcresBuilt up area 33 76Green belt and greenery area. 17 65Open vacant area for future use 0 49Total 50 190

2.4.1.1 LAND DEVELOPMENTThe proposed land area is lightly undulated within ± 2m. The land will be leveled and

compacted utilizing gravel available in the site itself. No filling material is needed and

no muck or waste material needed to be disposed off.

2.4.2 ACTIVITIES DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE

2.4.2.1. ACTIVITIESCivil construction activities include the following.

1. Extent of built up area in expansion: 76 acres.2. Construction works: foundations, floorings, buildings, boiler house,

turbine house, godowns.

3. Above ground building / structures: 6 to 15 m height for buildings /

structures.

4. Height of chimney/stack: 30 to 75 m from ground level.

5. Excavations: 1 to 3 m foundations machinery such as turbine, water

storage tank.

6. Constructed floor area of buildings & other structures: 8000 m2.

7. Construction period: 6 months.8. Construction material

Size stone & boulders : 10000 T (1000 loads)

Stone gelly : 20000 T (2000 loads)

Sand : 10000 T (1000 loads)

Bricks ; 500 m3 (100 loads)

Page 49: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

30

Cement : 5000 T (250 loads)

Steel :1000 T (25 loads)

9. Transportation of Construction Material

Steel and cement are available from manufacturers located in Karnataka at

100 to 150 km. They are transported through rail and lorry transport. Other

construction material sand, stone and gravel are available with in 20 km

source from the project site. They are transported through lorry transport.

2.4.3 MANPOWER2.4.3.1. Requirement of PersonnelA maximum of 400 persons will be engaged during construction period and 950

persons during operation period of the proposed project. More than 90 % of the

persons employed in the industry will be employed from the local area. Hence the

influence of influx on environment is insignificant.

2.4.3.2. Residential QuartersMost of the workers will be residing at nearby villages. The company has already

provided residential facilities to the essential employees. A total of 60 quarters are

already present in the existing project. In addition, 20 nos of residential quarters will

be provided during expansion of the project.

2.4.3.3. Transportation of PersonnelA maximum of 400 persons will be engaged in construction works. Construction

period is about 14 months. They use company vehicle facilities, public transportation

and own vehicles. A total of about 10 visits will be made by the motor vehicles to the

industry for transportation of personnel.

During operation a maximum of about 950 persons will be employed in the industry.

A total of about 40 visits by four/six wheelers and about 160 visits by two wheelers

will be made to the industry for transportation of personnel.

2.4.4 PROJECT INVESTMENTTotal investment for the proposed project is estimated as Rs. 482 Crores. Investment

on Pollution Control facility will be is Rs. 3174.0 lakhs.

Page 50: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

31

2.5 PROPOSED SCHEDULE FOR APPROVAL & IMPLEMENTATION

The tentative project schedule is given below. The implementation of the project will

be taken up after receipt of Consent to establish from Karnataka State Pollution

Control Board and Environmental clearance from the Ministry of Environment &

Forests, Government of India. Time schedule for Approval & implementation of the

project is given in Table-2.6.

Table-2.6 Time Schedule for Approval & Implementation of the Project

1.Submission of final EIA report and Public hearingproceedings to MOEF GOI New Delhi July 2014

2. EIA deliberations and grant of EC Sept. 2014

3. Submission of CFE application to KSPCB Bengaluru Oct. 2014

4.Deliberation of the proposal and grant of CFE to theindustry. Dec. 2014

5. Commencement of proposed project construction Dec. 2014

6.Completion of project construction and submissionof CFO application to KSPCB Bengaluru August 2015

7.Grant of CFO from KSPCB and the Commencementof commissioning and production Sept. 2015

2.6 TECHNOLOGY & PROCESS DESCRIPTION

The list of products proposed to be manufactured along with their capacity is given in

Table-2.2. Brief information on manufacturing process of these products is given

below.

2.6.1 MANUFACTURING PROCESS FOR STEEL MILLA Steel making unit with Energy Optimizing Furnace (EOF) /LRF/VD is proposed. A

flow chart for manufacture of steel is given in Figure-2.7.

2.6.1.1. ENERGY OPTIMIZING FURNACE (EOF)The oxygen process is the most common process for producing steel. The Energy-

optimizing oxygen furnace (EOF) involves this process using combined submerged

(bottom) and atmospheric (top) blowing. The hot metal from blast furnace is taken into

the EOF, 20-22% scrap / DRI is then added into the hot metal. The necessary fluxes

Page 51: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

32

(ferro-alloys, calcined lime and iron ore) are also added to the bath. Oxygen is blown

into the bath through water-cooled lances using combined bottom and top blowing.

During blowing operation, oxygen oxidizes iron into iron oxide and carbon into carbon

monoxide. The iron oxide immediately transfers the oxygen to the tramp elements,

which leads to formation of reactive slag. As blowing continues, there is a continuous

decrease of carbon, phosphorous, manganese and silicon within the melt. The refining

process is completed when the desired carbon content is attained. The steel is tapped

into the ladle furnace by a transfer trolley. The slag is discharged into the slag pot.

2.6.1.2. LADLE FURNACE AND VACUUM DEGASSING UNITThe ladle furnaces are used to refine steel & VD furnace helps in degassing steel and

they act as a buffer between EOF and continuous casting machine. It is utilized to

maintain high levels of steel cleanliness, de-sulfurisation and accurate temperature

control. The required temperature is maintained with the help of small electrodes, while

the melt is homogenized by introduction of inert nitrogen/argon gas. The ladle is then

lifted and taken to vacuum degassing unit. Vacuum degassing refines the molten steel

by removing unwanted hydrogen and nitrogen gases. The molten metal ladle from LF

is placed under vacuum generated by multiple stage steam ejectors. After sampling of

the steel and temperature measurement, the ladle is shifted to continuous casting

machine. The vacuum-degassing unit utilizes steam generated by a boiler (run by

furnace oil).

2.6.1.3. BILLET/BLOOM CASTERSDuring continuous casting, the refined liquid steel passes from the pouring ladle, with

the exclusion of air, via a tundish with an adjusTable discharge device (nozzles) into

the short, water-cooled mould. The shape of the mould defines the shape of the steel

i.e blooms or billets. The red-hot strand, solidified at the surface zones, is drawn from

the mould by driving rolls. Once it has completely cooled and solidified by carefully

spraying water, the strand is divided by mobile gas cutting torches. The cut pieces are

then allowed to cool and sent to stacking/ storage yard/rolling. A third strand of

casters and a strand EMS has been proposed for each of the bloom and billet casters.

This will reduce the casting time and also give better quality of blooms and billets.

Page 52: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

33

2.6.2 MANUFACTURING PROCESS FOR ROLLING MILLSteel manufactured in the steel shop will be sent to rolling mill unit for products of

specified sizes. The process includes pre-heating in the furnace and hot rolling

followed by shot blasting, mechanical surface finishing before inspection and

stacking. A flow chart for manufacture of steel making and rolling mill is given in

Figure-2.6 & 2.7.

Figure - 2.6 Process Flow Chart of Steel Making Unit

Energy Optimizing Furnace

Ladle Refining Furnace

Vacuum Degasing

Continuous Casting

Gas Cutting & Cooling

Stacking & Inspection

(Blooms & Billets)

Dispatch

Rolling Mill

Ferro alloys

Conditioning andinspection

Dispatch

Hot Metal DRIScrap

FerroAlloys

Fluxes

Ferro alloysPlant returns

Page 53: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

34

Figure – 2.7 Process Flow Chart of Rolling Mill

2.6.3 MANUFACTURING PROCESS FOR METALLURGICAL COKE

The manufacturing of metallurgical coke and its process are enumerated as under

and the flow diagram for the proposed Coke Oven Plant is given in Figure-2.8 later in

the section.

Reheating Furnace

Blooming Mill

Hot Saw

Cooling & Stacking

Shot Blasting

Magnetic Particle Inspection

Stacking

Mech. Surface Finishing

Band Saw

Non Destructive Testing

Dispatch

Induction Heating

Bright bar

Dispatch

Plant Return toEOF/BOF

Billets from Steel Mill

Page 54: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

35

2.6.3.1 COAL HANDLING AND PREPARATIONCoal from different sources will be brought to the factory site by trucks and unloaded

on to the raw material stockyard. The coal will be have moisture of around 8%,

therefore, reduces the risk of fugitive emissions. In the stock yard it will be blended to

optimum composition required for coking. After blending it will be crushed to 100%

through 1 mm by suiTable crushers. The crushed coal falls directly into the coal

charging Car and is stamped suitably. Water is the sole binder to form the coal cake.

The Charging car is of about 24 ton capacity and will move on rail tracks for charging

the ovens. The empty Car after charging is brought back to the crusher/coal bunker

for further loading of coal. The specifications of coal used in coke oven plant is given

in Table-2.7

Table-2.7 Characteristics of Coking Coal

Sl. No Parameter Value1 Total 8% max2 Ash content 8% max3 Volatile matter 24% max4 Sulphur 0.5% max5 Phosphorus 0.02%6 MMR of vitrinite 1.2-1.3%7 Vitrinite percentage 70% max8 CSN 6-89 Fluidity 1000ddpm10 Size >50mm

2.6.3.2 COMPACTING STATIONDuring the Stamp Charging, the water content serves as a binder. However, the

density of stamped coal cake is about 1100 kg/m³ (wet) against 750 kg/m³ of coal in

Beehive Ovens. The increase in bulk density is about 40%. The dimension of coal

cake is slightly lesser than the opening dimension of the coke oven. It will help in

easier pushing process.

2.6.3.3 CHARGING CARThe compacted coal cake shall be freely rested on top of the charging plate in the

compacting box at the compacting station and shall be transferred from the

compacting box by transfer drive of Charging Car and thus charged into the oven.

Page 55: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

36

When the coal cake reaches its end position inside the coke oven chamber, the

charge trestle shall hold the cake in position and the plate will be withdrawn. After

extraction of charging plate, the car shall be ready for the next charging operation.

2.6.3.4 COKE OVEN BATTERIES

It has been proposed to install two batteries of 30 Ovens each with a level coal

charge capacity of 23 to 25 tons with coking cycles of 65 to 70 hours. This will have

an annual production capacity of 1,20,000 MTPA of coke. Two sets of 30 ovens shall

be connected to a chimney.

The ovens are constructed with alumina bricks of different sizes, shapes and

specifications. The mosaic of bricks of different specification ensures that high

alumina bricks are used in the areas of oven that calls for higher and more expensive

specifications. The areas subjected to less stringent thermal requirements shall have

bricks of less expensive specifications. The capacity of coke oven battery is given in

Table-2.8.

Table-2.8 Capacity of Coke Oven Batteries

No. of batteries 2Ovens per battery 30

Chimney per battery 1Height of chimney 30 mCoke per ton of coal 0.700 TGas generation 5.25 T /T of CoalAir for carburization 4.94 T/T of coalTotal Coal charge per oven 23 to 25 TCoking Cycle 65 to 70 hrLevel coal charge capacity of oven 10 TOperating days of coke ovens 300 d/yrPlant capacity in each phase 120 000 T/a of CokeOperating temp. of oven 1230-1250 0CGas temp. at battery outlet 1000-1050 0C

2.6.3.5 PUSHER CARCoke pushing operation after 65 to 70 hrs cycle from oven will be done with the help

of a separate coke push car, which pushes the hot coke cake into the hot coke car.

Pusher car shall have pusher beams, which shall rest on guide rollers driven by

motor, gearbox and rack & pinion arrangement. The pusher shield, which will push

the hot coke cake from the ovens, shall be fixed to the pusher beams along with

Page 56: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

37

vertical rollers and cold air ducts. The carriage will have four wheel bogies and each

will be driven by electric motors, gearbox, coupling and brakes. The pusher car shall

be positioned on the pusher side of the oven and the hot coke car shall be positioned

on the coking side. Coke oven doors of both sides shall be opened and the pusher

beams shall slowly push the hot coke cake from the oven to the hot coke car.

The hot coke cake pushed from the oven by the pusher shall slide into the hot coke

car at the same horizontal level to avoid potential emission arising out of coke falling

and disintegrating during the pushing operation.

2.6.3.6 HOT COKE CARThe hot coke car shall have a long travel car, which travels lengthwise along the

coking side of the coke ovens. On this trolley a hot coke tray is fixed to receive the

hot coke cake from the ovens and bring the same to the quenching tower for

quenching operations. The long travel car shall be a four wheel bogie traveling on

longitudinal rails. The four wheel bogie shall be driven by an independent drive

motor, gearbox, couplings and brakes. Hot coke tray shall be hydraulically operated

with guide wheels which shall be rested on support beams of the long travel car.

When the hot coke cake is ready in a particular oven to push the same to the hot

coke car, the long travel car shall be taken to that particular oven and hot coke tray

shall be fixed near the oven floor. The hydraulic cylinder shall operate and fix the hot

coke tray near the oven keeping the trolley level and oven floor level at the same

level. When the hot coke cake slides into the hot coke tray, the long travel car shall

travel and bring the cake to the quenching tower for quenching operation.

2.6.3.7 QUENCHED COKE PUSHERThis is a stationary machine located in the compacting station adjacent to the

quenching tower. The pusher ram shall empty out the quenched coke from the hot

coke car.

2.6.3.8 QUENCHING TOWERQuenching Tower shall have equipment to quench the hot coke cake with water and

push the same to coke hoppers for further processing.

When hot coke car comes to the quenching tower, the car shall be positioned so that

the hot coke cake is quenched by dousing large quantity of water. The quantity of

water required for this operation shall be of the order of about 70 T for each

quenching operation. But the loss of water through evaporation shall be in the range

Page 57: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

38

of 0.70 T of water per ton of coke. In order to limit SPM emissions in the plume the

quenching tower shall be fitted with a system of grit arresters, which shall entrap

suspended particulate matter and make it fall back to the bottom of the tower.

A mild steel water tank of sufficient capacity forms a part of the quenching process

along with necessary pipes and spray nozzles which are fitted in the quenching

tower.

2.6.3.9 COKE SIZINGAfter quenching the hot coke shall be pushed from the hot coke tray to the coke

hoppers for further processing, particularly, for screening and coke cutting operations.

First it will be cut into required size of 30-80 mm and will be fed to vibrating screen

having 3 Decks. From first Deck, the oversize coke will go back to cutter. From 2nd

deck sized coke will directly go to Trucks for dispatch and from 3rd deck, the fines will

be taken away by a separate conveyor and stored at separate place. The

characteristics of coke oven gas and quality of metallurgical coke is given below.

Table-2.9 Characteristics of Coke Oven Off-Gas

Table-2.10 Quality of Metallurgical CokeSl.No. Parameter Value1 Ash 8-10%2 Moisture 4% max3 Sulphur <0.7%4 Phosphorous <0.03%5 Volatile 1% max6 Carbon Balance7 M10 <7%8 M40 >80%9 CSR +65min10 CRI 23-26

Sl.No Parameter value1 Oxygen 9-11%2 CO2 8% max3 CO 0.01%4 SO2 0.0010%max5 Steam 2 to 3%6 Nitrogen 76 – 78%

Page 58: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

39

2.6.3.10 SALIENT FEATURES OF COKE OVEN PLANT

Coke is required for captive consumption as a reducing & heat sourcing agent

in the blast furnaces to reduce Fe2O3/Fe3O4 ores to Fe.

Low ash metallurgical non recovery coke oven plant will reduce the

dependency on imported costly coke, generate coke using Indian & imported coal

and generate power based on waste heat recovery. It will also be cost effective,

environment friendly and energy efficient. This will help to meet the market

competition in steel sector.

“Non recovery” type coke making technology is practiced with provision for the

heat recovery from the waste gases. The technology is developed indigenously by

“The Central Fuel Research Institute, Dhanbad” and is comparable with the best

in the world.

Coke making is environmentally friendly. It is completely pollution free, as it

works on negative pressure in the ovens.

The power generated will be utilized to meet the captive requirement in the

coke oven as well as in the associated steel plant.

Figure-2.8 Process flow Chart for Coke Oven Plant

Stacking ofdifferent qualitiesof Coal

Blending Silo withweigh feeders

Crushing /Pulverizing

Stamping Oven Charging Coal Hoppers

Carbonization

LAMCoke

Pusher /Discharge

QuenchingTower

CokeCutter

Screening

Off-gases

45 TPH Waste Heat RecoveryBoiler

To Blast Furnace

Steam

9 MWPowerGeneration

Return Fines

To SinterPlant

Page 59: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

40

2.6.4 POWER GENERATION PROCESS (BASED ON COKE OVEN OFF–GAS)This Coke Oven Off–Gas flow rate is estimated to be 1,22,500 kg/hr from the Coke

oven plant of 1,20,000 T/a capacity having temperature around 950 0C is proposed to

be used in waste heat boiler for the production of high pressure steam. Super-

heated steam 45 T/hr, generated at a temperature of 485 ºC and a pressure of 65

kg/cm2 is used in Turbo Generator to generate 9 M.W. power. The power will be

utilized to meet the captive requirement in the coke oven as well as in the associated

steel plant. The exhaust gas from the plant is relatively clean and free from SPM and

hydrocarbons. The exhaust gas from boiler is vented through chimney of adequate

height. Flow chart for 9.0 MW power plant based on coke oven off gases is given in

Figure-2.9.

Figure-2.9 Flow Chart of Power Generation Scheme

2.6.5 PRODUCER GAS PLANT

2.6.5.1 BACKGROUND OF PRODUCER GAS1. Producer gas is generated through thermal coal by heating and mixing water

with coal.Producer Gas has been in use in many industries as a cheap Gaseous

Fuel since Mid-nineteenth Century. The flow diagram of producer gas plant is given

in Figure-2.10. It was a development over use of solid‐fuel which had several dis

GENERATOR

BLENDEDCOAL CAKE

OVEN

COKEAIR

FEEDWATERSTEAM

FANBOILER S

TACK

FLUE GAS

STEAMTURBINE

Page 60: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

41

advantages, viz, lower thermal efficiency due to use of too much excess air,

difficulty in smooth control of furnace or kiln temperature, limited area of

application etc.

2. Right from the inception, Producer Gas was generated from the reaction of Air

+ Steam with coal‐bed in single‐stage generators either made of bricks in the initial

stages or steel with water jacket or refractory lining in the later versions. The grate

was also initially fixed but later on developed to Rotary Grate with better

throughput, easy movement of ash etc.

3. Before extensive production of Natural Gas and other Petro fuels at a

moderately lower cost, Producer Gas had been a versatile fuel owing to several

advantages over the solid fuels, viz, ease of production, better thermal efficiency in

the application, ease of control of furnace temperature, smoother flame etc. As a

result many industries all over the world have been using Producer Gas as a

cheaper energy in various field of applications viz, glass and ceramics,

Refractories, Lime‐klins, Dryers, Heating furnaces etc but with limited flame

temperature up to 1000°C to 1100°C.

4. But the producer Gas from earlier 19th

Century conventional Single stage

design has several disadvantages also. In these Gasifiers, the product gas comes

out from the top at a temperature of 470o to 500oC at which tar contained in the

gas cracks to soots and gummy maters, which deposit in the pipe lines, burner

nozzles etc, intern schocking them. This necessitates frequent ‘Burning Out’

operation store move the deposits which in turn results in interruptions and

reduced stream– days. The sketch of such a system has been shown in Figure1.

Here the consistency of operation and production can be achieved with the

installation of elaborate cleaning and detarring system at a high cost. At the same

time Calorific value of Gas also comes down owing to condensation of tar vapour

and other volatile matters to whatever extent it might be present in the gas. Due to

the above short comings, the various dis advantages which are normally faced in

single stage gasifiers are summarized below:

i. The Calorific value of Producer Gas is lower (1000 to 1250 kcal/Nm3)

ii. There is no consistency in Gas quality.

iii. There are frequent interruptions in the process due to de choking

operations.

iv. These producers can perform better only with high grade of coal with very

Page 61: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

42

low ash content which is rarely found in the country.

v. Also clean gas from this Single stage Producers can be obtained only after

thorough cleaning in the elaborate cleaning facilities at a cost of Rs. 1.0 to 1.5

crore.

vi. As a result of Condensation and de tarring and unproductive generation of

soots, the gas make as well as calorific value of gas and thermal efficiency

becomes poorer (65% to 75%).

vii. Limited use in industries requiring lower flame temperature.

viii. These gasifiers are not pollution free which is a serious draw back under

the present day circumstances.

Table-2.11 PGP COAL CHARACTERISTICS

Sl no Parameter Unit Value

I Ash + moisture % (Wt/Wt) 28.7 to 34.0

ii Calorific value Kcal/kg 3360 to 4200

iii Coal size mm +25 to +40

Figure-2.10 Process Flow Chart of Producer Gas Plant

GASIFIER FUEL

FUELPREPARATION

RAW FUEL

CONDENSATE

ASH & CHAR

AIR

RAW GAS

FUELFEEDER

GASIFIER

ASHDISCHARGE

GASCLEANING

GAS

COOLING

REHEATINGFURNACE

ASH & CHAR CONDENSATE

Page 62: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

43

2.6.6 PULVERZED COAL INJECTION SYSTEMPulverized Coal injection (PCI) is a process that involves blowing large volumes of

fine Coal granules in to the BF. This provides a supplemental carbon source to speed

up the production of metallic iron, reducing the need for coke production. As a result

energy use and emissions can be reduced. However, as coke provides physical

support and gas permeability in the BF, its complete substitutions is not possible. The

amount of coal that can be injected will depend on the coal and coke quality, furnace

geometry, and operational practices. The flow diagram of pulverized coal injection

system is given in Figure-2.11.

Figure-2.11 Flow diagram of pulverized coal injection system

Page 63: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

44

Table-2.12 PCI Coal Specifications

Sl. No. Parameter unit Value

I Moisture % (Wt/Wt) 7.5 to 9.5

ii Calorific value Kcal/kg 6400 to 6600

iii Ash % (Wt/Wt) 14 to 18

iv Volatile material % 23 to 30

2.7 RAW MATERIAL & PRODUCTS2.7.1.1. REQUIREMENT, STORAGE & HANDLINGThe quantity of raw materials required by the industry is in the Table 2.13 below. Raw

materials as listed will be procured as per the production requirement.

Table-2.13 Characterstics of Raw Materials And Additives

Sl.No.

Materials &source

Plant QuantityT/A

Composition Storage

1 Ferro silicon

From local market

Steel mill 768180 Si- 70-75 %Al-2%C-0.15%S-0.05%Phosphate-0.05%

Stored insidethe closedshed.

2 Lime

From BagalkotDist.

Steel mill 16500 CaO- 45%MgO- 5%Al2O3-15%SiO2-5%

Preparedclosed shed

3 Dolomite

From BagalkotDist.

Steel mill 1521 CaO- 30%MgO- 18%Al2O3-1.5%SiO2-3%

Preparedclosed shed

4 Silicon

manganese

From local market

Steel mill 1280700 Mn-66%Si-16%C- 2%Fe-16%

Stored inside

the closed

shed.

5 DRI

From BMM Ispat,DruvadeshMetasteels etc

Steel mill 42300 Fe- 91%C-2.5%P-0.05%S- 0.05%Gangue- 4.8%

Stored inside

the closed

shed.

6 Ferro manganese

From local market

Steel mill 1535400 Mn- 80%C-6%Fe- 14%Si-0.27%

Covered plantarea

8 Ca Silicon

From local market

Steel mill 383850 Si-52-65%Ca-30-33%Al-2%C-1.5%P-0.05%

Stored insidethe closedshed.

Page 64: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

45

Table-2.14 Raw Materials Requirement, Transportation & Storage Details

Sl.No. Raw material Requirement

TPATransportation Storage

1.0 STEEL MILL

1Hot metal from BF plantfrom captive source 2,33,000

In plantmovement Nil

2Scrap & Pigs fromcaptive source 14,100 Lorry Covered plant

area

3Direct reducediron(DRI) 42,300 Covered trucks Storage shed

4Ferro alloys andadditives 3968130 Trucks Covered plant

area

5 Plant return scrap 15000 Trippers Nil

6 Oxygen 34000 Closed pipeline Storage tanks

7 Lime/Dolo 36,000 Trucks Prepared closedshed

2.0 ROLLING MILL8

Steel Billets from steelmill, captive source

3,20,000 EOTcranes/roller

Tables

Internal plantstorage

9 Purchased billets/blooms

33,000 Trucks Storage yard

3.0 COKE OVEN PLANT10 Coking coal 1,71,428 Railway/trucks Storage shed

4.0 COKE OVEN OFF GAS BASED CAPTIVE POWER PLANT

11Coke oven off gas at1050 0C, captivesource,

8,99,999 Insulated duct Nil

5.0 PRODUCER GAS PLANT AND PULVERIZED COAL INJECTION

12 Coal 77,000 Railways/trucks Storage shed

Page 65: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

46

Table-2.15A Material Balance for Energy Optimising Furnace

Sl. No. Input/Output

Type of material Description ofmaterial

Sp.Cons/D

Sp.Cons/Annum

1.1 Input Fe bearing material Hot metal, T 750 2250001.2 DRI, T 141 423001.3 Scrap, T 47 141002.1 Fluxes & ferro alloys

alloys alloysBurnt lime, T 55 16500

2.2 Burnt dolomite,T 5 15212.3 Carbon injection,T 4 12002.4 Ferro silicon,T 2 4802.5 Silicon manganese,

T4 1200

3.1 Utilities Oxygen, Kg/T 59850 1795500

03.2 Nitrogen, Kg/T 5586 1675800TOTAL INPUT 66443 3773601

1.1

OutputLiquid metal, T 853 255900

1.2 Slag, T 52 153541.3 Sludge, T 17.06 51181.4 Off gases,Nm3/h 150000 4500000

01.5 Runner & ladle skull,T

1.706 511.8TOTAL OUTPUT 150922

.944776883.8

Table-2.15 B Material Balance for Ladle Refining Furnace

Sl. No. Input/Output

Type of material Description ofmaterial

Sp.Cons/D

Sp.Cons/Annum

LADLE REFINING FURNACE1.1 Input Fe bearing material Liquid metal, T 853 2559001.2 Ferro silicon, T 2559 7677001.3 Ferro manganese,T 5118 15354001.4 Silico manganese,T 4265 12795001.5 Sulphur ,T 1706 5118001.6 Electrodes, T 6824 2047200

TOTAL INPUT 21325 63975001.1 Output Slag, T 102 327551.2 Ladle skull, T 210 6824

TOTAL OUTPUT 312 39579

Page 66: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

47

Table-2.15C Material Balance for Rolling Mill

Sl. No. Input/Output

Type of material Description ofmaterial

Sp.Cons/D

Sp.Cons/Annum

1.1 Input Fe bearing material Billets, T 1067 3200001.2 PGP gas,Nm3/h 15000 4500000

TOTAL INPUT 16066 48200001.1 Outpu

tMill scale,T 21 6397

1.2 Billet cut ends, T 34 10918TOTAL OUTPUT 55 17315

Table-2.15 D Material Balance for Continous Casting Machine

Sl.No. Input/Outpu

Type of material Description ofmaterial

Sp.Cons/D

Sp.Cons/Annum

1.1 Input Fe bearing material Liquid metal,T 853 255900TOTAL INPUT 853 255900

1.1 Output

Mill scale, T 2559 8181.2 Billet cut ends, T 818 262041

TOTAL OUTPUT 3377 262860

Coking coal is obtained either from indigenous source and transported through rail or

lorry transport or import source & transported through rail, road & sea. The other raw

materials (other than captive) are either obtained from local suppliers (Gujarat,

Maharashtra, Karnataka, and Andhra Pradesh) by rail, road.

2.8 TRANSPORTATION OF RAW MATERIAL & PRODUCTSTransportation of raw materials is shown in Table 2.16

Page 67: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

48

Table-2.16 Transportation of Raw Materials

Sl.No. Raw material Requirement

TPATransportation Storage

1.0 STEEL MILL

1Hot metal from BF plantfrom captive source 2,33,000

In plantmovement Nil

2Scrap & Pigs fromcaptive source 14,100 Lorry Covered plant

area

3Direct reducediron(DRI) 42,300 Covered trucks Storage shed

4Ferro alloys andadditives 3968130 Trucks Covered plant

area

5 Plant return scrap 15000 Trippers Nil

6 Oxygen 34000 Closed pipeline Storage tanks

7 Lime/Dolo 36,000 Trucks Prepared closedshed

2.0 ROLLING MILL8

Steel Billets from steelmill, captive source

3,20,000 EOTcranes/roller

Tables

Internal plantstorage

9 Purchased billets/blooms

33,000 Trucks Storage yard

3.0 COKE OVEN PLANT10 Coking coal 1,71,428 Railway/trucks Storage shed

4.0 COKE OVEN OFF GAS BASED CAPTIVE POWER PLANT

11Coke oven off gas at1050 0C, captivesource,

8,99,999 Insulated duct Nil

5.0 PRODUCER GAS PLANT AND PULVERIZED COAL INJECTION

12 Coal 77,000 Railways/trucks Storage shed

The finished products like billets, rolled products will be transported through trucks or

by rail.

Page 68: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

49

2.9 POWER REQUIREMENT, SOURCE & UTILIZATIONThe proposed industry is power intensive and needs assured power at economical

cost. The total power requirement of the industry is 20MW. The source availability

power is given below. Power requirement for the expansion project is as tabulated

below.

Table-2.17 Power Requirement for Expansion ProjectSl.No. Requirement Power required

(MW)1 SMS plant. 9.732 Rolling Mill 3.53 Oxygen plant 3.3754 Coke oven 0.4005 Coke oven gas based power plant 1.356 Pulverised coal injection 0.657 Producer gas plant 0.995

Total 20 MW

Sl. No. Source Power (MW)8 Captive power plant based on

coke oven off gas.9.0

9 KPTCL supply 11 MWTotal 20 MW

2.10 FUEL REQUIREMENTCoal is pulverized and used for injection in blast furnace. Coal is also used in

preparation of producer gas. Furnace oil and diesel are used in furnaces. The

quantity, utilization and storage of these fuels is given below.

Table-2.18 Furnaces & Utilization of Fuels

Sl.No.

Fuel Application Utilization Storage & capacity

1 HSD/LDO Turndish Preheating, 2 nos.

600 KL/Yr 22 Kl X 2, M.S.underground tank

2 Furnace oil VD Boiler / Reheating furnace

3000 KL/Yr 70KL X 2 tanks, M.S.above ground tank.

3 B Grade coal PCI Unit/producer gasplant

30,000 TPA Concrete yard, 2 acre

4 BFG Ladlespreheating, 4nos./reheatingfurnace.

30000NM3/hr. Captive source directlyfrom BF

Page 69: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

50

Table-2.19 Characteristics of furnace oil

Table-2.20 Characteristics of HSD

Table-2.21 Characteristics of Blast Furnace Gas

Slno

Parameter Unit Value

1 Gross calorific value Kcal/kg 100002 Carbon % 843 Moisture % 14 Sulphur % 4

Sl no Parameter Unit Value

1Ash % by mass 0.01

2Cetane no Min 51

3Total sulphur Mg/kg max 50

4Water content Mg/kg max 200

5Kinematic viscosity CST at 40 deg C 2-45

6Flash point (Pensky martin) Deg C 66

Slno

Parameter Unit Value

1 Gross calorific value Kcal/Nm3 6502 Oxygen % 1.2

3 Hydrogen % 21.5 to 5.5

4 Nitrogen % 55.3 to 57.3

5 Carbon monoxide % 19.5

6 Carbon dioxide % 21

Page 70: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

51

2.11 WATER REQUIREMENT, SOURCE & UTILIZATION2.11.1 REQUIREMENT & SOURCES OF WATERThe source of water for the proposed plant will be Tungabhadra River. The

infrastructure facilities for supply of water from the source to the plant water reservoir

includes provision of intake structure and pumps at the reservoir and laying of piping

main from reservoir up to the plant. Water will be stored in an earthen reservoir of

capacity 0.6 million m3 approx. Raw water treatment plant will be installed for

pretreatment of raw water and the clarified water will be pumped through MS pipe

line to the proposed units.

The fresh water requirement for the proposed project will be about 3005 m3/d

including 2965 and 40 m3/d for domestic use. This will be met from Tungabhadra

river source. Water will be drawn only during rain and flood period from the

backwater of the river and stored in the water reservoir of 0.6 million m3 capacity.

The water from the reservoir will be used in the industry.

Government of Karnataka through its High Level Single Window Committee has

allotted 9012 m3/d (2 MGD) of water from Tungabhadra river. Further, the permission

from Irrigation Department for drawl 0.19TMC of water from the river is obtained.

2.11.2. UTILIZATION OF WATER AND WATER BALANCEIron and steel making and also the power plants are energy intensive where materials

undergo various cycles of heating and cooling. Water is predominantly used for

equipment and material cooling. In order to conserve freshwater, water economy

has been an underlying criterion for selection of plant and equipment. Open-circuit

industrial water re-circulation systems with evaporative cooling towers have been

planned for the secondary side of heat exchangers as well as for direct cooling

circuits. Process water losses will be compensated by adding make-up water of

respective qualities. In addition, it is used for steam rising in boilers, dust

suppression, domestic, fire Figurehting and greenery development. Fresh water is

needed in cooling systems to compensate evaporation losses and blow down. Water

balance for the industry is given in Table- 2.22.

Page 71: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

52

Table-2.22 Water Balance (Water Consumption and Waste Water Generation)

Water consumed for Consumption(KLD)

Discharge (KLD)Evaporation& drift loss

Discharge/blowdown

DOMESTICToilet, Canteen and Washing 41 8 32

INDUSTRIAL1. STEEL PLANT

1 Cooling blowdown 1432 1169 263

2. ROLLING MILL1. Cooling blow down 712 618 94

3. COKE OVEN PLANT1. Quenching blowdown

289 235 532. Stamp chargespraying blow down3.

29 25 44. COKE OVEN GAS BASED POWER PLANT

1. Boiler blowdown

55 39 162. Cooling blowdown

76 63 135.PRODUCER GAS PLANT

1 cooling 190 180 06. AIR SEPARATION PLANT

1.Cooling 192 157 35Total Water blow down 473Total(domestic + industrial)

2826 2494 510

2.11.3. WATER TREATMENT PLANTThe water treatment plant already present will be upgraded and utilized. The plant

consists of chemical mixing unit, flocculator and clarifier. The clarified water is

treated in sand pressure filter, carbon filter and the disinfected by chlorine treatment.

The treated water is demineralised in ion exchange unit for use in boiler.

2.12 SOURCE OF POLLUTION & THEIR MANAGEMENT / DISPOSAL

Liquid, gaseous and solid wastes generated from the industry are likely to cause

environmental pollution. A suiTable waste management system including reduce,

recycle and reprocess techniques is adopted in the industry to control pollution on the

Page 72: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

53

environment. The waste generation and inbuilt pollution control measures are given

below.

2.12.1 WASTE WATER MANAGEMENT

Table- 2.23 Waste Water Treatment and DischargeSewage/effluentgenerated from

Treatment units provided Final disposal point

Domestic effluent

Total: 32 m3/d

Existing Sewage TreatmentPlant of 60 KLD capacity will beutilized for treating the Sewagefrom the existing and proposedexpansion activities.

Re-used for green-beltdevelopment.

(b) Industrial

Blow down fromcirculatingcooling &process water

Total : 473 m3/d

The wastewater is equalizedand collected in the guard pond.The pond has a capacity to holdwastewater for about 30 days.The guard pond is of earthenwork impervious construction &located at ground level. Thetank interior is suitablycompacted and finished. Thesize of guard pond is as givenbelow.

Re-used for green-beltdevelopment, dustsuppression & road cleaninginside the plant premises.

2.12.2 GASEOUS EMISSIONS AND APC MEASURES

2.12.2.1. GASEOUS EMISSIONSThe gaseous emission sources with flow rate, characteristics and its controlled

measures are given in Table-2.24.

2.12.3 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENTSolid wastes are generated at various stages & units in the manufacturing process

their characteristics are provided in the Table 2.25. Some of them are proposed to be

recycled & re-used. The solid waste quantity generated from the process and its

management is provided in Table 2.26. About 8-10% metal is recovered from the

EOF slag by magnetic separation, 25-30% powder rich lime is used for brick

manufacturing, remaining portion is used for civil works and road works. LRF slag will

be used for brick manufacturing. Ash generated from the producer gas will be used

for brick manufacturing and sold to brick making industries near Harihar area when

there is excess storage.

Page 73: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

54

Table-2.24 Gaseous Emissions & APC MeasuresSl.No. Source of emission Characteristics,

Composition,APC measures,& Stack ht, m

1. STEEL PLANT

1EOF ( Flue gas), Flow: 81000m3/hTemp. : 60-800C.

CO :100 mg/Nm3

PM : 2000mg/Nm3

GCP, Venturiscrubber,Stack ht : 45 m

2

LRF ( Flue gas), Flow: 16000m3/hTemp: 40-600C.

CO2: 100mg/Nm3

PM :2000mg/Nm3

Fume extractionsystem withstack Stack ht :30 m

3

Caster(Steam Exhaust),Flow : 15000m3/hTemp: 40-600C

CO2: 100mg/Nm3

PM :2000mg/Nm3

Steam exhaustthrough stack.Stack ht : 30m

4

Vacuum degassing unit,Flow: 25000m3/hTemp: 170-2000C

CO2: 100mg/Nm3

PM : 2000mg/Nm3

NOx: 200mg/Nm3

Sox :100 mg/Nm3

Stack ht : 52 m

2. ROLLING MILL

5

Reheating furnace ( fumes),Flow: 21000m3/hTemp: 100 -1200C

CO :100 mg/Nm3

PM: 50 mg/Nm3

NOx: 100mg/Nm3

Stack ht : 45 m

3. COKE OVEN PLANT (NON RECOVERY TYPE)

6Coke oven battery exhaust gasses,Flow: 630000 m3/hTemp: 40-600C

CO2 100 mg/Nm3

PM :2000mg/Nm3

NOx: 200mg/Nm3

Sox :100 mg/Nm3

Stack ht : 42m

4.COKE OVEN GAS BASED CAPTIVE POWER PLANT

7 Boiler emissions

CO2 30 mg/Nm3

PM : 100mg/Nm3

Sox :10 mg/Nm3

Stack ht : 52 m

5. PRODUCER GAS PLANT

8PGP,Flow:15,000 Nm3./hTemp: 40-600C. (withB grade coal)

GCV of 1500kcal/nm3

SoxStack ht : 30m

6. PULVERIZED COAL INJECTION

9PCI,Flow : 35,000nm3/hrTemp : 40-600C

NOx: 200mg/Nm3

Sox :100 mg/Nm3stack ht : 30m

Page 74: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

55

Table-2.25 SOLID Waste Characteristics and Storage

Sl.No.

Solid waste Composition Storagefacility

Quantity T/A

1. STEEL PLANT1. EOF sludge Fe- 45% Settling

tanks 5118

2. EOF slag CaO- 40-52%SiO2-10-19%Fe2O3-10-40%MnO-5-10%Al2O3-1-3%

Slag coolingpit

15354

3 Ladle slag CaO-30-60%SiO2-2-35%FeO-0-15%MgO-1-10%Al2O3-5-35%

Dumpingpits

32755

4 Cut end fromcaster

Iron bearingmaterial

Reused inEOF 6300

5 Mill scale fromcaster

Iron bearingmaterial

reused insinter plant 4200

2. ROLLING MILL6 Cut ends/

coblingsIron bearingmaterial

reused inEOF 10918

7 Mill scale Iron bearingmaterial

reused insinter plant 6398

3. COKE OVEN PLANT8 Coke fines/ nut

coke from cokescreen

<10mm dia Sinter plant13200

9 Coal fines fromcoal crushers

Carbonmaterial

Recirculatedin coke oven 1283

3.PRODUCER GAS PLANT/PULVERIZED COAL INJECTION PLANT10

Ash

Carbonresidue

Used forbrickmanufacturing

16000

11Tar

Complexmixture ofhydrocarbons

Mixed withFO & usedas fuel

7700

Page 75: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

56

Table- 2.26 Solid Waste Management

Sl.No. Solid waste Quantity

(TPA) Utilization/ Disposal

1. STEEL PLANT

1 EOF GCP sludge 5118 Reused in sinter plant

2 EOF slag 15354 Used for civil works, road worksafter metal recovery

3 Ladle slag 32755 Used for civil works, road works

4 Cut end from caster 6300 Reused in EOF5 Mill scale 4200 Reused in sinter plant

2. ROLLING MILL6 Cut ends/ coblings 10918 Reused in EOF/BOF

7 Mill scale 6398 Used in sinter plant

3. COKE OVEN PLANT

8Coke fines/ nut cokefrom coke screen

13200 Coke fines used in sinter plant

9Coal fines from coalcrushers 1283 Recycled as coke oven feed

4. PRODUCER GAS PLANT/PULVERIZED COAL INJECTION PLANT

10 Ash 16000 Will be used for brickmanufacturing

11 Tar 7700Used as fuel along with FO &residue sold to Koramandelrefractories, Hubli

Page 76: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT
Page 77: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

CHAPTER -3

DESCRIPTION OFENVIRONMENT

Page 78: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT
Page 79: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

57

CHAPTER – 3

DESCRIPTION OF ENVIRONMENT

3.1 INTRODUCTION

This chapter illustrates the description of the existing environmental status of the

study area with reference to the prominent environmental attributes. The existing

environmental setting is considered to establish the baseline conditions which are

described with respect to physical environment, air environment, noise environment,

traffic pattern and density, water environment, land environment, biological

environment, socio economic environment.

3.1.1 METHODOLOGY

The data was collected from both primary and secondary sources. The data thus

collected was compared with the standards prescribed for the respective

environmental parameters.

Secondary data was assessed by literature review of studies conducted in the

past by various private and government publications. The data thus collected were

compared with the standards prescribed for the respective environmental

parameters. Topography of the study area is given in Figure-3.1.

Primary data sources include the data collected through environmental

monitoring/ survey of the study area during the study period. The studies involved

conducting field studies and analyzing various parameters that might be affected due

to the industry and conducting socio-economic survey among the people. For

reconnaissance survey the sampling locations were identified based on:

Existing topography and meteorological conditions

Locations of water intake and waste disposal points.

Location of human habilitation and other sensitive areas present in the

vicinity of the proposed project site.

Representative areas for baseline conditions.

Accessibility for sampling

The scoping and the extent of data generation were formulated based on

interdisciplinary team discussions, and professional judgment keeping in view of TOR

assigned by MOEF. The base line studies started with reconnaissance survey and

Page 80: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

58

the site visits in the study area for fixing the monitoring locations for collection of the

primary data. Various Government and other organizations were approached for

getting information for the secondary data generation. The various parameters

surveyed and studied for the baseline study are discussed in the following

components.

Physical environment Air environment Noise environment Traffic pattern and density Water environment Land environment Biological environment Socio economic environment.

3.1.2 STUDY AREAThe environmental impact due to the project is likely to affect the project site and its

surroundings consisting of about 10 km region around the factory premises.

Therefore, the study area for monitoring of environmental parameters covers 10 km

distance around the project site. The topography map of the study area is given in

Figure- 3.1.

Page 81: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

59

3.1.3 STUDY PERIODThe studies were carried out for one season during post-monsoon period for 3

months from 11.12.2013 to 11.03.2014.

Figureureure-3.1 The Topography Map of the Study Area (10 km around ProjectSite)

Source: GSI; Scale: 1:50000

10 Kms Radius

Page 82: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

60

3.2 ESTABLISHMENT OF BASELINE

3.2.1 METEOROLOGICAL DATAAssessment of the micro and macro meteorology is important from the standpoint ofunderstanding the nature and extent of air pollution in the study area. Climate has animportant role in the build-up of pollution levels. The climatic condition of the area maybe classified as moderately or seasonally dry, tropical or temperate savanna climatewith four seasons in a year. Winter is critical for air pollution build-up because offrequent calm conditions with temperature inversions resulting in poor atmosphericmixing, natural ventilation and high emission loads.

The classification of months according to the seasons is given in the following Table

Season PeriodSummer March to MayMonsoon June to September

Post monsoon October to NovemberWinter December to February

The metrological data reflecting minimum, maximum temperature in 0C, relativehumidity in %, rainfall in mm/hr, wind speed in m/s, mixing height in m, cloud cover intenths and atmospheric pressure in mb for the year 2013 obtained from modelingstudies carried out using U.S. EPA AERMOD dispersion model, 1996 – 2013 LakesEnvironmental Software, Version 7.1.0 has been appended as Table-3.1.

Page 83: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

61

Table-3.1 Meteorological Data of Site for the Year 2013

MonthTemperature

0C

Relativehumidity

%

Precipitationrate (mm/hr)

Atmosphericpressure

(mb)

Windspeed(m/s)

Winddirection

(from)

Inversion/ mixingheight

(m - max)

Cloudcover

(tenths)Min Max Min Max Ave Min Max Min Max Min Max

Jan 14.6 26.2 36 65 1.52 947 957 0 5.1 NE 652 2 10Feb 16.1 27.5 42 59 0.76 946 955 0 4.6 NE 594 2 10

Mar 18.8 31 33 63 1.02 946 956 0 6.2 NE &NW 681 2 10

Apr 18.6 33.8 33 71 2.29 944 954 0 5.7 SW 783 2 7May 20.8 33.9 32 55 4.32 944 952 0 5.7 SW 783 2 10June 21.1 32.4 40 59 3.56 943 950 0 8.7 SW 1324 2 10July 20 30.9 46 74 3.3 942 952 1.5 9.8 SW 1563 3 10Aug 20.2 30.4 50 79 6.1 942 951 1.5 9.8 SW 1421 3 10Sept 17.2 31 31 76 2.29 943 953 1 8.2 SW 1210 2 10Oct 20.4 31.6 34 69 18.03 946 954 0 6.7 NE 762 2 10Nov 17.2 28.4 38 58 Nil 948 956 0 7.7 NE 1051 2 10Dec 13.1 28 37 56 Nil 949 956 0 7.7 NE 1057 2 10

Page 84: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

62

3.2.1.1 TEMPERATURE

The mean maximum temperature is observed at (33.9°C) in the month of May and

the mean minimum temperature at (13.1°C) is observed in the month of December.

In the summer season the mean minimum temperature is observed during the month

of April (18.6°C). During the monsoon the mean maximum temperature is observed

to be 32.4°C in the month of June with the mean minimum temperature at 17.2°C

during September. By the end of September with the onset of post monsoon season

(October - November), day temperatures drop slightly with the mean maximum

temperature at 31.6°C in October and mean minimum temperature is observed at

17.2°C in November. The values are presented in Table 3.1.

3.2.2.2 RELATIVE HUMIDITY

Minimum and maximum values of relative humidity have been recorded. The

minimum humidity is observed to be at 31% in the month of September and the

maximum is 79% in the month of August. The mean minimum values of humidity

during summer, monsoon, post-monsoon and rainy seasons are 32%, 31%, 34% &

36% during the months of May, September, October and January respectively.

Similarly the maximum values are 79%, 76%, 74%, 71% in the months of August,

September, July & April during the summer, monsoon, post monsoon & winter

seasons. The values are presented in Table 3.1.

3.2.2.3 RAINFALL

The monsoon in this region usually occurs twice in a year i.e. from June to

September and from October to November. The maximum annual rate of

precipitation over this region an average 18.03 mm/hr.

3.2.2.4 ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE

The maximum and the minimum atmospheric pressures are recorded during all

seasons. In the summer season, the mean maximum and minimum pressure values

are observed to be 956 mb in the month of March and 944 mb in the months of April

Page 85: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

63

& May. During monsoon season, the maximum pressure is 953 mb and minimum 942

mb. The maximum pressure during the post-monsoon season is observed to be 956

mb in November and minimum pressure is 946 mb in the month of October. During

the winter season the minimum atmospheric pressure is 946 mb in February and the

maximum is 957 mb in the month of January. The values are presented in Table 3.1.

3.2.2.5 INVERSION HEIGHT

The maximum inversion heights at the project site for all the months of the year is as

given in the Table 3.1. The maximum mixing height of 1563 m is observed during the

month of July and the minimum inversion height is 594 m in the month of February.

3.2.2.6 CLOUD COVER

The minimum cover measured in the unit of tenths is 2 and the maximum observedcloud cover is 10.

3.2.2.7 WIND

The data on wind patterns are pictorially represented by means of wind rosediagrams for the entire year as Figure- 3.2 (1-4) (for four different seasons).

Table- 3.2 Predominant Wind DirectionsSeason Period Wind direction (from)Summer March to May South to WestMonsoon June to September South to WestPost monsoon October to November North to EastWinter December to February North to East

Page 86: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

64

Figure-3.2 Wind rose diagrams3.2.A March to May (summer season)

WRPLOT View - Lakes Environmental Software

WIND ROSE PLOT:

Summer Season - March to May

COMMENTS:

MODELER:

DATE:

8/18/2012

PROJECT NO.:

NORTH

SOUTH

WEST EAST

3%

6%

9%

12%

15%

WIND SPEED(m/s)

>= 11.1

8.8 - 11.1

5.7 - 8.8

3.6 - 5.7

2.1 - 3.6

0.5 - 2.1

Calms: 8.51%

TOTAL COUNT:

2208 hrs.

CALM WINDS:

8.51%

DATA PERIOD:

2011Mar 1 - May 3100:00 - 23:00

AVG. WIND SPEED:

2.60 m/s

DISPLAY:

Wind SpeedDirection (blowing from)

2013

Page 87: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

65

3.2B. June to September (monsoon Season)

WRPLOT View - Lakes Environmental Software

WIND ROSE PLOT:

Monsoon Season - June to September

COMMENTS:

MODELER:

DATE:

8/18/2012

PROJECT NO.:

NORTH

SOUTH

WEST EAST

14%

28%

42%

56%

70%

WIND SPEED(m/s)

>= 11.1

8.8 - 11.1

5.7 - 8.8

3.6 - 5.7

2.1 - 3.6

0.5 - 2.1

Calms: 0.17%

TOTAL COUNT:

2928 hrs.

CALM WINDS:

0.17%

DATA PERIOD:

2011Jun 1 - Sep 3000:00 - 23:00

AVG. WIND SPEED:

4.57 m/s

DISPLAY:

Wind SpeedDirection (blowing from)

2013

Page 88: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

66

3.2C October to November (post monsoon season)

WRPLOT View - Lakes Environmental Software

WIND ROSE PLOT:

Post-monsoon Season - October to November

COMMENTS:

MODELER:

DATE:

8/18/2012

PROJECT NO.:

NORTH

SOUTH

WEST EAST

6%

12%

18%

24%

30%

WIND SPEED(m/s)

>= 11.1

8.8 - 11.1

5.7 - 8.8

3.6 - 5.7

2.1 - 3.6

0.5 - 2.1

Calms: 11.54%

TOTAL COUNT:

1464 hrs.

CALM WINDS:

11.54%

DATA PERIOD:

2011Oct 1 - Nov 3000:00 - 23:00

AVG. WIND SPEED:

2.77 m/s

DISPLAY:

Wind SpeedDirection (blowing from)

2013

Page 89: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

67

3.2D December to February (winter season)

WRPLOT View - Lakes Environmental Software

WIND ROSE PLOT:

Winter Season - December to February

COMMENTS:

MODELER:

DATE:

8/18/2012

PROJECT NO.:

NORTH

SOUTH

WEST EAST

6%

12%

18%

24%

30%

WIND SPEED(m/s)

>= 11.1

8.8 - 11.1

5.7 - 8.8

3.6 - 5.7

2.1 - 3.6

0.5 - 2.1

Calms: 13.75%

TOTAL COUNT:

2160 hrs.

CALM WINDS:

13.75%

DATA PERIOD:

2011Check Date Range Report00:00 - 23:00

AVG. WIND SPEED:

2.38 m/s

DISPLAY:

Wind SpeedDirection (blowing from)

2013

Page 90: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

68

3.3 AIR QUALITY

3.3.1 ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES FOR AIR QUALITY MONITORING

PM10 and PM2.5 have been estimated by gravimetric method. Modified West and

Gaeke Method (IS: 5182 Part – II, 1969) has been adopted for estimation of SO2.

Jacobs – Hochheiser Method (IS: 5182 Part-VI, 1975) has been adopted for the

estimation of NOx. NDIRS (Non-Dispersive Infra-Red Spectroscopic) Method (IS:

5182 Part-X, 1999) has been adopted for the estimation of CO and Electrochem

sensor method has been adopted for the estimation of Ozone. Spectrophotometric

method for ammonia, AAS (Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry) method for lead.

Summary of the analytical techniques and their references are as given in Table-3.3.

Table-3.3 Techniques Adopted/Protocols for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

SL.No Parameters Techniques Technical

Protocol

MinimumdetecTablelimits asprovided by lab

1 Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) West & Gaeke IS:5182 (P2) 4 mcg2 Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) Jacob & Hochheiser IS:5182 (P6) 1 mcg3 Particulate Matter PM10 Gravimetric IS:5182 (P15) 5 mcg4 Particulate Matter PM2.5 Gravimetric - 5 mcg5 Ozone (O3) Electrochem sensor - NIL

6 Ammonia as NH3 SpectrophotometricHandbook ofair pollution

analysisNIL

7 Carbon monoxide asCO

NDIR IS: 5182 (P-10) 10 mcg

8 Lead as Pb AAS IS:5182 (P22) 0.01 mcg

3.3.2 AIR QUALITY MONITORING

The baseline air quality was established by monitoring major air pollutants like

suspended particulate matter, oxides of sulfur, nitrogen etc. at various locations near

the project site.

High volume samplers were used for ambient air sampling. Samples were collected

continuously from all the stations for 24 hours. Samples thus collected were analyzed

for various pollutants.

Page 91: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

69

Baseline data for ambient air quality was collected at 12 locations ( including one in

down ward direction) within the study area during the period of December 11, 2013 to

March11, 2014. The sampling stations along with their distance and direction from

the project site, ambient air quality monitoring stations, wind rose diagram showing

the direction of the blowing wind during the analysis period, ambient air quality

analysis data for various parameters, National Ambient Air Quality Standards

specified by MoEF are detailed in the report

To study the existing ambient air quality, monitoring was done by Bangalore Test

House, Bangalore, NABL Accredited lab with the frequency of two days/week for the

project site and weekly for other locations.

The observations made during the study period are presented under the forthcoming

sub-sections.

3.3.3 METHODOLOGY ADOPTED FOR THE STUDYThe baseline status of the ambient air has been established through a scientifically

designed ambient air quality monitoring network. The following criteria were taken

into account during selection of the sampling stations:

Topography of the area

Human settlements within the study area

Safety, accessibility and non-interference with general routine of the people

residing near the station

Prediction of maximum concentration of the air pollutants through dispersion

modeling for the proposed source details using prevailing meteorological

conditions in the region.

Page 92: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

70

Table-3.4 Ambient Air Sampling Stations

Sl.No. Code no. Name of the station

Directionfrom thesite

Distancefrom site(km)

1 A 1 Vasthu Building South-WestSLR Plant

Premises2 A 2 Near Guard Pond North-West -

3 A 3 Near Weigh bridge No. : 01 North -

4 A 4Nearer to 66 KV electric tower

no 20East 0.2

5 A 5 Near Administration Building South-East -

6 A 6 Project site North-east -

7 A7 Lokappanahola S-E 2.0

8 A8 Mariyammanahalli S-E 5.0

9 A9 Devalapura SS-E 7.410 A10 Nagalapura S-EE 9.511 A11 MarabbihaluTanda S-W 7.3

12A12 Down

WindDirection

Rajapura N-E 9.0

Page 93: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

71

Figure-3.3 Location of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring StationsM/s S L R Metaliks Limited, Narayanadevarakere, Lokappana Hola, H.B Halli Tq.,

Bellary Dist

A4A1A2 A3

A5A6

A7

A9

A8

A100

A11

A12

Page 94: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

72

3.3.3.1 AIR QUALITY AT THE PROJECT SITEAir quality at the project site Ambient air quality analysis was conducted at the project site by-weekly for 3 months from11.12.2013 to 11.03.2014. The analysis reports are appended in the Table-3.5 below.

Table-3.5 Air quality data analysis at the project site

Note: PM10 & PM2.5 - Particulate matter; SO2 – Sulfur dioxide; NOx– Oxides of nitrogen; NH3 – Ammonia ; C6H6 –Benzene; As – Arsenic; Ni – Nickel; Pb – Lead; O3 – Ozone; CO – Carbon monoxide; ND – not detected Air quality data analysis reports are for 24 hourly average

Sampleno.

PM2.5 PM10 SO2 NOx NH3 Pb O3 C6H6

Benzo(a)pyrene inparticulate

phase

As Ni CO Hydro-corbons in

ppmµg/m3 ng/m3 mg/m3

A1 30.11 62.35 9.3 10.3 NIL NIL NIL ND ND NIL ND 0.12 NILA2 29.25 61.44 8.3 9.4 NIL NIL NIL ND ND NIL ND 0.13 NILA3 23.67 53.11 8.5 9.1 NIL NIL NIL ND ND NIL ND 0.12 NILA4 22.58 60.02 9.2 8.4 NIL NIL NIL ND ND NIL ND 0.16 NILA5 21.13 57.78 8.4 8.9 NIL NIL NIL ND ND NIL ND 0.13 NILA7 20.29 53.44 5.3 6.5 NIL NIL NIL ND ND NIL ND 0.05 NILA8 29.32 61.78 5.4 6.1 NIL NIL NIL ND ND NIL ND 0.06 NILA9 21.25 45.88 6.3 6.9 NIL NIL NIL ND ND NIL ND 0.07 NIL

A10 20.65 46.68 6.8 6.4 NIL NIL NIL ND ND NIL ND 0.05 NILA11 22.65 46.89 5.9 6.2 Nil NIL NIL ND ND NIL ND 0.09 NIL

Page 95: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

73

3.3.3.2 AIR QUALITY IN THE DOWN WIND DIRECTION (RAJAPURA)Ambient air quality analysis was conducted at Rajapura weekly for 3 months from 11.12.2013 to 11.03.2014. The analysisreports are appended in the Table below.

Table-3.6 Air Quality Data at Rajapura, A9 (downwind direction)

Sampleno.

PM2.5 PM10 SO2 NOx NH3 Pb O3 C6H6

Benzo(a) pyrenein particulate

phaseAs Ni CO HC -

methane

µg/m3 ng/m3 mg/m3 ppmA12.1 25.1 36.1 10.7 11.6

ND Nil Nil ND ND ND ND

0.13

ND

A12.2 24.8 34.0 10.3 11.2 0.12A12.3 26.2 34.5 10.2 12.9 0.12A12.4 24.6 35.2 10.4 11.8 0.11A12.4 27.4 35.7 11.3 12.3 0.14

A12.5 26.5 38.4 11.6 12.4 0.13

A12.6 25.6 37.2 11.9 11.9 0.12

A12.7 27.1 35.9 12.6 11.6 0.11A12.8 34.1 42.5 13.9 11.5 0.10A12.9 33.5 41.4 13.2 11.1 0.13

A12.10 31.5 41.6 13.0 12.3 0.12A12.11 32.9 40.5 11.9 12.2 0.11

Page 96: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

74

3.3.3.3 AIR QUALITY AT OTHER LOCATIONS

Air quality at the project site: Ambient air quality analysis was conducted at the project site by-weekly for 3 months from11.12.2013 to 11.03.2014. The analysis reports are appended in the Table-3.7 below

Table-3.7 Air Quality Data Analysis

Sampleno.

PM2.5 PM10 SO2 NOx NH3 Pb O3 C6H6

Benzo(a)pyrene inparticulate phase

As Ni CO Hydro-corbonsin ppm

µg/m3 ng/m3 mg/m3

A2 30.11 62.35 9.3 10.3 NIL NIL NIL ND ND NIL ND 0.12 NILA3 29.25 61.44 8.3 9.4 NIL NIL NIL ND ND NIL ND 0.13 NILA4 23.67 53.11 8.5 9.1 NIL NIL NIL ND ND NIL ND 0.12 NILA5 22.58 60.02 9.2 8.4 NIL NIL NIL ND ND NIL ND 0.16 NILA6 21.13 57.78 8.4 8.9 NIL NIL NIL ND ND NIL ND 0.13 NILA7 20.29 53.44 5.3 6.5 NIL NIL NIL ND ND NIL ND 0.05 NILA8 29.32 61.78 5.4 6.1 NIL NIL NIL ND ND NIL ND 0.06 NILA9 21.25 45.88 6.3 6.9 NIL NIL NIL ND ND NIL ND 0.07 NIL

A10 20.65 46.68 6.8 6.4 NIL NIL NIL ND ND NIL ND 0.05 NILA11 22.65 46.89 5.9 6.2 Nil NIL NIL ND ND NIL ND 0.09 NIL

Page 97: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

75

Table-3.8 Ambient air quality standards – MoEF as per the notification dated16th November 2009 for industrial, residential & rural areas

Air quality parameterConcentration

24 hrs Annual

1 Particulate matter (size lessthan 10 µm), PM10, µg/m3

100 60

2 Particulate matter (size lessthan 2.5 µm), PM2.5 ,µg/m3

60 40

3 Sulfur-di-oxide, µg/m3 80 504 Nitrogen dioxide, µg/m3 80 405 Ammonia (NH3), µg/m3 400 1006 Benzene (C6H6), µg/m3 - 57 Benzo(a) pyrene in particulate

phase, ng/m3- 1

8 Arsenic (As), ng/m3 - 69 Nickel (Ni), ng/m3 - 20

10 Lead (Pb), µg/m3 1 0.511 Ozone (O3), µg/m3 180 – 1 hr 100 – 8 hrs12 Carbon monoxide, mg/m3 4 – 1 hr 2 – 8 hrs

Note: 8 hourly or hourly monitored values, as applicable, shall be complied with 98%

of the time in a year. 2% of the time, they may exceed the limits but not on two

consecutive days of monitoring.

Whenever and wherever monitoring results on two constitutive days of

monitoring exceed the limits specified above for the respective category, it shall

be considered adequate reason to institute regular or continuous monitoring and

further investigation.

3.3 3.4 Observations

It has been observed that the maximum concentration of all the parameters

monitored at all the locations are within the limits specified by MoEF (as per the

notification dated 16th November 2009 for industrial, residential & rural areas).

Marginally high values at Vasthu Building are due to the frequent movement of

vehicles.

Page 98: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

76

3.4 NOISE ENVIRONMENT

The proposed project is an integrated steel industry and hence requires movement of

raw materials, products, fuels, tools & tackles required for its manufacturing process

and also transportation of finished products to its destination. The movement of

personnel from their residence to industry would also result in a moderate increase in

the traffic, which would not result in any drastic change in either the existing traffic

pattern or noise levels of the area as accommodation facilities are proposed within

the project site for most of the employees.

Background noise levels were measured using integrated sound level meter in 9

locations (Table-3.9). Monitoring locations were located within the study area (Figure

3.4). A sound level meter was used for measuring the noise level at one-hour interval

continuously for 24 hrs at 1.5 m above ground level, about 3 m from walls, buildings

or other sound reflecting sources.

The measurements were carried out in such a way that the monitoring locations were

1 m away from the sources and 1 m away from the edge of the roads. The maximum

and minimum noise levels are presented in Table 3.9 and the limits as per

Environmental Protection Rules, 1986 for industrial, commercial & residential areas

are presented in Table-3.10 as under.

Table-3.9 Noise Level Monitoring Stations

Sl.No.

CodeNo. Location Direction

from siteDistancefrom site,

km.dB(A)max.

dB(A)min.

Industrial Limits 751 N 1 Project site - - 62.3 48.72 N 2 Vasthu Building SW - 66.9 49.7

3 N3 Near AdministrationBuilding South East - 65.4 47.69

4 N4 Nearer to 66Kvelectric tower no.20 East 0.2 62.3 46.8

Residential Limits 555 N 5 Lokappanahola S-E 2.0 54.9 41.46 N 6 Mariyammanahalli S-E 5.0 51.5 38.97 N 7 Devalapura SS-E 7.4 52.4 39.18 N 8 Nagalapura S-EE 9.5 53.7 38.39 N9 MarabbihaluTanda S-W 7.3 53.6 41.2

10 N10 Rajapura N-E 9.0 52.2 39.7

Page 99: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

77

Figure-3.4 Location of Ambient Noise Level Monitoring Stations

Table-3.10 Noise level Limits as per Environmental Protection Rules

Limits as per Env. Protection Rules, 1986 in dB(A)Leq

Industrial area Commercial area Residential areaDay Night Day Night Day Night75 70 65 55 55 45

3.4.1 OBSERVATIONSThe baseline noise levels have been monitored at different locations as indicated in

the Table above. The noise level in the study area varies between 38.3 – 66.9. It has

been observed that the maximum noise levels at all the locations are within the limits

specified for industrial/residential areas.

N1N2N3 N4

N5 N6

N7

N9

N10

N8

Page 100: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

78

3.5 WATER ENVIRONMENT

3.5.1 RECONNAISSANCE SURVEY

The impact has been assessed on randomly selected surface and ground watersources falling within the impact zone.In order to assess the existing water quality, the water samples were collected fromEight different locations within the study area and analyzed as per the procedurespecified in standard methods for examination of water and wastewater published byAmerican Public Health Association and Bureau of Indian Standards (APHA/BIS).Name of the locations, orientation with respect to the project site along with the typeof source sampling stations are provided in Table 3.11 and the analytical data forsurface water quality and ground water quality at all locations has been depicted inthe following Tables 3.14 and 3.15 respectively.

Table-3.11 Water Sampling Stations

Sl.No.

CodeNo. Name of the Station Direction

from siteDistance

fromsite (km)

Source/ Type

1 1 GW 1 Project site Within theproject

premises-

Bore well

2 2 GW 2 Near Chemical lab Bore well

3 3 GW 3 Lokappanahola S-E 2.0 Bore well4 4 GW 4 Venkatapuram E 3.5 Bore well5 5 GW 5 Mariyammanahalli S-E 5.0 Bore well6 6 GW6 Ayanahalli S-E 2.5 Bore well7 7 GW7 Dhanapura colony S-E 4.7 Bore well8 8 GW8 Varadapura S 4.5 Bore well9 9 LW 1 DhanayakanaKere S-E 7.2 Lake water

10 LW 2 Ayanahalli LakeWater S-E 2.5 Lake Water

11 RW 1 Reservoir water(Tungabhadra) S-W 1.5 Reservoir

10 12 RW 2 Reservoir BackWater N 1.5 Reservoir

Page 101: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

79

3.5.2 ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES FOR WATER QUALITY MONITORING

Table-3.12 Protocol for Surface Water Quality Monitoring

Sl. No. Parameter/Test ProtocolPhysical parameters

1 pH IS: 3025 (P 11)2 Suspended solids IS: 3025 (P 17)3 Color & odor IS: 3025 (P 4&5)4 Oil & grease IS: 3025 (P 39)

Chemicals parameters5 Total dissolved solids IS: 3025 (P 16)6 Ammoniacal nitrogen, as N IS: 3025 (P 34)7 Total kjeldahl nitrogen, as N IS: 3025 (P 34)8 Biochemical Oxygen

Demand at 270 C for 3 daysIS: 3025 (P 44)

9 Chemical Oxygen Demand APHA10 Chlorides, as Cl IS: 3025 (P 32)11 Sulfates, as SO4 IS: 3025 (P 24)12 Nitrates, as NO3 IS: 3025 (P 34)13 Phosphates, as PO4 IS: 3025 (P 31)14 Phenolic compounds, as

C6H5OHIS: 3025 (P 43)

15 Total hardness, as CaCO3 IS: 3025 (P 21)16 Calcium, as Ca IS: 3025 (P 40)17 Magnesium, as Mg IS: 3025 (P 46)18 Nitrates, as NO2 IS: 3025 (P 34)19 Alkalinity, as CaCO3 IS: 3025 (P 23)20 Fluoride, as F IS: 3025 (P 60)21 Electrical conductivity APHA22 Dissolved oxygen, mg/L -

Page 102: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

80

Table-3.13 Protocol for ground water quality monitoring

Sl.No. Parameter/Test Unit Protocol

1 Color True color units IS: 3025 (P 4)2 Odor - IS: 3025 (P 5)3 Taste - IS: 3025 (P 8)4 Turbidity NTU IS: 3025 (P 10)5 pH - IS: 3025 (P 11)6 Chlorides as Cl mg/L AN-S-0037 Total hardness as CaCO3 mg/L IS: 3025 (P 21)8 Calcium as Ca mg/L IS: 3025 (P 40)9 Magnesium as Mg mg/L IS: 3025 (P 46)10 Total dissolved solids mg/L IS: 3025 (P 16)11 Sulfates as SO4 mg/L AN-S-00312 Copper as Cu mg/L IS: 3025 (P 42)13 Iron as Fe mg/L IS: 3025 (P 53)14 Manganese as Mn mg/L IS: 3025 (P 59)15 Nitrate as NO3 mg/L AN-S-00316 Fluoride as F mg/L AN-S-00317 Phenolic compounds as

C6H5OHmg/L IS: 3025 (P 43)

18 Mercury as Hg mg/L IS: 3025 (P 48)19 Cadmium as Cd mg/L IS: 3025 (P 41)20 Selenium as Se mg/L IS: 3025 (P 56)21 Arsenic as As mg/L IS: 3025 (P 37)22 Cyanide as CN mg/L APHA23 Lead as Pb mg/L IS: 3025 (P 47)24 Zinc as Zn mg/L IS: 3025 (P 49)25 Anionic detergents as MBAS mg/L Annex K of IS:1342826 Chromium as Cr+6 mg/L IS: 3025 (P 52)27 Residual free chlorine mg/L IS: 3025 (P 26)28 Alkalinity as CaCO3 mg/L IS: 3025 (P 23)29 Aluminum as Al mg/L IS: 3025 (P 55)30 Boron as B mg/L APHA

Page 103: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

81

Figure-3.5Location of Water Quality Sampling Stations

3.5.3 SURFACE WATERThe fresh water source within the study zone is Tungabhadra River. The water

requirement for the proposed steel unit will be sourced from Tungabhadra river. The

supply of water to the industry will be metered for its quantification. The results of the

analysis of surface water samples are as given in Table-3.14.

3.5.4 GROUND WATERGround water occurs under water Table conditions in the weathered mantle of granite

gneisses and in the joints, cracks and crevices of the basement rock. The depth of

water is also dependent on topography and varies depending on the depth of

weathering. Groundwater samples collected from 8 different sources is analyzed as

per drinking water standard.

GW1 GW2GW3

GW 7GW5

RW1 LW2,GW6

LW1

RW2

GW8

Page 104: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

82

Table -3.14 Analysis of surface water samples

Sl.No. Tests Unit

Results MaximumAccepTable

Limits As perIS:10500-2012

Maximum PermissibleLimits in the Absence ofAlternate Source As Per

IS:10500-2012

LW1Dhananayak

ana Lake

LW2Ayyanhalli

Lake

RW1Reservoir water(Tungabhadra)

RW2Reservoir Back

Water

1 Color True colorunits 7.0 15.0 9.0 10.0 Max.5 Max.15

2 Odor - Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable --

3 Taste - NotAgreeable Not Agreeable Not Agreeable Not Agreeable Agreeable --

4 Turbidity NTU 2.5 1.9 2.2 2.1 Max.1 Max.5

5 pH - 8.64 8.57 8.71 8.63 6.50 to 8.50 No relaxation

6 Chlorides as Cl mg/L 22.9 57.4 14.9 16.8 Max. 250 Max.1000

7 Total hardnessas CaCO3

mg/L 87.1 89.1 90.2 88.3 Max. 200 Max.600

8 Calcium as Ca mg/L 25.4 19.8 29.6 30.1 Max.75 Max.200

9 Magnesium asMg mg/L 5.8 9.6 10.3 10.1 Max.30 Max.100

10 Total dissolvedsolids mg/L 182.0 260.0 293.0 278.2 Max.500 Max.2000

11 Sulfates as SO4 mg/L 11.3 5.8 15.6 14.3 Max.200 Max.400

12 Copper as Cu mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 Max.0.05 Max.1.5

13 Iron as Fe mg/L 0.09 0.08 0.08 0.07 Max.0.30 No relaxation

14 Manganese asMn mg/L <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 Max.0.1 Max.03

Page 105: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

83

15 Nitrate as NO3 mg/L 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 Max.45 No relaxation

16 Fluoride as F mg/L 0.4 0.5 0.4 0.5 Max.1.0 Max.1.5

17Phenolic

compounds asC6H5OH

mg/L Absent Absent Absent Absent Max.0.001 Max.0.002

18 Mercury as Hg mg/L <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 Max.0.001 No relaxation

19 Cadmium as Cd mg/L <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 Max.0.003 No relaxation

20 Selenium as Se mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 Max.0.01 No relaxation

21 Arsenic as As mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 Max.0.01 Max.0.05

22 Cyanide as CN mg/L Absent Absent Absent Absent Max.0.05 No relaxation

23 Lead as Pb mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 Max.0.01 No relaxation

24 Zinc as Zn mg/L 0.02 0.03 0.03 0.03 Max.5 Max.15

25Anionic

detergents asMBAS

mg/L <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 Max.0.20 Max.1.0

26 Chromium as Cr+6 mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 Max.0.05 No relaxation

27 Residual freechlorine mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 Min.0.20 Min 1.0

28 Alkalinity asCaCO3

mg/L 117.7 146.0 148.0 136.5 Max.200 Max.600

29 Aluminum as Al mg/L 0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 Max.0.03 Max.0.2

30 Boron as B mg/L <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 Max.0.5 Max.1.0

31 ColiformOrganisms /100 ml Absent Absent Absent Absent Less than 1

32 E.coli Bacteria /100 ml Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent

Page 106: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

84

Table-3.15 Ground water quality

Sl.No. Tests Unit

Results MaximumAccepTable

Limits As perIS:10500-2012

Maximum PermissibleLimits in the Absence

of Alternate SourceAs Per IS:10500-2012

Projectsite

NearChemical

labLokappanahola

Venkatapuram

ayyanhalli

Mariyammanahalli

Varadhapura

Dhanapuracolony

1 ColorTruecolorunits

<2.0 <2.0 <2.0 <2.0 <2.0 <2.0 <2.0 <2.0 5 25

2 Odor - Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Un-objectionable Un-objectionable

3 Taste - Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable

4 Turbidity NTU 0.1 0.1 0.4 0.3 0.3 0.2 0.2 0.2 5 10

5 pH - 7.61 7.34 7.83 7.91 7.76 7.13 7.3 7.43 6.50-8.50 No relaxation

6 Chloridesas Cl mg/L 59.2 85.3 128 110 124 96.3 76.3 92.3 250 1000

7Total

hardnessas CaCO3

mg/L 267.3 425.7 216.1 281.1 203.1 296.3 286.3 265.3 300 600

8 Calciumas Ca mg/L 55.6 65.3 50.1 52.6 48.1 59.3 54.3 58.3 75 200

9Magnesium as Mg mg/L 31.3 31.3 25.9 29.5 23.9 28.4 23.4 24.4 30 100

10Total

dissolvedsolids

mg/L 580.0 1054.0 564 558 534 592 526 492 500 2000

11 Sulfatesas SO4

mg/L 29.0 107.1 34.6 39.6 31.6 38.5 40.5 28.5 200 400

12 Copperas Cu mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 0.05 1.5

13 Iron as Fe mg/L 0.09 0.07 0.3 0.01 0.3 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.30 1.0

14 Manganese as Mn mg/L <0.1 <0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.3

15 Nitrate asNO3

mg/L 27.5 28.0 9.1 9.8 4.1 15.6 12.6 14.6 45 No relaxation

16 Fluorideas F mg/L 1.1 1.3 1.0 0.32 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.5

Page 107: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

85

Note: A – Agreeable; NA – Not agreeable; UO – Un-objectionable

17

Phenoliccompoun

ds asC6H5OH

mg/L Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent 0.001 No relaxation

18 Mercuryas Hg mg/L <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 0.001 No relaxation

19 Cadmiumas Cd mg/L <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 0.01 No relaxation

20 Seleniumas Se mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 0.01 No relaxation

21 Arsenic asAs mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 0.01 No relaxation

22 Cyanideas CN mg/L Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent 0.05 No relaxation

23 Lead asPb mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 0.05 No relaxation

24 Zinc as Zn mg/L 0.01 0.05 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 5 15

25Anionic

detergentsas MBAS

mg/L <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 0.2 1.0

26 Chromiumas Cr+6 mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 0.05 No relaxation

27Residual

freechlorine

mg/L <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 0.2 min -

28 Alkalinityas CaCO3

mg/L 359.7 327.0 359.7 359.7 349.7 359.7 324.7 339.7 200 600

29 Aluminumas Al mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 0.03 0.2

30 Boron as B mg/L <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 1.00 5.0

Page 108: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

86

3.5.5 OBSERVATIONSThe physicochemical quality of the ground water sources at and around the plant

site has been analyzed, which indicates that almost all the parameters analyzed are

within “Maximum AccepTable Limits As per IS: 10500-2012.

The analysis of samples collected from rivers & canals for various parameters also

reveals that the quality of water is fairly poTable to meet the quality requirement for

human use.

The observations made are tabulated below

Table-3.16 Observations

Sl.no. Parameter

Surface water Ground waterLake water River Water Project

siteOther

locations1 pH 8.57-8.64 8.63-8.71 7.34-7.61 7.13-7.91

2 Total dissolved solids,mg/L 182.0 - 260.0 278.2-293.0 580.0-

1054.0 558-592

3 Total hardness, mg/L 87.1 - 89.1 88.3-90.2 267.3-425.7

216.1-296.3

4 Fluoride, mg/L 0.4 - 0.5 0.4-0.5 1.1-1.3 0.32 -1.0

5Nitrates, as NO3 ,

mg/L 0.1 0.1 27.5-28.0 9.1-15.6

3.6 SOIL QUALITYThe proposed project site has red soil mixed loamy soil and also having partly red

sandy suiTable for agriculture and horticulture crops. The taluk is having few Rocky

Mountains with exrophytic vegetation.

The soil samples collected from the proposed project site and within the study area

too were analyzed for important parameters and the results of the soil quality are

tabulated in Table-3.17.

Table-3.17 Soil sampling stationsSl.

No.Code No. Name of the

StationDirection from

siteDistance from site

(km)1 S 1 Project site - -2 S 2 Lokappanahola S-E 2.03 S3 Venkatapuram E 3.5

Page 109: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

87

Figure-3.6 Location of Soil sampling stations

S1S2

S3

Page 110: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

88

Table-3.18 Physico-Chemical Characteristics of Soil

Parameter Results (on dry basis)S1 S2 S 3

Description Red soil mixedloamy

Browncolored soil

Brown coloredsoil

pH 20% suspension 7.33 8.60 8.36Organic solids, % 3.8 4.6 10.0

Inorganic solids, % 96.2 95.4 89.9Chlorides as Cl, % 0.005 0.0018 0.0015

Phosphorous as P, % 0.004 0.011 0.077Nitrogen as N, % 0.052 0.09 0.44

Potassium as K, % 0.14 0.0038 4.7Iron as Fe, % 1.53 8.5 0.0045

Sulfates as SO4, % 0.01 0.01 0.31Calcium as Ca, % 0.31 0.32 0.19

Magnesium as Mg, % 0.11 0.08 396.0Conductivity, microomhos/cm

(20% suspension)164.0 153.0 39.

Moisture, % 0.14 2.0 1.5

3.7 LAND USE PATTERNAn area covering 10 km radius, with project site as center, is considered as the

study area.

The major occupation of district is agriculture and 75 p.c. total labour force is

dependent on agriculture for its livelihood. The important crops grown are Cotton,

Jowar, Groundnut, Paddy, Sunflower and Cereals. The net irrigated area is 37 p.c

.to the net area sown. The pattern of land utilization in the district is as under (1997-

98). Land utilization pattern of site is given in Table-3.19.

Table-3.19 Land Utilization Pattern of Site Around 10km Radius

Sl.No.

Land Use Pattern Area coveredin Sq km

Percentage of Totalarea occupied

1 Reservoir & Water bodies 135.11 43.02 Reserved Forest 52.47 16.73 Cultivable land 45.56 14.54 Cultivable waste land 19.17 6.15 Waste land 16.65 5.36 Settlements & Road network 12.25 3.97 Rocky area 32.99 10.5

Page 111: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

89

Figure-3.7 Land Use Map of the Bellary District

3.8 GEOLOGYMore than 55% of the geographical area of Karnataka is covered by Granitic gneiss

and Granitoids of Archaean age and the study area i.e. 10km radius of the SLRM &

its surroundings is largely covered by Granitic gneiss and Granites with a small

patch of Schists belong to Sandur Schist belt of Dharwar origin. The majority of the

study area is highly undulating and dotted with hard rock masses. The north

eastern portion of the study area is covered by Schists of various compositions and

forming as a hill range.

Page 112: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

90

Table-3.20 The Main Rock Types Noticed In the Study Area and theirSuccession

Geological Succession (Age) Details

Pleistocene to Recent Alluvial deposits of Reddish, Reddishbrown, Black soil

Cenozoic QuartziteCambrian Dolerite dykes

Precambrian Dharwad Schist – Sandur Schist belt,Ferruginous quartzite, Amphibolite etc.

Archaean Peninsular Complex – Granitic Gneiss,Granitoids, Grey & Pink Granites

3.8.1 MINERAL RESOURCESThe important minerals found in the vicinity of the study area are quartz, feldspar,

quartzite, opalescent quartz, hornblende, felsites, building stone etc. On the other

hand, banded ferruginous quartzite, banded hematite quartzite, chlorite rich

formations noticed towards north eastern part of the study area at a distance of

7 to 8km.

3.8.2 GEOMORPHOLOGYThe area is predominantly covered by Pediment Inselberg Complex (PIC), and

dotted with Inselbergs (I) of smaller scale. The fringe of the Tunga Bhadra water

spread area is covered by the geo-morphological units like Valley Fill Shallow

(VFS), Pediplain Moderate (PPM) and Pediplain Shallow (PPS). Another major unit

noticed in the area is Pediment (PD) and is seen as a rolling pediment in the area.

A major Structural Hill (SH) is also conspicuously covered the north eastern part of

the study area at a distance of 7 to 8km, and a small Structural Valley (SV) can be

seen at the fringe of north eastern portion. The linear patches of Quart ridge (LR)

and dykes (DD) are also noticed sporadically within the study area. In general, the

topography is of highly undulating and looks like a rolling land with dotted mounds.

The average ground level of the plain portion is between 500 and 550 m above

MSL and that of hills at north eastern portion is between 560 m and 800 m above

MSL.

Page 113: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

91

3.9 HYDROLOGY PROFILETwo fifth of the study area is covered by the backwater of Tunga bhadra reservoir.

However, there are many manmade water bodies (tanks) seen all along the south,

south eastern and eastern portion of the study area and are dry in most of the

period of the water year. Due to high temperature and low rainfall in the region, the

existing water bodies remain dry during non monsoon seasons.

3.9.1 HYDROGEOLOGY

3.9.1.1 OCCURRENCE AND MOVEMENT OF GROUND WATER IN ROCKFORMATIONSThe occurrence of groundwater is mainly controlled by joints and fractures

developed within the rock strata of granitic gneiss, granitoids and alluvial tracts of

the terrain. The occurrence of ground water is very limited in certain pockets of the

terrain as the area is covered by hard rocks and acts as runoff zone for larger

extent.

The recharge of the groundwater is mainly due to natural rainfall, which is less and

sometimes scanty in the region. Therefore, the depth of water Table level in the

area noticed is between 25-50m below ground level. By considering overall

features and prospects of the terrain, it can be assessed that the ground water

movement is from south to north, south to north west and from east to west towards

Tungabhadra River.

3.9.1.2 DEPTH OF GROUNDWATER AND SEASONAL VARIATIONThe area is a rugged and undulating terrain with an average elevation of 525m

above MSL with the general slope towards north. In general the slopes are

moderate. However, the steep slopes are observed very close to the hill ranges, i.e.

at the foot hills of isolated mounds or rocky knobs, rising to a height ranging from

75 to 100m above the regional ground level. The groundwater level in the region

varies between 7 to 15m in monsoon season and 25 to 50m in summer season and

forms a number of groundwater pockets in the entire region with varied water

qualities. The groundwater Table level is purely depending on the undulating

topography of the terrain. Ground water in the region occurs in unconfined

Page 114: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

92

conditions in shallow weathered portions and in semi confined condition in

fractured horizon. Examination of the data collected from these bore wells indicate

that the depth to water Table varies from 7 to15m and the water has been struck at

the depths of 35m to 55m below ground level.

3.9.1.3 LITHO- LOGS

Surface – Red Loamy Sandy Soil Soil

0-5.5 ft – Red Loamy Sandy Soil

5.5 – 40 ft – Highly weathered rock

40-135 ft – Weathered rock with intermittent fractured rock

135-190 ft – Hard rock with minor framed rock.

3.9.1.4 DRAWDOWN AND RECOVERY TESTS or PUMPING & RECOVERYTESTPumping and recovery test has been conducted for two bore wells namely BW-4 &

BW-6 of SLRM and the details of pumping and recovery test is furnished in Table -

5f.

Table-3.21 Pumping & Recovery Test Details of the Bore Wells

Sl.No. Location Latitude &

Longitude

StaticWater

Level in M.

Drawdown in

M.

Discharge(Q)

(M3/day)

Transmissibility (T)M2/day

1OppositeLab. (BW-

4)

N 150 18'49.6" E 760

32' 18.7"24 18.50 72.00 0.713

2

Colonycompoun

d(BW-6)

N 150 18’41.5” E 760

33’ 30.8”17 21.00 84.00 0.733

3.9.1.5 GEOPHYSICAL INVESTIGATIONAs a part of field studies, meticulous geophysical investigations (Vertical Electrical

Soundings - VES) were conducted in the vicinity of SLRM plot, in order to know the

details of subsurface formation, thickness of overburden, presence of fracture zones

etc. Geophysical tests were conducted based on the prevailing hydro-geological

conditions at study area, giving importance to the lithology, groundwater movement,

Page 115: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

93

drainage pattern, structural influence etc. Schlumberger conFigureuration was

adopted and VES data were analysed both by curve matching and curve break

techniques.

Table-3.22 Geophysical Interpretations and Recommendation for Fresh Drilling

Recommendations VES Number VES Number VES NumberSLRM - 2 SLRM - 3 SLRM - 5

Depth recommended in m. 125 120 120

Anticipated Casing in m. 22-25 28-30 20-25

Estimated Yield in LPH. 5500-7500 6000-7000 5000-6000

Occurrence of fracturesbelow ground level in m.

30-40, 60-70,110-120

25-30, 60-70,100-110

12-15 (?), 70-80,90-100

Remarks

Yield graduallyincreases withdepth. PRS is

must forsustainable

yield. Standbypoint in case ofany eventuality.

Yield graduallyincreases withdepth. PRS is

must forsustainable yield.Standby point in

case of anyeventuality.

Yield graduallyincreases withdepth. PRS is

must forsustainable yield.Standby point in

case of anyeventuality.

3.9.1.6 PATHWAYS OF THE POLLUTANTSGeotechnical investigations were carried out by using Resistivity meter to know the

sub surface.

Table – 3.23 Resistance Data

Depth (H) Apparent ResistanceVES –I VES –II VES –III

5 8.4 5.7 5.17 9.71 8.12 7.3

10 11.6 9.43 8.215 14.83 11.61 10.6020 18.92 12.92 11.1330 20.31 14.96 14.2840 24.05 15.05 14.4850 63.64 51.92 46.4870 104.80 95.86 86.32

100 119.07 109.27 99.47125 146.9 135.22 121.0150 172.41 159.0 157.21

Page 116: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

94

Point 1 or VES –I – Area shows 0-7 ft - Red soil7-40 ft - Weathered rock40-100 ft - Fragmented rocks100-150 ft - Hard massive rock

Point 2 or VES –II – subsurface 0-10 ft - Red sandy loamy soil10-40 ft - Highly weathered rock40-125 ft - Highly fractured rock125-150 ft - Hard rock

Point 3 or VES – III – subsurface 0-12 ft – Red Sandy loamy soil12-43 ft – Highly weathered rock43-125 ft – Highly fractured Rock125- 150 ft – Hard rock

Resistance shows the sub-surface formation and its nature. Percolation (seepage)

depends on the formation having more porosity. Porosity of a rock or soil is a

measure of the contained interstices. It is expressed as the percentage of void

space to the total volume of the mass,

α = Porosity then,

α = 100W/ V

W- volume of water required to fill

V- total volume of the rock

Porosity range from zero to more than 50 percent. It directly depends upon the grain

size shape and arrangement of individual particles, distribution by size and degree of

cementation and compaction. In consolidated formations, removed of mineral matter

by solution and degree of fracture are also important.

Vertical distribution of ground water is primarily important in study of pollution and its

pathway. The substance occurrence of ground water may be divided into zones of

saturation and aeration .In the zone of saturation all interstices are filled with water

under hydrostatic pressure .In the zone of aeration all the interstices occupied

partially by water and partially by air.

Water in the soil water zone exists at less than saturation except temporarily when

excessive water reaches the ground surface as from rainfall or irrigation. The zone

Page 117: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

95

extends from the ground surface down through the major root zone .Gravitational

water is excess soil water which drain through the soil under the surface of gravity.

Topography, soil structure, rock formation and vegetation plays an important role for

the passage of the pollutants to the sub surface. In the study area, run-off is more

than infiltration and soil structure is of finite in size and compact because of the

industrial activities. Further, soil is cemented by a fine clay & hence it will not permit

to the sub surface. Area is devoid of any thick vegetation which can allow to

percolate pollutants to the sub surface by means of root system. Hence topography,

soil and vegetation in the plant area will not permit any pollutants to the sub-surface.

3.9.1.7 DRAINAGE AND WATER BODIES

The drainage system noticed in the region is almost dendritic and small portion of

the region is in parallel form and the drainage density is low to moderate forms the

network of several streams originating from the mounds & hillocks. The

Tungabhadra River, which is a prominent water body, flows at northern part of the

study area from northwest to eastern part of the region.

The rest of the water bodies/ tanks in the region were formed by the construction

of bunds across the minor streams (above 3rd & 4th order) for storage of water for

irrigation. The Dhanayakana Kere is the largest among the water bodies and is

located at southeastern part of the site. Several smaller lakes exist throughout the

area and cater to command areas for irrigation during monsoon season. However,

most of the water bodies in the vicinity go dry during summer due to zero inflow

from the drainage system.

3.9.1.8 GROUND WATER POTENTIAL

Ground Water potential has been assessed by site investigation & as per the data

collected from the Central Ground Water Board/ Department. The entire region is

mainly underlined by granitic gneisses and Dharwar schists that are known to be

hard rocks, which have least porosity and permeability. Ground water is found in

pockets in the area in the zones of weathered, jointed and fractured rocks.

Page 118: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

96

Bore wells in the area are of 152 to 165mm dia. and are normally have a depth of

70 m to 120 m. The maximum yield of the bore well in the region recorded is

15m3/hr., and the pumping period varies from 6 to 8 hours/day. The bore well data

from State Panchayat Raj Engineering Department (PRED) indicates that about

80% of the bore wells yield between 0.6 to 5m3/hr and maximum depth of high

yielding bore wells is between 75 to 90m below ground level. Most of the bore wells

deeper than 50m, tap the water from fractured zones encountering between 35m to

90m depth and forms medium to deep aquifers.

3.10 ECOLOGY3.10.1 FLORA AND FAUNA

It is necessary to know the conFigureuration of vegetation, plantation, animals,

birds, aquatic life, wildlife features, bird sanctuaries, national parks, reserved

forests etc., in the study area in order to assess the probable effect likely to be

reflected on the existence of these features after the commissioning of the

proposed project. Presently the proposed site is a plain land with less vegetation

cover mainly herbs.

In the Ramagad Reserve forest which is dry deciduous in nature. It consists of

bare residual hill containing hard rock formation enriched with iron ore as such

the conditions are not much favorable for tree growth as very little soil exist on the

hill. The flora does not contain much timber yielding species nor do they have

good green cover. List of flora found in the Ramgad Reserved Forest,

Mariyammanahalli tanda Village, Mariyammanahalli, Nandibanda, Dhanapura

Village and TB Dam area are tabulated below.

Page 119: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

97

3.10.1.1 FLORISTIC ANALYSIS

Ramgad Reserved Forest

Ruelliapatula, Jacq. Duranta repence.Ruelliaprostrate, Poir Nerium odorum,soland.Tridaxprocumbens, L. Exotic shrubsTridax Sp. Prosopis spicigera. LTriphyllus oxalis Lantana camara, L

Climbing medicinally important herbsAbrus precatoriuos , L treesGymnema sylvestre, R,br Azadirachta indica, A. juss.Pergularia pallid, W.&A. Bambusa arundinacea, willd.Ttinospora cordifolia, miers. Bassia bassia lattifolia, roxb.Tylophara asthmatica, w. &A Bauhinia purpurea,L.Wattacaca volublis Borassus flabelliformis, Lshrub Crataeva riligeosa, fourst.Leea sp. Dalbergia sissoo, roxb.Crotalaria juncea,L. Hardwica binata, roxb.Dichrostachys cinerea, w. &A. Kigelia pinnata, dcGlycine pentapylla ,dalz. Maba buxifolia, cl.Lantana indica,roxb. Mangifera indica,L.Pavvetta indica, L. Morinda tinctoria, roxb.Strobilanthes sp Pongamia glabra , vent.Tecoma stans Santalum album,L.Ipomea sp. Swietania mahagoni, l.Zizyphus jujuba, lam Syzigium alterniforium, walp.Medicinally importants Termilania catappa,L.Shrubs Tinospora cardifolia, miers.Anona squamosa, L. Zizyphus jujuba var.Carrissa diffusa,L. Dominate plantsFluggea leucopyrus, willd. cassia auriuilta,L.Glycosmis cochinchinensis, R,br. Techoma stansJatropha glandulifera,roxb. Hardwicka binata ,roxb.Phylanthus reticulates, poir. Kiegelia pinnata, R.brTodonia viscosaIpomaea sp. Rare occurrence

Bambusa arundinacea, willd.Oranamental shrubs Dendrocalamus strictus, nees.Dendrocalamus strictuse, nees. Leea sp

mariyammana halli tanda village aquatickHerbs Hygrophilia angustifolia,R.br. typha

angustata, B. &chAbutilon indicum, g.don.Amarnaths sp Food cropsCommelina sp.L. Oryze sativa, L.Cymbopogen citrates, stapf. Gajanus gajan,L.Cyperius sp.l. Dolichos lablab, L

Page 120: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

98

Eragostistis sp. Cucurbeta melo, L.Justicia simplex, D. don. Arachis hypogaea, willedLaganaria vulgarious, ser. Zea mays, L.Mimosa pudica, L. ShrubsMirabilis jalaba, L. Cactus sp.Osmium canum,L Discrostachys cineria, w&A.Sida acuta,L. Zizyphus jujube LamSida rhombifolia,L. Medicinal shrubsStachytarpheta indica, Vahl colotrophis gigantea,R.br.Teliocora acumunata,L. Carrissa diffussa, roxb.Vernonia cinerea, less. Cassica quariculata, L.Climbing herbs Phyllantus reticulates,poirAntigonan leptopus, HK&A. Todonia viscosa, linn.Lpomaea staphylina R.&S. Vitex negundo,L.Medicinal herbs Ornamental shrubsAcalypha indica ,L.Andropogon nodus,linn Excotic shrubsCroton sparsiflours, mor Prosopis spicigera,L.Cyanodon doctylon, sper. Lantana camara,L.Datura stramonium,LOcimum sanctum,l. Excotic invasive weedPhylanathus neruri,l. Parthenium hysterophorus L.

treesAcasia leicophloea, willt

Albizzia lebeck, benth Thesphesia popunea, cav.Borassus flabelliformis,L.Cassia fisthula L. Dominate plantsCocos nucifera ,L. Erogostists sp.Dalbergia sisso,roxb. Abutilon indicum,G.don.Mangifera indica,l. Sida acuta,L.Morinda tinctoria,roxb. Sida cordifolia,l.Moringa olefera,lam Sida rhombifolia,L.Muraya koniggi,sprPavetta hispidula,W&A Rare occurrencePavetta indica,L. Phoenix sylvestris,roxb.Phoenix sylvestris,roxb. Strobilanthus spPithocelobium saman, nees. Hygrophilla angustifolia,R.br.Pongamia glabra ,ventStrobilathus spTamarindus indica,L. Endangered flora-nilmariyammanahalli Marselia spHerbs Typha angustata,B&chAchyranthes aspera,L Food cropsClerodendron sp Cucumis melo,L.Cyphrus sp.L. Zea mays.L.Gomphrena sp,jacq. Sacharum officinarum,L.Sida acuta,L. Exotic invasive weedSida cordifolia,L. parthenium hysterophrous L.Sida rhombifolia,L. Kyllinga sp.

ShrubsMedicinal herbs Cactus sp.

Page 121: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

99

aerva tomentosa,forsk. Cassia allata,L.Catheranthus roseus Cassia tara,LOcimum sanctum,L. Medicinal shrubsTridax procumbencse,ham Canthium parviflorum,lamSolanum nigrum,L. Carissa diffusa,roxb.Climbing medicinal herbs Narium odorum, soland.Coccinia indica,W&A. Randia dumetorum,lamSolanum nigrum,L. Ricinus communis,L.Aqutic herbs. Jatropha glandulifera,L

Excotic shrubs Strobilanthus spLantana camara,L Tectona grandis,L.treesAcasia Arabica,willd Dominant plantsAzadiracta indica,A.juss Amaranathus viridis,L.Bassia latifolia,roxb. Cassia quariuilata,L.Cassia fisthula,L. Parthenium hysterophrorusl.Euphorbia anti quorum,linn. Rare occurrenceFicus religiosa,l Marselia spPhoenix sylvestris,roxb.Polyyalthia longifolia,HK.F&T. Endangered flora-nilNandibanda

herbs foodcropsAbutilon indicum, G. don. Arachise hypogaea,willdAchyranthes aspera,L Lycopersisum esculantum.mill.Clerodendron spGomphrena procumbence ,jacq Exotic invasive weedAmaranthus viridis ,L Parthenium hysterophrous L.Ipomaea sp.Sida rhombifolia ,L ShrubsStachyrtapheta indica ,vahl. Cassica allata,L.Tephorsia pupurea ,pers Cassia quriqulata,L.

Clerodendron sp

Medicinal shrubsMedicinal herbs Caltrophis gigantean,Rbr

Tomentosa,forsk Euphorbia tirucalli,L.Ecipta alba,hassk.Evolvalues alsinoider,L. Exotic shrubTridax procumbence,ham Prosopis spicigera ,Llantana camara,L

Climbing medicinal herbs treesLogenaria vulgeris ,ser Acasia leaucophoea,willt.Coccinia indica,W&A. Albizzia lebeck,benth.Tinospora cardifolia,meirs. Azadiracta indica,A,jussBorassus flabelliformis,L Amaranathus viridis,L.Cocos nusifera,L. Cassia quariuilata,L.Euphorbia antiquorum,linn. Parthenium hysterophorous L.Ficus religiosa,L. Sida cordifolia,L.Wrightia tinctoria,R.br.

Page 122: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

100

Rare occurrenceLogeneria vulgaris, ser.

Dhanapura village herbs Lantana camara,LAbutilon indicum,G.don. TreesAcanthus sp. Aegle marmelos,corr.Achyranthus aspera,L. Albizzia lebeck,benth.Amaranathus sp. Atlantia sp.Crotoloria ternatea,L. Azadiracta indica, A.jussDolichos lablab,L. Carica papaya,L.Paspalum longifolium ,roxb. Cocos nucifera,LSalvia sp. Dalbergia sissoo,roxb.Sida acuta,L. Eucalyptus,willd.Climbing medicinal herbs Syzigium jambolanum,DC.Tinospora cordifolia,miers Tamarindus indica,L.Pergularia damea Tectona grandis,L.shrubsCrtoloria ternatea,L. Dominant plants

Paspalum longifolium.roxbMedicinal shrubsFluggea leucopyrus,willd Rare occurrenceRicinus communis,L. Aegle

Exotic invasive weed Endangered flora - NilParthenium hysterophorose L.

3.10.1.2 AGRICULTURAL PATTERN

The main land use in and around the area is farming mainly cultivated with crops like

Sugarcane (Sachharum officinarum), Rice (Oryza sativa), Wheat (Triticum aetivum),

Red gram (Cajanus cajan) and Groundnut (Arachis Hypogea)as cash crops. The

other crops taken are Sunflower (Helianthus Annuus), Bajara (Pennisettum sp,) and

Jawri (Sorghum vulgare). The vegeTable are tomato (Lycopersicon esculenta),

Brinjal (Solonum Melongea) and Capsicum annum. The important fruit plants are

Musa paradisica (Banana), Mangifera indica (Mango), Carica papapya (Papita),

Psidium guyaya and Syziguim cumini (Jamun).

3.10.2 FAUNAL COMPOSITIONFauna of a particular region indicates environmental conditions and the wellbeing of

the population residing in the region. Faunal studies help to understand the wellbeing

of a nature and functioning of ecosystems. It helps to monitor pollution levels,

biological richness or heritage quality, habitat change and quantifying threatening

species. The faunal components such as Arthropods, Molluscs, Pisces, Birds and

Mammals are very sensitive to the change in the ecosystem, therefore are best used

as indicators of the ecosystem function and considered crucial in the ecology and

Page 123: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

101

management of the Acquatic and Terrestrial Ecosystems.

In the Ramgad Reserved Forest commonly found animals are crow, pheasant, green

bee eater, red vented bulbul, house crow, and house sparrow. The mammals found

are Wild boar, Fox, mongoose, Peacock, common mouse. The reptiles found are

cobra, common krait and lizard. In the Gunda and Nandi Danda Reserve Forest,

most of the Ramgad Reserve Forest fauna also spread. The other faunal animals are

Wild cat, Hare, Wild boar, leopard, Fox, rat snake, Bennet Macaque, Common

langur, Porcupine, Jackal etc.

Animals and Birds in the study area other than forest area were documented using

following means:

Secondary sources and published literature

By interviewing local people

Nesting (Birds), borrows for small mammalsTable-3.24 List of Wild Mammals Found in the Study Area

Common name Scientific Name Schedule of Protection Actin which listed

A.MammalsCommon jungle cat Felis chans IICommon mongoose Herpestres edwardsii -Jackal Canis aureus II,VWild dog Cuon alpinus IIFox Vulpes bengalensis IIPorcupine Hystrix indica IVCommon hares Lepas sp. IVWild boar Sus scrofa IIIBarking deer Muntiacus muntiacus IIISambar Cervus unicolor IIISpotted deer Axis axis IIISriped Palm Squirrel Funambulus palmatum IVRhesus monkey Macaca mulata IIB.ReptilesIndian Cobra Naja naja IIYellow rat Snake Ptyas mucosus IICommon Krait Bungarus caeruleus IVRussel’s Viper Vipera russelii IICheckered Keelback Xenochropis piscator II

Page 124: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

102

The common snakes found in the region are Kraits and Cobras. The birds found in

the area are given in Table-3.25.

Table-3.25 List of Birds Commonly Found in the Area

Common name Scientific nameSchedule of wildlife

protection Act in whichlisted

Paddy Bird Ardeola grayii IVLarge Indian Parakeet P.eupatria IVRose Ringed Parakeet P.krameri IVBrahminy Duck Tadorna ferrugninea IVRed Wattled Lapwing Vannelus indicus IVCrow pheasant Centropus sinesis IVKoel Eudynamis scolopacea IVWhite Breasted Kingfisher Halcyon smyrnansis IVSmall green Bee-eater Merops orientalis IVCoot Fulica atra IVCommon Crow C.splendens VHill Mynah Gracula religiosa IVCommon Mynah Acridotheres tristis IVHouse Sparrow Passer domesticus -Golden Backed Woodpecker Dinopium benghalense

IVRed vent Bulbul Pycnonotus cafer IVSpotted Dove Streptopelia chinesis IV

Spur Fowt Galloperdix spp IV

The main water body in the area is T.B. Dam. The data on ecology of the aquatic

ecosystem in the study area is based on literature and field survey.

There are a number of ponds in the villages in the study area. On visual observation

these ponds seems to be oligo-trophic to mesotrophic in nutrients status. The

common rooted plants and hydrophytes on the edges of these ponds are Nelumbo

sp, Potamogeton sp, Aponogeton sp., Ipomea sp., Dichanthium sp., etc. The water

in these ponds is colorless to slight greenish in color. The Phytoplanktons in the

rivers are basically dominated by filamentous forms. The dominant ones are

Chaetophora sp, Cladophora sp, Pithephora sp, Oscillatoria so., Spirogyra sp,

Cymbella sp, etc. The Zooplanktons are basically dominated by Crustaceans

and Rotifers. The dominant ones are Crustaceans: Crustacean eggs,

Moinodaphina, Chydorus, Cyclops. Rotifers: Brachionus, Rotiferan, etc. Others:

Page 125: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

103

Nematodes, Dipteran larvae, etc.

3.10.2.1 FISHES

The T.B. Dam Is the main ecosystem supporting fishes in the area. The maximum

abundance of fishes was reported during April to July. The fishes observed in the

T.B. Dam and the nearby reservoirs is given in Table-3.26.

Table-3.26 Fish Fauna observed in the Study Area

No endangered and endemic species (flora & fauna) recorded in the project site and

its surroundings; hence conservation plan is not required.

3.11 SOCIO-ECONOMICS OF THE STUDY AREAThe proposed project is located at Sy Nos. 633, 646, 643 and others

Narayanadevevanakere Village, Hagari bommanahalli Taluk, Bellary District,

Karnataka.

SlNo.

Name of fish Sl No. Name of fish

1 Catla catla 18 Gudusia chapra2 Labeo fimbriatus 19 Rohtee cotio3 Labeo calbasu 20 Pama pama4 Cirrhinus mrigala 21 Glossogobius guiris5 C.reba 22 Rhinomugil corsula6 Barbus tor 23 Xenentodon cancila

7 Puntius sarana 24 Chela sp.8 Mystus seenghala 25 Chela bacailla

9 Mystus sor 26 Ailea nama10 Silonia silondia 27 Ambassis nama11 Wallago attu 28 Ambassis sp12 Pangasius pangasius 29 Puntius sophore13 Rita chrysea 30 Puntius ticto14 Eutropiichthys vacha 31 Puntius chola15 Bagrius bagarius 32 Puntius dorsalis16 Notopterus notopterus 33 Mastacembelus armatus17 Notopterus chitala 34 Mastacembelus pancalus

Page 126: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

104

3.11.1 DEMOGRAPHY AND SOCIAL STATUSThe information on present status of the human settlements was collected from the

secondary sources such as census book, official websites and concerned

government departments.

The base line status refers to:

1. Demography structure

2. Infrastructure resource base in the area

3. Economic attributes

3.11.2 ABOUT HAGARI BOMMANAHALLI TALUKHagari Bommanahalli (HB Halli) taluk is the headquarters town of the taluk of the

same name, at a distance of 110 Kms from Bellary city. Incidentally this is only taluk

with no urban areas in its jurisdiction in the state. A number of families from the

submerged villages of the Tungabadhra project have been rehabilitated here.

The taluk is bounded on the north by the Koppal district on the south by Kudligi taluk,

On the east by the Hospet taluk and on the west by Hadagali taluk. HB Halli taluk

occupies 5th place in area and last place in population among seven taluks. The

geographical area of the taluk is 974 sq.km and population is 1,59,886 as per 2001

census. This accounts for 8 p.c. of district’s population and its area accounts for

11.50 p.c. HB Halli comes under the jurisdiction of Hospet revenue sub-division with

4 RI circles.

3.11.3 CULTIVATIONThe normal rainfall is 554.5 mm. The major crops grown are maize, jowar, bajra,

sunflower, groundnut and cotton. The net irrigated area constitutes only 16,820 hec.

(32 p.c.).

Page 127: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

105

Table-3.27 Demographic Details

Details of Irrigated Land Under Different Water Sources in H.B. Halli Taluk

Sl.No Particulars Area(Hectares) Percent1 Tunga Bhadra Project-High Level Canal - -

2 Tunga Bhadra Project-Low Level Canal - -

Total Tunga Bhadra Project - -

3 Malvi Project 2887 17.16

3 Lift Irrigation 3408 20.26

4 Tanks 1491 8.86

5 Wells/Bore wells 9034 53.72

Total area under irrigation 16820 100.00

Net Cultivable Area (in Hectares)

Irrigated Rainfed Total16820(32p.c) 35526(68p.c) 52346(100p.c)

3.11.4 INDUSTRIALIZATION

Industrialization is one of the important means of promoting economic development

of the country. H.B.Halli taluk is another taluk in the district where industrialization is

making progress at snail’s pace. In this taluk there are 869 industrial units with an

investment of Rs.746.28 lakh. These units provide employment to 3,141 persons.

There are 1,085 Rural artisans whose activity comprises of Carpentry, Black smith,

Barbers, Goldsmith, Pottery, Cotton weaving, Mat weaving and Mirror Embroidery.

Page 128: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

106

3.11.5 STATISTICS AT A GLANCE

Table-3.28 Taluk Statistics

CENSUS OF INDIA - 2001Results H.B. Halli taluk vis-à-vis District vis-à-vis State

SubjectH.B. Halli Taluk Bellary District Karnataka State

1991 2001 1991 2001 1991 2001Number ofrevenueVillages 55 53 542 524 29193

Number ofhoblies 4 4 27 27 745 745

Number ofGramPanchayats - 22 - 189 - 5689

Corporations - - - 1

218 228

CMC's - - 2 1

Town MuncipalCouncil - - 1 1TownPanchayats - - 7 7

ZP Members - 4 - 32 - 890

TPMembers - 14 - 112 - 3288

GP Memebrs - 348 - 2856 - 80073

Area in Sq. Km 974 974 8447 8447 191792 191792

Total Population(in lakhs) 1.35 1.60 16.56 20.27 449.77 528.51

Male Population(in lakhs) 0.68 0.81 8.42 10.29 229.52 268.99

FemalePopulation(in lakhs) 0.67 0.79 8.14 9.98 220.25 259.52

Decadal GrowthRate-p.c 36.00 18.52 26.84 22.30 21.12 17.25

PopulationDensity(Per Sq. Km) 138 164 196 240 235 275

Page 129: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

107

Sex Ratio(females per1000 males) 992 975 966 969 960 964

0-6 Population-p.c 20.89 15.76 19.35 14.87 16.63 12.94

Rural Population(in Percent)

135026(100.00)

159900(100.00)

1125746(67.98)

1320290(65.13)

31069412(69.07)

34889033(66.01)

UrbanPopulation(in Percent) Nil Nil

53024(32.02)

706850(34.87)

13907788(32.93)

17961529(33.99)

SC Population(in percent)

25028(18.53)

29941(18.72)

311252(18.79)

374218(18.46)

7369279(16.38)

8563930(16.20)

ST Population(in percent)

1210(0.89)

21716(13.58)

147569(8.91)

364638(17.99)

1915691(4.25)

3463986 (6.55)

Literacy-p.c 37.00 58.58 45.89 58.55 56.04 67.04Male Literacy-p.c

49.00 71.25 59.11 70.20 67.26 76.29

Female Literacy-p.c 26.00 45.73 32.24 46.16 44.34 57.25

Page 130: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

108

Table-3.28A Taluk Statistics

Sl.No Infrastructure Stats Unit Number

Education

1 Lower Primary Schools Number 59

2 Higher Primary Schools Number 63

3 High Schools Number 07

4 PU Colleges Number 03

5 Moaraji Desai Schools Number 01

6 Residential Schools Number 250

7 Beneficiaries under Akshara Dasoha Number 20121

8 Enrolment in schools (6-14) children Percent 99

9 Engineering Colleges Number -

10 Polytechnic Colleges Number -

11 Medical Colleges Number -

12 Ayurvedic Colleges Number -

13 Pharmacy Colleges Number -

Note: Dr.Nanjundappa Committee report says H.B.Halli taluk is a developed taluk asfar as infrastructure development related to Education sector is concerned. Howeverthis taluk is either more backward or most backward at literacy levels and pupilteacher ratio. Because of various interventions under SSA program the dropout rateshave considerably come down in this taluk.

Health

1 Medical College Hospitals Number -

2 Primary Health Centres Number 07

3 Health Sub-Centres Number 37

4 Primary Health Units Number 01

5 Govt. Ayurvedic Hospitals Number -

6 Govt. Ayurvedic Dispensaries Number 06

7 Govt. Homeophathy Dispensaries Number 01

Page 131: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

109

8 Govt. Unany Dispensaries Number -

9 Fogging Machines Number 01

10 Ambulances Number 02Note: According to Dr. Nanjundappa’s committee report this taluk in the district is

termed as most backward as far as infrastructure development is concerned.

However the health conditions status in the taluk / district causing concern. The

incidence of Aids, Polio, JE and Dengue fever etc., the most un common diseases

are prevalent in this district.

Social Welfare

1 Pre-metric hostels for boys Number 07

2 Pre-metric hostels for boys-strength Number 515

3 Pre-metric hostels for girls Number 02

4 Pre-metric hostels for girls-strength Number 140

5 Post-metric hostels for boys Number 01

6 Post-metric hostels for boys-strength Number 50

7 Post-metric hostels for girls Number -

8 Post-metric hostels for girls-strength Number -9 Residential Schools Number 01

10 Residential Schools- strength Number 250

Page 132: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

110

Women and Child

1 Anganwadi Centers Number 131

2 Anganwadi centers with own buildings Number 131

3 Nutrition-beneficiaries-(0-6)children Number 10263

4

Nutrition - beneficiaries - pregnant

and mothers Number 2475

5 Stree Shakthi groups Number 408

6 Members in Stree Shakthi groups Number 6120

7 Bank linkages provided No.ofgroups 250

8 Savings Rs.lakhs 76.02Note: The members of Shree Shakthi groups are preferred for assigning

responsibilities like cooking jobs under Akshara Dasoha, Tax Collection at Grama

Panchayat Level.Agriculture

1 Cultivators-Male(2001census) Number 17786

2 Cultivators-Female(2001census) Number 3546

3 Cultivators-Total(2001census) Number 21332

4 Agriculture Laborers- Male Number 10773

5 Agriculture Laborers- Female Number 12744

6 Agriculture Laborers- Total Number 23517

Animal Husbandry

1 Veternary Hospitals Number 01

2 Dispensaries Number 07

3 Primary Vet. Centers Number 04

4 Mobile Vet. Dispensaries Number 01

5 Total Animal population Number 130645

Fisheries

1 Irrigation tanks Number 22

2 Fish ponds Number 09

3 Fisher men Number 5010

Page 133: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

111

4 Average annual production M.Tones 750

Forest1 Area under forest Hectares 4482

2 Area under forest to Total Area Percentage 05

Roads

1 National Highways Km -

2 State Highways Km 31

3 District Roads Km 156

4 Other district roads Km 30

5 Rural Roads Km 331

6 TDB Roads Km 141

7 Irrigation Roads Km 08

Total Length Km 6978 Length of Railway line Km 30

Rural Drinking Water1 Fluoride affected villages Number 282 Bore wells Number 3093 Mini Water Supply schemes Number 1154 Piped Water Supply schemes Number 73

Note: One third of villages in the district are fluoride affected. Alternative proposed are

surface water and de-fluoride filters.Below Poverty Line (BPL)

1 BPL households as per 1997 Census Number 12811

2 BPL households as per 1997 Census percent 48.40

3.11.6 PLACES OF INTEREST(a) AmbliThis village is famous for Black stone Chalukyan temple dedicated to

Kalleswara.

(b) HolaluThis village which is 32 km away from Hadagali is famous for the beautiful image of

Ananthashayana which is carved in black stone.

Page 134: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT
Page 135: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

CHAPTER -4

ANTICIPATEDENVIRONMENTAL

IMPACTS & MITIGATIONMEASURES

Page 136: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT
Page 137: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

112

CHAPTER – 4ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES

4.1 INTRODUCTIONEnvironmental impact in the study area is any alteration of environmental conditions

or creation of new set of environmental conditions, adverse or beneficial, caused or

induced by the impact of project. Prediction involving identification and assessment

of potential impacts of the project on surrounding environment is a significant

component of REIA studies. The likely Impacts of various activities of the proposed

project on the environment were identified. These impacts were assessed for their

significance based on the background environmental quality in the area and the

magnitude of the impact. All components of the environment were considered and

wherever possible impacts were evaluated in quantitative/qualitative terms. Several

scientific methods are available to qualify and predict the impact of project on

environmental factors such as water, air, noise, land ecological socio economic.

Such predictions are superimposed, over base line environmental status to derive

post project scenario of the environmental conditions. The resultant (post-project)

quality of environmental parameters is reviewed with respect to the permissible limits.

Based on the impacts thus predicted preventive and mitigation measures were

formulated and incorporated in the environmental management plan to minimize

adverse impacts on environmental quality during and after project execution.

The environmental impacts can be categorized as primary and secondary. Primary

are those which are directly attributed to the project and secondary impacts are those

which are indirectly induced due to primary impacts and include those associated

with investment & socio-economic status. The project impact may be broadly divided

into two phases.

During construction phase: These may be regarded as temporary or

short term and ceases with implementation of the project.

During operation phase: These impacts are continuous warranting built

in permanent measures for mitigation and monitoring.

Construction and operation phase of the project comprises of various activities, each

of which will have an impact on some or other environmental parameters. Impacts on

environmental parameters during construction and operational phase have been

studied to estimate the impacts on environment.

The impacts have been predicted for the proposed industrial project assuming that

the pollution due to the existing activities has already been covered under baseline

Page 138: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

113

environmental monitoring.

4.2 IDENTIFICATION & CHARACTERIZATION OF IMPACTSThe wastes and pollutants generated due to various activities of the project cause

impacts on different environmental attributes. The major project activities and the

affected environmental parameters are given below.

4.2.1 CONSTRUCTION PHASE

Construction activity includes foundation works, fabrication of storage tanks and

erection of plant-machineries. The construction phase is expected to be about three

months. The major activities during construction phase are given below.

PROJECT ACTIVITIES1. Site preparation and development

2. Civil construction work

3. Vehicular movement

4. Loading and unloading civil items and plant machineries

5. On site storage of civil items & plant machineries.

6. Erection of plant and civil structures

7. Power supply

8. Maintenance of construction machinery

9. Disposal of solid wastes

4.2.2 OPERATION PHASEThe major activities at SLR Metaliks Ltd site in the operational phase involves

storage & handling of ore, coal, coke, associated raw materials, captive power

production etc. These activities may affect the environment in varying degrees

through natural resources depletion viz. water consumption, release of

particulates and gaseous emissions, contamination of water body, run-off from

waste storage area etc. During operation air, water and noise may be affected

due to material usage and processing for steel and associated activities in

general. Associated activities e.g. transportation of materials, operations of

workshop and garage, canteen etc., may also affect air, water and noise

environment. Green belt development will have a positive impact not only on flora

and fauna but also on air quality, noise and soil characteristics. Positive impacts on

socio- economic environment are expected due to employment, further

Page 139: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

114

infrastructure development and also due to socio-economic welfare developmental

activities to be taken up. The major project activities and the affected environmental

parameters are given below.

PROJECT ACTIVITIESi. Manufacturing activities of various plants including steel plant, rolling

mill, coke oven plant and air separation unit.

ii. Operation of power plant including boiler and turbine

iii. Storage and handling of raw material and products

iv. Transportation of raw materials, products and personnel.

v. Water supply, storage and treatment

vi. Solid wastes management.

vii. Waste water management

viii. Gaseous emission management

POLLUTION SOURCESi. cooling water blow down, boiler blow down.

ii. Flue gases from furnaces, boiler.

iii. Fugitive emission .from process, movement of vehicles and handling of

raw material

iv. Noise from turbine, D.G. set, fans, and vehicular movement.

v. Storage and handling of solid wastes.

AFFECTED ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERSi. Air quality

ii. Water resources & quality

iii. Noise level

iv. Soil quality

v. Biological

vi. Socio-economics

vii.

4.2.3 IMPACT MATRIXEnvironmental impacts could be positive or negative, direct or indirect, local or

regional and also reversible or irreversible. The primary function of an environment

impact assessment study is to predict and quantify the magnitude of these impacts,

evaluate and assess the importance of the identified changes, present information

and monitor actual changes. The activities of the proposed project are studied. The

impacts of various activities of the proposed project are identified and presented as

Page 140: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

115

matrix in Table-4.1. Further the characteristics of these impacts have been evaluated

and they are presented as matrix in Table- 4.2A, 4.2B.

Table-4.1 Impact Identification Matrix

Activities

Environmental AttributeAir Noise Surface

WaterGroundWater

Climate Land& soil

Ecology

SocioEconomics

Aesthetics

Construction PhaseSite Clearing Quarrying(indirect)

Ready-mixconcretepreparation(indirect)

Transportation of rawmaterials

Constructionactivities onland

Laying ofroads

Operational phaseOperation ofDGs

Solid wastedisposal(indirect)

Wastewaterdisposal

Buildings

Storage andhandling ofOre, coke andother rawmaterials

Processing ofore

VehicularMovement

AirEmissionsfrom Stackand otherUnitprocesses

Page 141: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

116

Table-4.2A Characteristics of Environmental Impacts from Construction Phase

Activity EnvironmentalAttributes Cause

Impact characteristicsNature Duration Reversibility Significance

Siteclearing

Air Quality (SPMand RSPM)

Dislodging ofparticles fromthe ground

DirectNegative

ShortTerm Reversible

Low, ifPersonnelProtectiveEquipment(PPE) areused

Noise levels

Noisegenerationfrom earthexcavatingequipment

DirectNegative

ShortTerm Reversible

Low, if PPEare used byworkers

Land UseIndustrial landuse

DirectNegative

LongTerm Irreversible Low.

Ecology

Removal ofvegetation andloss of floraand fauna

DirectNegative

LongTerm Reversible

Low. Nocutting oftrees.

Transportation ofconstructionmaterials

Air Quality(SPM, SO2,NOx, CO)

Transport ofconstructionmaterial intrucks &Exhaustemission fromvehicles

DirectNegative

ShortTerm Reversible

Medium ifregularemissionchecks areperformed

Noise levels

Noisegenerationfrom vehicles

DirectNegative Short

Term Reversible

Low if regularvehiclemaintenanceis done.

Risk

Risk ofaccidentsduring transit

DirectNegative Long

Term Irreversible

Low, if safetymeasures aretaken topreventaccidents

Constructionactivities/ Laying ofroads

Air Quality(SPM, SO2,NOx, CO)

Operation ofconstructionmachinery,weldingactivities andothers

DirectNegative Short

Term Reversible

Low, if PPEare used byworkers

Noise levels

Noisegenerationfrom use ofmachinery

DirectNegative

ShortTerm Reversible

Low, if PPEare used byworkers

Land use Setting up ofProject

DirectNegative

LongTerm Irreversible

The area isdesignated asIndustrial area

Ecology Loss ofvegetation

DirectNegative

LongTerm Reversible

Low. Nocutting oftrees andgreen beltdevelopmentis envisaged

Page 142: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

117

Table-4.2 B Characteristics of Environmental Impacts from Operational Phase

Activity EnvironmentalAttributes Cause Impact characteristics

Nature Duration Reversibility SignificanceGaseousemissionsfromfurnaces,boiler,Vehicles

Air Quality(SPM, SO2,NOx, CO, HC)

Fuelcombustion,Vehicleoperation

DirectNegative

LongTerm

Reversible Ambient andStackmonitoring,road watersprinkl ingon road

Fugitiveemission

SPM

Wastewaterdischarge

Water quality Generationof wastewater

DirectNegative

Shortterm

Reversible Low, asSeptic Tankand soak pitwill beprovided

Solid wastedisposal

Land and soil Generationof solidwastes

DirectNegative

ShortTerm

Reversible Low, propercollectionand disposal

Turbine,Crusher,Screen,vehicles

Noise levels Noisegenerationfromvehicles

DirectNegative

Shortterm

Reversible Low, withperiodicalmaintenanceof vehicles

Socio-economic

Employmentgeneration

Direct andindirectemployment

DirectPositive

LongTerm

Irreversible High, newopportunitiesof steadyincome formanyfamilies

Quality of life In-flow offunds intheregion/nation

DirectPositive

LongTerm

Irreversible High, theproject willgenerateemployment

Afforestation / Greenbeltdevelopment

Ecology Planting oftrees

DirectPositive

LongTerm

Reversible High positiveimpact

Page 143: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

118

4.3 IMPACTS DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE

4.3.1 LAND ENVIRONMENTWith land development and leveling, the site may have better landscape. However

this is restricted only to the factory boundary. There are no major trees or crops in the

site. Hence there will be no change in land use pattern or soil quality.

4.3.2 WATER ENVIRONMENTConstruction activities for the proposed development can have minor impact on

hydrology and ground water quality of the area if the construction waste leaches into

the ground water source. Potential sources of impacts on the hydrology and ground

water quality during the construction phase are as follows:

Soil runoff from the site leading to off-site contamination (particularly

during rainy season).

Improper disposal of construction debris leading to off-site

contamination of water resources.

Spillage of oil and grease from the vehicles and waste water generated

on site activities such as vehicles washing, workshop etc.

Following precautions and preventive measure will be taken at the site during

construction to avoid any ground and surface water contamination.

Not allowing water to leave the construction site.

Disposal of construction debris in approved areas.

Construction of storm water diversion channels to divert storm runoff

from flowing over the construction areas.

Installing oil and grease traps in construction workshop and vehicle

parking areas.

Due to civil construction activities, during rainy season the surface run

off may contain more of eroded soil and other loose matter. Construction

activities will be avoided during rainy days to mitigate the small impacts on soil

quality caused due to construction activity.

With segregation of construction area and proper drainages provided

prevents the contamination of water due to soil erosion.

Page 144: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

119

4.3.3 AIR ENVIRONMENTDuring construction phase, SPM is expected to be the main pollutant, which is

associated with general construction activity including excavation, leveling and

material handling. In this case, pollution emission sources are distributed throughout

the project site and shall fall under the category of area source. The project site is

slightly undulated, so extensive formation work is not expected during this phase.

Surplus excavated material shall be used for road construction and for land leveling

and landscaping activities besides for backfilling. Concentration of SO2, NOX and CO

may slightly increase due to increased vehicular traffic. The approach roads will be

paved or tarred and vehicles will be kept in good order to minimize the pollution due

to vehicular traffic. The impact of such activities would be temporary and restricted to

the constructed phase. The impact will be confined within the project boundary and is

expected to be negligible outside the plant boundaries. Proper upkeep and

maintenance of vehicles, sprinkling of water on roads and construction site, providing

sufficient vegetation all-around are some of the measure that would greatly reduce

the impacts during the construction phase. With the emission factor and the phased

manner in which construction activity is to be carried out, it is likely that increase in

SPM levels due to construction would mainly be confined to the project site.

Thus, it is inferred that minor negative impact within a few 100 meters from the

source within the site would occur on the ambient air quality under the worst

conditions, which are mitigated by implementing environmental management plan.

However, no significant impacts are expected on the overall ambient air quality due to

construction activities, at the sensitive receptors outside the project premises.

4.3.4 IMPACT ON NOISE LEVELThe major source of noise generation during the construction phase are vehicular

traffic, construction equipment like dozers, scrapers, concrete mixer, cranes,

generators, compressors, vibrators etc. is given below. The operation of these

equipments will generate noise ranging between 70-85 dB (A). The noise produced

during the construction will have significant impact on the existing ambient noise

levels. The construction equipments have high noise levels which can affect the

personnel, operating the machines. Major construction work will be carried during the

daytime. Use of protective equipments like mufflers will reduce noise generated by

such equipments. Personnel protective such as earplugs shall be used by the

operators of these machineries.

Page 145: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

120

Table-4.3 Noise Levels Generated From Construction Equipments

SI.NO. NAME OF THE SOURCE

NOISE LEVELS FROM SOURCE(DBA)

AT ADISTANCE OF

50 FT.(16M)

AT ADISTANCE OF

1 M.1 Air compressor 87 1112 Back hoe/loader 81 1053 Concrete mixer truck 85 1094 Concrete pumper 70 945 Concrete vibrations 77 1016 Cranes-mobile 81 1057 Dump truck 83 1078 Hammering 86 1109 Jack hammer 88 11210 Pile driver 100 12411 Radial arm saw 88 104

(Source: CPCB domestic appliances and construction equipments at the

manufacturing stage to be achieved by the year 1993).

4.3.4.1 NOISE LIMITS FOR APPLIANCES AND EQUIPMENTS DURINGCONSTRUCTION STAGE

Table-4.4 Noise Levels Generated From Construction Equipments

SI.NO.

EQUIPMENT NOISE LIMIT,db(A)

1 Air conditioner -window 68

2 Air cooler 60

3 Diesel generator 85-904 Compactors(rollers),concrete

mixers, cranes, vibrators, etc75

4.3.5 IMPACT ON BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENTConstruction activities at the site involving human and vehicular movement will

disturb aril and wild animals in the area. Terrestrial micro flora and fauna at the site

are also affected. However, the adverse effect are reduced by shortening the

construction phase period and development of greenery in the site. Further, there are

no sensitive locations within the study area. Hence, no significant adverse impacts

are expected on biological environment.

Page 146: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

121

4.3.6 IMPACT ON SOCIO-ECONOMIC STATUS

The construction phase induces employment opportunities for the local people. Up to

400 persons will be employed during peak construction phase. In addition to the

opportunity of getting employment in construction work, the local population would

also have employment opportunities in related activities like petty commercial

establishments, small contracts and supply of construction materials etc.

The dwelling of construction workers at the site may cause sanitation and other

problems. As the villages are nearby and staying facilities are readily available in

these villages. The construction and other workers will not be permitted to reside at

the project site.

Safety and health care of workers is also an important factor to be considered during

construction phase. Hazards expected are electrocution, vehicular accident, fall of

personnel from overhead works, high level noise due to construction machinery,

centering failure and exposure of eyes to dust and welding rays. Constructional and

occupational safety measures will be adopted during construction phase of the

industry.

4.4 OPERATIONAL PHASE IMPACT4.4.1 IMPACT ON AIR QUALITY

4.4.1.1 SOURCES OF AIR POLLUTIONThe gaseous emissions are generated as flue gases at furnaces in steel plant, rolling

mill and producer gas unit. Gaseous emissions are also generated from waste

heater boiler in coke oven plant. Fugitive emissions are generated in the industry

during storage and handling of coal and coke and other solid raw materials. Dust is

generated during loading and unloading, movement in conveyors, crushing and

screening operations of these products. Fugitive emission is also generated on due to

vehicular movement in the premises. The information on gaseous emission from

project activities is furnished in Chapter-2. and in Table-2.13. The details of gaseous

emissions discharged from point source in the proposed steel industry is given in

Table- 4.5.

The air pollution control equipments will be operated to achieve maximum pollution

control efficiency the typical efficiency of different APC’s are ESP- 95-99%, bag filter

– 98-99%, venture scrubber- 95-98%,cyclones- 75-80%.

Page 147: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

122

Table–4.5 Details of Stack & Gaseous Emissions From Point Source

Sl.No.

Stackattached

to

Stack ht

Emissionconcentration without

APC, mg/Nm3

APCmeasure

Emissionconcentration

with APC ,mg/Nm3

In m PM1

0

SO2 NO

X

CO PM1

0

SO

2

NO

X

CO

1EOF

furnace51

600-1000

400-

800

0-60

450-1120

GCP,venture

scrubber

60-100

50-100

0-15

50-

12

0

2LRF

Furnace30 560-

85040-60

0-20

100-200

Fumeextraction systemwith bag

filter.

70-90

10-20

0-15

50-100

3Caster(Fumeexhaust)

30 480-800

0-20

0-25 0-50

Fumeextraction systemwith bag

filter.

60-100

0-10

0-15

0-15

4Vacuumdegassing Boiler

4260-

100

0-

30

5-

10

50-

100Stack

50-

80

0-

153-8

30-

70

5Reheatin

g furnace45

50-

80

0-

150-8

30-

70stack

50-

80

0-

153-8

30-

70

6PCI

furnace30 300-

35010-20 3-8 30-

70

Fumeextraction systemwith bag

filter.

30-

35

1-

101-5

30-

70

7Coke

oven

battery

42300-

400

25-

35

10-

15

100-

150Stack

60-

120

1-

101-5

30-

50

8Cokeoven off–gasboiler

5240-

50

1-

101-5

50-

100Stack

30-

35

1-

101-5

30-

50

9 PGPfurnace

30 400-500

25-35 1-5 50-

80 ESP30-

35

1-

101-5

30-

40

4.4.1.2. FUGITIVE EMISSIONSFugitive emissions are generated in the industry mainly due to the handling of coal,

solid raw material and solid waste products and also due to vehicular movement.

Dust emissions also arise during loading and unloading of solid material. The

location and source of fugitive emission is given below.

Page 148: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

123

Table-4.6 Sources of Fugitive Dust

Sl.No. Area Monitoring Location

1 Raw Material Handling area Tippler, Screen area, transfer points, stockbin area

2 Crusher area Coal crusher plant, vibrating screen , transferpoints

3 Raw material feed area Coal feeder area, mixing area, transfer points

4 Product processing areaIntermediate stock bin area, screening plant,separation unit, transfer points, dischargearea, product separation area, bagging area

4.4.1.2 FUGITIVE EMISSIONS4.4.1.3 CONTROL MEASURES4.4.1.3.1 AT EOF FURNACEThe EOF furnace will be provided with a dust catcher and venture type gas cleaning

system. The outgoing gas from the EOF will be routed through uptakes, down

comer to the dust catcher for the primary dust separation.

The dust generated in the raw material storage area and on roads will be

suppressed by sprinkling water at regular intervals. Chemical will be added to this

water for dust agglomeration and enhanced suppression.

To maintain work zone air quality within the permissible limits , a number of

pollution control system have been envisaged. Various dust extraction and dust

suppression systems envisaged at location/ shops are indicated below.

Table-4.7 Details of Dust Extraction System

Sl.No.

Location / shop Facilities

1 EOF stack house Dust extraction system comprising of pulse jet type, bagfilter, centrifugal fan and motor, duct work includingsuction hoods, duct supports, stack , dust hopper, rotaryair lock valves, dust conditioner etc.

2 Rolling mill Fume & dust extraction system comprising of pulse jettype , bag filter, centrifugal fan and motor, duct workincluding suction hoods, duct supports, stack , dusthopper, rotary air lock valves, dust conditioner etc.

3 EOF furnace GCP GCP & its sludge disposal system4 Raw material

handling area,material transferpoints

Dust suppression system comprising of spray nozzles,piping network, valves, solenoid valves, pumps ,instrumentation and controls , electrics, water tank etc.

Page 149: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

124

The dust collected from bag filters and scrubbers shall be used in sinter plant of

SLR Metaliks to reuse.

To maintain working environment in the above mentioned areas following measures

will be taken.

1. All dust suppression systems will be maintained to work up to satisfactory level .

2. All de-dusting systems will be maintained to run satisfactorily.

3. Leakage from equipment and ducts will be checked and stopped.

4. Encourage workers to understand the importance of these systems so they pay

adequate attention towards the functioning of these systems.

5. Enhancing tree plantations within the plant

4.4.1.3.2 AT COKE OVEN BATTERYThe coke oven will work under negative pressure which will limit gas leakage from the

battery doors and while charging. Hot coke discharged from oven will be cooled in

quench tower by quenching with water. Water vapors produced during quenching are

vented. Quench tower will be provided with grit arrestors. Quench time is small and is

less than 5 minutes.

Table-4.8 Sources of Emissions from the Plant

Sl.No. Source Pollutants

1 Fugitive emissionsi. At coal charging in ovens SPMii. At coal and coke storage yards SPMIii Crushing, screening and conveying of coal SPMiv. Grading of coke SPMiii. Vehicular movement in the premise SPM, SO2 CO & NOX

2 Off gases from coke oven battery PM10,SPM, SO2 & NOx

3 Exhaust gases from waste heat boiler PM10 ,SPM, SO2 & NOx

4.4.1.3.4 DURING TRANSPORTATIONCoal will be transported by trucks or railway wagons to the plant. During

transportation, coal will be moistened and covered by tarpaulin to prevent coal

particles to fly out. The Lorries are moving through national or state high ways and

they are well developed. Further inside the plant, the road will be of concrete/bitumen

top. Thus the coal/coke trucks will move on concrete/bitumen roads only. Hence

there will not be any significant increase in generation of dust due to transportation in

the surrounding area.

Page 150: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

125

4.4.1.3.5 DURING STORAGE & HANDLIND OF COAL AND COKECoal will be unloaded in the coal storage area, which is having concrete floor. Water

spraying will be provided during the unloading to minimize the fugitive emission. The

dust generated during coke and coal handling, crushing and screening will be

captured by suction hoods and then collected in the bag filters. The coal/coke fines

will be recycled for coke making.

Areas of fugitive emissions where de-dusting suction hoods cannot be provided due

to physical constraints will be provided with dust suppression systems. Dust

suppression systems with water spray will be provided for coal storage yard, junction

houses and coke storage yard. This system will suppress the generation of fugitive

dust from material transfer, junction houses and coal/coke storage yard. Water spray

nozzles will be provided over dust generation points. In the stock pile area, water will

be sprayed by a sufficient number of sprinklers suitably installed in the water header.

4.4.1.3.6 GENERAL MITIGATION MEASURES

The impacts of fugitive emissions in the industry are controlled by following measures

Haulage roads are sprinkled with water at regular intervals for which watertankers with sprinkler arrangement are deployed.

Trucks carrying coal and other raw material are covered with tarpaulin toprevent spreading of dust during transportation.

Green belt and greenery development around storage yards, around plants,either side of roads and around the periphery of the industry.

Water spray and sprinkling is practiced at loading unloading locations.

The conveyors of fuel are suitably covered with hood or enclosures to controlfugitive emissions.

Dust respirators are provided for the people working dust generating locations.

All internal roads in the premise are paved /tarred.

Speed limit of 10 km/h is enforced for vehicles in the plant premises to preventroad dust emission.

Regular sweeping of roads is practiced with vacuum sweeping machine orwater flushing to minimize dust.

The air pollution control measures will ensure the ambient air quality to bewithin the NAAQ standards for industrial areas as indicated below.

Page 151: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

126

4.4.1.4. PRE-PROJECT AIR QUALITYThe ambient air quality monitoring data for the study area of 10 km around project

site is furnished in Annexure.7, Table 7C, 7D.1,7D.2. The air quality monitoring data

for stack emission, fugitive emission in the plant premise is enclosed in Annexure-

7.Table 7A.1, 7A.2, 7A.3, 7A.4, &Table 7B respectively. The ambient air quality with

in the project premise and around the premise is within the permissible limits.

4.4.1.5. GROUND LEVEL CONCENTRATION (GLC) OF EMISSIONS

The prediction of impact due to project activities on air environment was based on

1. Source, quantity and quality of emissions

2. Pre project ambient air quality

3. Air quality modeling

The impact on air quality from the proposed integrated steel industry is discussed

below.

4.4.1.6. AIR POLLUTION DISPERSION MODELING STUDIES

4.4.1.6.1 INTRODUCTION

Atmospheric dispersion modeling is the mathematical simulation of how air pollutants

disperse in the ambient atmosphere. It is performed with computer programs that

solve the mathematical equations and algorithms which simulate the pollutant

dispersion. The dispersion models are used to estimate or to predict the downwind

concentration of air pollutants emitted from sources such as industrial plants and

vehicular traffic. Such models are important to governmental agencies tasked with

protecting and managing the ambient air quality. The models are typically employed

to determine whether existing or proposed new industrial facilities are or will be in

compliance with the National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS). The models

also serve to assist in the design of effective control strategies to reduce emissions of

harmful air pollutants.

Sl. No Pollutants Concentrationµg/m3 (Annual)

1 Suspended Particulate Matter (SPM) 602 Sulphur Dioxide 503 Nitrogen Oxides 40

Page 152: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

127

In the present study prediction of impacts on the air environment has been carried out

employing U.S. EPA AERMOD dispersion model, 1996 – 2011 Lakes Environmental

Software, Version 6.2.0 and designed for multiple sources for predicting the

maximum ground level concentration (GLC).

4.4.1.6.2 MODEL INPUT DATAThe major air emissions at the site of M/s. SLR Metaliks Ltd. are SPM, SO2 and NOx

from boilers & DGs. The Proponents have proposed to install electrostatic precipitator

with the boiler to control SPM in flue gas emissions. The site specific monitored data

was used as input to the software AERMOD view by Lakes Environmental is used for

prediction of GLC emission in ambient air. The stack and emission data for model

study is given in Table-4.8.

Page 153: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

128

Table–4.9A Existing Air Pollution Sources

Sl.No. Stack attached to

Stackht,m

Dia,m Area

m2

Exit gasvelocity

m/s

GasflowNm3/

h

Temp0C

Tempin0K

APCmeasure

Emissionconcentration,

g/sPM SOX NOX CO

1 MBF stove 50 2.5 4.90 6.5 56700 80-100

353.15-373.15

gascleaningplant with

dustcatcher

0.4 0.39 0.18 0.47

2 Power plant BFgas based 48 2.5 4.90 6.8 58500 100-

110373.15-383.15 No APC 0.5 0.13 0.03 0.40

3 Sinter plant headend 45 2.5 4.90 8.5 76500 60-65 333.15-

338.15

Gravityseparatorfollowedby ESP

0.59 0.10 0.02 0.02

4 Sinter plant tailend 45 2.5 4.90 8.4 75600 60-65 333.15-

338.15 ESP 0.67 0.1 0.02 0.02

5 Finished sinterdedusting chimney 30 0.8 0.50 7.2 21600 30-32 303.15-

305.15 Bag filter 0.19 0 0 0

6

sinter fuel,fluxcrushing &screeningdedusting chimney

30 1.2 1.13 7.5 32400 30-32 303.15-305.15 Bag filter 0.28 0 0 0

Page 154: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

129

Table-4.9B Proposed Air Pollution Sources

Sl.No.

Stackattached to Gas

flowNm3/ h

Exitgasvelocitym/s

Emission concentrationwithout APC

g/sAPC

measure

Emission concentration withAPC g/s

PM SOX NOX CO PM SOX NOX CO

1 EOF furnace 80,000 14.6 1.97 1.48 0.17 1.78 GCP, Venturiscrubber, 1.77 1.33 0.17 1.77

2 LRF Furnace 16,000 10 0.37 0.17 0.05 0.31Fume

extractionsystem with

bag filter

0.33 0.17 0.05 0.31

3Caster(Fume

exhaust)15,000 12.3 0.32 0.02 0.04 0.02

Fumeextraction

system withbag filter

0.29 0.02 0.04 0.029

5 Reheatingfurnace 21,000 10 0.38 0.47 0.07 0.23 Stack 0.35 0.46 0.07 0.23

6 PCI 35,000 12.5 0.34 0.04 0.01 0.02Fume

extractionsystem with

bag filter

0.31 0.04 0.019 0.03

7 Coke ovenbattery 21,000 11.8 0.51 0.02 0.01 0.02 Stack 0.46 0.02 0.011 0.02

8 Coke oven off–gas boiler 28,000 12.6 0.27 0.03 0.01 0.02 Stack 0.24 0.03 0.015 0.02

9 PGP furnace 15,000 13.8 0.14 0.02 0.01 0.02 ESP 0.13 0.02 0.008 0.02

Page 155: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

130

Table0-4.10 Proposed Pollution Sources

Sl.No.

Stack attachedto

Gasflow

Nm3/ h

Stackht

Dia

Temp temp

Exitgas

velocity

APC measure Emission concentration, g/s

m m 0C 0K m/s PM SOX NOX CO

1 EOF furnace 80,000 51 340-60

313.15-333.15 14.6

GCP, Venturiscrubber, 1.77 1.33 0.17 1.77

2 LRF Furnace 16,000 301.2

40-60

313.15-333.15 10

Fume extractionsystem with bag

filter 0.33 0.17 0.05 0.31

3Caster

(Fume exhaust) 15,000 301.2

40-50

313.15-323.15 12.3

Fume extractionsystem with bag

filter 0.29 0.02 0.04 0.02

5Reheating

furnace 21,000 45 180-150

353.15-423.15 10

Stack0.35 0.46 0.07 0.23

6 PCI 35,000 300.8

40-50

313.15-323.15 12.5

Fume extractionsystem with bag

filter 0.31 0.04 0.01 0.02

7Coke oven

battery 21,000 422.2 950

313.15-323.15 11.8

Stack0.46 0.02 0.01 0.02

8Coke oven off –

gas boiler 28,000 522.5 60 323.16 12.6

Stack0.24 0.03 0.01 0.02

9 PGP furnace 15,000 302.2

60-70

323.15-383.17 13.8

ESP0.13 0.02 0.01 0.02

Page 156: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

131

4.4.1.6.3 Meteorological dataData recorded at the site for 3 months period (11th December 2013 to 11th March

2014) for wind speed, direction, temperature etc. has been used for computations. In

order to conduct a air dispersion modeling Short Term Air Quality Dispersion Models,

the site specific hourly meteorological data measured at the site is pre-processed

using U.S. EPA AERMET program.

4.4.1.6.4 Presentation of resultsThe simulations were made to evaluate incremental short-term concentrations due to

proposed project.

In the short-term simulations, the incremental concentrations were estimated to

obtain an optimum description of variations in concentrations within study area of 10

km radius. The predicted (maximum) concentration levels & the incremental

concentrations at various locations due to the proposed industry are tabulated in the

following Tables. Also Google maps showing stack locations & baseline monitoring

locations are appended subsequently.

Figure-4.1 Google map shows the stacks of existing and proposed along with Table

as under. The Figure-4.2 shows the Google map for the baseline ambient air quality

monitoring locations and also in Table under the respective Figure.

Table-4.11 is presented the Predicted incremental short-term concentrations due to

the proposed project – existing with proposed

Table-4.12 is presented the Predicted incremental short-term concentrations due to

the project – proposed

Figure-4.3 is presented Suspended Particulate Matter (PM10) isotherms for the

proposed project (existing proposed) for i) 24 hours – 1st highest value, ii) 24 hours –

98 percentile, iii) Annual

Figure-4.4 is presented the Suspended Particulate Matter (PM10) isotherms for the

proposed project (proposed) for i) 24 hours – 1st highest value, ii) 24 hours – 98

percentile, iii) Annual

Figure-4.5 is presented the Sulfur di-oxide (SO2) isotherms for proposed project

(existing + proposed) for i) 24 hours – 1st highest value, ii) 24 hours – 98 percentile,

iii) Annual

Page 157: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

132

Figure-4.6 is presented the Sulfur di-oxide (SO2) isotherms for proposed project

(proposed) for i) 24 hours – 1st highest value, ii) 24 hours – 98 percentile and iii)

Annual

Figure-4.7 is presented the Oxides of nitrogen (NOx) isotherms for proposed project

(existing+proposed) for i) 24 hours – 1st highest value, ii) 24 hours – 98 percentile

and iii) Annual.

Figure-4.8 is presented the nitrogen oxide (NOx) isotherms for proposed project

(proposed) for i) 24 hours – 1st highest value, ii) 24 hours – 98 percentile and iii)

Annual

Figure-4.9 is presented the Carbon monoxide (CO) isotherms for proposed project

(existing + proposed) for i) 1 hour – 1st highest value, ii) 1 hour – 98 percentile, iii) 8

hours – 1st highest value, iv) 8 hours – 98 percentile.

Figure-4.10 is presented the carbon monoxide (CO) isotherms for proposed project

(proposed) for i) 24 hours – 1st highest value, ii) 24 hours – 98 percentile and iii)

Annual

Table-4.13 is presented the Resultant maximum 24 hourly concentrations (existing +

proposed)

Table-4.14 is presented the Resultant maximum 24 hourly concentrations (proposed)

Page 158: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

133

Figure-4.1 Google map showing stacks – existing & proposed

Sl. No. Stackno.

Name of the stack

11. MBF stove

2 2. Power plant Blast furnace gas based

3 3. Sinter plant head end

4 4. Sinter plant tail end

5 5. Finished sinter dedusting chimney

6 6. Sinter fuel,flux crushing & screening dedusting chimney

7 7. EOF furnace

8 8. LOF Furnace

9 9. Vacuum degassing unit

10 10. Reheating furnace

11 11. PCI furnace

12 12. PGP furnace

13 13. Coke oven battery

14 14. Coke oven off –gas boiler

Page 159: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

134

Figure-4.2 Google Map Showing Baseline Monitoring Locations

Sl.No. Code no. Name of the

stationDirection from

the siteDistancefrom site

(km)1 A 1 Vasthu Building South West SLR Plant

Premises2 A 2 Near Guard Pond North West corner -3 A 3 Near Weigh bridge -

1North -

4 A 4 Electric tower no 20 South East -5 A 5 Near Administration

BuildingSouth East -

6 A 6 Project site North east -7 A7 Lokappanahola S-W 2.08 A8 Mariyammanahalli S-E 3.0

9 A9 Devalapura SS-E 5.610 A10 Nagalapura S-EE 7.511 A11 MarabbihaluTanda S-W 8.012 A12 Down Wind

DirectionRajapura N-E 9.0

Page 160: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

135

Table-4.11 Predicted incremental short-term concentrations due to theproposed project (Existing + Proposed)

Time Maximum predictedconcentrations, µg/m3

Direction and distance ofoccurrence

24 hour Annual 24 hour Annual1ST

highestvalues

98percentile

1ST

highestvalues

98percentile

SuspendedParticulateMatter(PM10)

10.37986 8.77263 3.60172 0.3 km –SouthWest

0.2 km –South West

Southwestboundaryof theprojectsite

Sulfur di-oxide (SO2)

10.89629 7.23341 2.79066 0.26 km– East

0.06 km –West

Westernboundaryof theprojectsite

Oxides ofnitrogen(NOx)

1.90936 1.4481 0.52739 0.1 km –southeast

0.42 km –south east

0.26 km– southeast

Carbonmonoxide(CO)

1 hr –8.173708 hrs –16.14136

1 hr –7.192918 hrs –10.73406

2.5134 1 hr – 0.1km –North8 hrs -0.15 km– North

1 hr – 0.1km – southwest8 hrs –0.165 km –south east

0.1 km –southeast

Page 161: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

136

Table-4.12 Predicted incremental short-term concentrations due to theproject – proposed

Time

Maximum predictedconcentrations, µg/m3

Direction and distance ofoccurrence

24 hour

Annual

24 hour

Annual1ST

highestvalues

98percentile

1SThighestvalues

98percentile

SuspendedParticulateMatter(PM10)

4.02998 3.27781 1.54641

0.12 km– North

0.11 km –North

Southwestboundaryof theprojectsite

Sulfur di-oxide(SO2)

5.96634 4.2283 1.43039

0.10 km– NorthEast

0.14 km –North East

0.15 km– Southwest

Oxides ofnitrogen(NOx)

1.59765 1.11872 0.3859 0.03 km-NorthEast

0.06 km –South West

0.07 km– Southwest

Carbonmonoxide(CO)

1 hr –7.061538 hrs –19.63727

1 hr –5.443868 hrs –9.45671

1.68377 1 hr –0.213km –NorthEast8 hrs -0.05 km– NorthEast

1 hr – 0.3km – NorthEast &south west8 hrs –0.05km – NorthEast

0.2 km –southWest

Page 162: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

137

Figure- 4.3 Suspended Particulate Matter (PM10) isotherms for the proposedproject (existing + proposed)

i) 24 hours – 1st highest value

Page 163: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

138

ii) 24 hours – 98 percentile

Page 164: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

139

iii) Annual

Page 165: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

140

Figure-4.4 Suspended Particulate Matter (PM10) isotherms for the proposedproject (proposed)

i) 24 hours – 1st highest value

Page 166: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

141

ii) 24 hours – 98 percentile

Page 167: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

142

iii) Annual

Page 168: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

143

Figure- 4.5 Sulfur di-oxide (SO2) isotherms for proposed project(existing+proposed)

i) 24 hours – 1st highest value

Page 169: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

144

ii) 24 hours – 98 percentile

Page 170: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

145

iii) Annual

Page 171: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

146

Figure- 4.6 Sulfur di-oxide (SO2) isotherms for proposed project (proposed)

i) 24 hours – 1st highest value

Page 172: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

147

ii) 24 hours – 98 percentile

Page 173: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

148

iii) Annual

Page 174: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

149

Figure-4.7 Oxides of nitrogen (NOx) isotherms for proposed project (existing

+ proposed)

i) 24 hours – 1st highest value

Page 175: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

150

iii) 24 hours – 98 percentile

Page 176: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

151

iv) Annual

Page 177: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

152

Figure-4.8 Oxides of nitrogen (NOx) isotherms for proposed project (existing

+ proposed)

i) 24 hours – 1st highest value

Page 178: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

153

ii) 24 hours – 98 percentile

Page 179: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

154

iii) Annual

Page 180: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

155

Figure-4.9 Carbon monoxide (CO) isotherms for proposed project (existing +

proposed)

i) 1 hour – 1st highest value

Page 181: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

156

ii) 1 hour – 98 percentile

Page 182: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

157

iii) 8 hours – 1st highest value

Page 183: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

158

iv) 8 hours – 98 percentile

Page 184: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

159

v) Annual

Page 185: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

160

Figure-4.10 Carbon monoxide (CO) isotherms for proposed project

(proposed)

i) 1 hour – 1st highest value

Page 186: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

161

ii) 1 hour – 98 percentile

Page 187: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

162

iii) 8 hours – 1st highest value

Page 188: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

163

iv) 8 hours – 98 percentile

Page 189: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

164

v) Annual

Page 190: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

165

4.4.1.6.5 COMMENTS

The maximum short-term incremental ground-level concentrations aresuperimposed on the baseline data to get the likely resultant levels after theestablishment of the proposed project as tabulated below.

Table-4.13 Resultant maximum 24 hourly concentrations (proposed)

PollutantIncremental

concentrations,µg/m3

Max. baselineconcentrations,

µg/m3

Resultantconcentrations,

µg/m3

Limits asper MoEF,µg/m3 forindustrialareas (24

hrs)Vasthu building (1)

PM10 3.27 62.35 65.62 100SO2 4.22 9.3 13.52 80NOx 1.11 10.3 11.41 80

CO 5.44– 1 hr9.45 – 8 hrs 0.12 – 1 hr

– 8 hrs

4,000 – 1 hr2,000 – 8

hrsNear Guard Pond (2)

PM10 3.27 61.44 64.71 100SO2 4.22 8.3 12.52 80NOx 1.11 9.4 10.51 80

CO 5.44– 1 hr9.45 – 8 hrs 0.13 5.57– 1 hr

9.58 – 8 hrs

4,000 – 1 hr2,000 – 8

hrsNear weigh bridge - 1 (3)

PM10 3.27 53.11 63.29 100SO2 4.22 8.5 12.72 80NOx 1.11 9.1 10.21 80

CO 5.44– 1 hr9.45 – 8 hrs 0.12 5.56– 1 hr

9.57– 8 hrs

4,000 – 1 hr2,000 – 8

hrsElectrical tower no 20 (4)

PM10 3.27 60.02 63.29 100SO2 4.22 9.2 13.42 80NOx 1.11 8.4 9.51 80

CO 5.44– 1 hr9.45 – 8 hrs 0.16 5.6 – 1 hr

9.61 – 8 hrs

4,000 – 1 hr2,000 – 8

hrsNear administration building (5)

PM10 3.27 57.78 61.05 100SO2 4.22 8.4 12.62 80NOx 1.11 8.9 10.01 80CO 5.44– 1 hr

9.45 – 8 hrs 0.13 5.57 – 1 hr9.58 – 8 hrs

4,000 – 1 hr2,000 – 8

hrs

Page 191: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

166

Project site (6)PM10 3.27 60.89 64.16 100SO2 4.22 13.1 17.32 80NOx 1.11 13.9 15.01 80

CO 5.44– 1 hr9.45 – 8 hrs 0.15 5.59– 1 hr

9.6– 8 hrs

4,000 – 1 hr2,000 – 8

hrsLokappanahola (7)

PM10 3.27 53.44 56.71 100SO2 4.22 5.3 9.52 80NOx 1.11 6.5 7.61 80

CO 5.44– 1 hr9.45 – 8 hrs 0.05 5.49 – 1 hr

9.5 – 8 hrs

4,000 – 1 hr2,000 – 8

hrsMariyammanahalli (8)

PM10 3.27 61.78 65.05 100SO2 4.22 5.4 9.62 80NOx 1.11 6.5 7.61 80

CO 5.44– 1 hr9.45 – 8 hrs 0.06 5.5 – 1 hr

9.51 – 8 hrs

4,000 – 1 hr2,000 – 8

hrsDevalapura (9)

PM10 3.27 45.88 49.15 100SO2 4.22 6.3 10.52 80NOx 1.11 6.9 8.01 80CO 5.44– 1 hr

9.45 – 8 hrs 0.07 5.51 – 1 hr9.52– 8 hrs

4,000 – 1 hr2,000 – 8

hrsNagalapura (10)

PM10 3.27 46.68 49.95 100SO2 4.22 6.8 11.02 80NOx 1.11 6.4 7.51 80CO 5.44– 1 hr

9.45 – 8 hrs 0.05 5.49– 1 hr9.5– 8 hrs

4,000 – 1 hr2,000 – 8

hrsMarabbihalu Tanda (11)

PM10 3.27 46.89 50.16 100SO2 4.22 5.9 10.12 80NOx 1.11 6.2 7.31 80

CO 5.44– 1 hr9.45 – 8 hrs 0.09 5.53– 1 hr

9.54– 8 hrs

4,000 – 1 hr2,000 – 8

hrsRajapura (12)

PM10 3.27 42.5 45.77 100SO2 4.22 13.9 18.12 80NOx 1.11 12.4 13.51 80

CO 5.44– 1 hr9.45 – 8 hrs 0.14 5.58– 1 hr

9.59– 8 hrs

4,000 – 1 hr2,000 – 8

hrs

Page 192: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

167

According to MoEF air quality standards (as per the notification dated 16th November2009 for industrial, residential & rural areas) 24 hourly or 8 hourly or 1 hourlymonitored values, as applicable, shall be complied with 98% of the time in a year; 2%of the time, they may exceed the limits but not on two consecutive days of monitoring.

Therefore the 98% values are considered for estimation of the incrementalconcentration.

The above Table indicates that the cumulative resultant ambient air quality afterproposed project operation will be within the ambient air quality limits specified byMoEF as per the notification dated 16th November 2009 for industrial, residential &rural areas.

4.4.2 WATER ENVIRONMENT

Potential impacts of withdrawal of water and wastewater discharges from the

proposed industry on land or water body is an important factor in EIA Studies. The

quantitative and qualitative information on water utilization and waste water

generation in the proposed industry is presented in Chapter-2, 2.10. The information

also includes the built in facilities and measures for treatment and disposal waste

water proposed to be incorporated in the project. The impacts expected from

withdrawal water from river and disposal of waste water on land is discussed in this

section.

4.4.2.1 SOURCE OF WATERThe source of water for the project is Tungabhadra Dam. The Salient features of

Tungabhadra project are as follows,

1. River – Tungabhadra

Village - Mallapujam

Taluka – Hospet

District - Bellary

State - Karnataka

Longitude – 76 0 – 20 1 -10” E

Latitude - 15 0 – 15 1 -19” E

2. Reservoir

Catchments area - 28177 sq km.

Page 193: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

168

Gross storage (1953) – 132.471TMC

Live storage (Year 1953) – 131.312 TMC

Dead Storage (Year 1953) – 1.159 TMC

Gross storage (Year 2010) – 101.107 TMC

Water spread – 3781Sq.Km

Length of Reservoir – 80km.

Estimated annual yield – 407.107 TMC

Maximum discharge flood – 3,69,152 cusecs (Nov 92)

Designed flood discharge – 6,50,000 cusecs

Rain fall in the catchment area of Tungabhadra river in the western Ghats receives

about 4500mm.

The project proponents have permission to draw 0.19 TMC of water only when the

water level in the dam is reached highest level i.e when the dam is full.

4.4.2.2 DISCHARGE RATE

Agreement made between Executive Engineer Munirabad and SLR metaliks Ltd to

draw 0.19TMC in 30 to 40 days when the dam level is full.

4.4.2.3 DISTANCE FROM THE PROJECT

The approximate distance of tapping point from the project is 2km.

4.4.2.4 SURFACE HYDROLOGY AND WATER REGIME

Tungabhadra River is one of the major tributaries of Krishna. Tungabhadra desires its

name from the confluence of two streams, the Tunga and the Bhadra both of which

rise in the wooded eastern slopes of the Western Ghats in the state of Karnataka and

flow eastward. The river runs 382 kms in Karnataka. Catchment area of the

Tungabhadra reservoir is 28177 sqkm .The river basin is influenced by the southwest

monsoon with copious inflow during monsoon which dwindles to few cumecs in

summer months .Tungabhadra reservoir impounds 3766 mm3(133TMC) of water in

the reservoir.

Page 194: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

169

4.4.2.5 WATER USAGE

0.19TMC w a t e r from Tungabhadra reservoir will be taken. The water will be

stored in a reservoir tank and pumped to the plant for treatment and utilization as

make up cooling water and other applications. In the unlikely event of a power failure

an overhead tank of sufficient height & Capacity has been provided to ensure

nonstop supply as continuous water flow is as must to cool the system. The water

softener is provided to avoid scaling in the pipelines, which will reduce the

efficiency of the whole system.

The quantitative and qualitative information on water utilization and waste water

generation in the proposed industry is presented in Chapters – 2,9. The information

also includes the built in facilities and measures for treatment and disposal waste

water. The impacts expected from withdrawal water from river and disposal of waste

water on land is discussed in this section.

4.4.2.6 IMPACT OF WATER WITHDRAWAL FROM RIVERFresh water requirement to the proposed project will be 3005 m3/d. This will be met

from the back water source of Tungabhadra river and dam. The Tungabhadra river is

a perennial river and joins to the dam. The water from river and dam are mainly used

for agriculture uses and also to meet domestic needs of downstream towns and

villages. Drawl of water from river, especially during summer and lean flow period is

likely to affect the competitive users river water. However, the industry will draw water

only from the back water source of the river mainly during flood period. The

government has allowed drawing water up to reservoir level + 1633 feet if when the

reservoir level goes below 1633 feet the firm will not be permitted to draw water. The

drainage area of the Tungabhadra river in the western ghats receives about 4500mm

of rainfall while the project area and rivers running in the peninsula receives about

480-760mm rain fall.

Water AccountYield

1 Opening balance 1.294 TMC ft

2 Inflow recoded at T.B. Dam 316.786 TMC ft

Total 318.080 TMC ft

Page 195: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

170

Utilization1. Drawls for irrigation by both states 151.501 TMC ft

2. Spillovers surpluss 119.411 TMC ft

3. Power generation 30.435 TMC ft

4. System losses 5.234 TMC ft

5. Evaporation losses 9.298 TMC ft

6. Closing balance (residual storage) 2.141 TMC ft

Total 318.080 TMC ft

During the lean season also there will be minimum flow of water in the upstream as

well in the downstream. There will be discharge of water by upstream projects like

tunga, varadha and hirehall projects which will ensure the availability of water for

drinking water and other projects.

The water, thus drawn will be stored in a huge reservoir of 6 lakh m3 capacity for

subsequent use in the industry. Storm water gutter net work and water harvesting is

practiced in the industry and water realized during rainy period from them is stored in

the above reservoir to augment the water source.

4.4.2.7. WATER CONSERVATION PLAN

The following steps are comprehensively foreseen for optimizing the water

consumption in the expansion project,

1. Effectively monitoring and control of water consumption on day to day

basis .

2. Water meters will be installed at all consumption and make up water

points to monitor and control the water consumption.

3. All sumps and transfer canals in the plant will be provided with the

adequate RCC and PCC bases to avoid water seepage losses.

4. The drip irrigation system and spray fountain systems shall be adopted

wherever applicable to reduce water consumption for horticulture and

gardening.

5. STP treated water will be re-used for maintenance of garden and green

belt development.

6. Rain water harvesting will be employed for storm water to collect and

conserve the water for future usage.

Page 196: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

171

7. Roads will be asphalted and yards shall be concreted to avoid water

sprinkling needs to keep the emission levels of ambient air low.

8. Necessary caution and educative boards , slogans related with water

conservation will be displayed at vantage points to create awareness among

entire workforce.

9. Plant water balance will be reviewed periodically by top management to

effectuate all steps for continuous improvements on water conservation front.

4.4.2.8 TREATMENT & UTILIZATION OF EFFLUENT4.4.2.8.1 WASTE WATER MANAGEMENTThe source and quantity & utilization of domestic and trade effluents generated in the

industry are given in Table-4.12.

4.4.2.8.2 DOMESTIC EFFLUENTThe domestic effluents are generated from rest rooms and canteen. They are treated

in septic at the source location and over flow from septic tank is treated sewage

treatment plant. Total employees in the industry for the present activities are 450 and

additional employees for proposed activities will be 500. Domestic effluent generated

from existing and proposed units will be 22.5 m3/d and 32 m3/d respectively. The

sewage treatment plant consisting of bar screen, oil grease separator, neutralizer,

equalizer, aeration tan and secondary clarifier is designed for 60 m3/d capacity. The

characteristics of untreated and treated effluent are given in Table-4..15Treated

effluent is collected in a sump and then sent for use on land for greenery and green

belt development. The flow chart of STP is given in Figure-4.11.

Table-4.14 Characteristics of Untreated and Treated Effluents

Sl.No. Parameters Domestic Effluent Trade EffluentUntreated Treated Untreated Treated

1 Flow rate.m3/d 33 33 473 4732 Temperature ° c 40 38 38 383 pH 6.5 7.4 6.8 7.44 Dissolved solids 1250 840 1860 13405 Suspended solids 148 35 200 406 BOD, ppm 280 65 40 207 COD, ppm 430 135 120 908 Oil, ppm 34 Nil 10 Nil

Page 197: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

172

4.4.2.8.3 INDUSTRIAL EFFLUENTThe industrial effluents, 473 m3/d generated in the industry are manly blow down

from circulating cooling water and circulating scrubber and quenching water. They

contain mainly the suspended and dissolved inorganic matter, The presence of BOD,

COD or organic matter is insignificant. The purge and blow down waters are

neutralized and settled in the guard pond of about 100 d capacity. The over flow from

guard pond will be utilized on land for greenery development. It will also be used for

spraying on roads and land for dust suppression. This will be also be used in the

plant for makeup of cooling water loss. The guard pond is of earthen impervious

construction & located at ground level. The tank interior is suitably compacted and

finished.

Wastewater from slab caster and rolling mill complex are likely to contain suspended

solids and oil & grease. These effluents will be routed to settling pits fitted with oil &

grease trap. The clarified water is reused in the process.

Table- 4.15 Treatment and utilization of Effluents

Parameter Trade effluent treatment Utilization

Trade effluentBlow down fromcirculating cooling &process waterTotal : 473 m3/d

The waste water isequalized and collected inthe guard pond. The pondhas a capacity to holdwastewater for about 30days. The guard pond is ofearthen work imperviousconstruction & located atground level. The tankinterior is suitablycompacted and finished.The size of guard pond isas given below.

Re-used for green-beltdevelopment, dustsuppression & roadcleaning.

Parameter Raw effluent treatment Utilization

Domestic effluentTotal: 33 m3/d

Existing SewageTreatment Plant of 60 KLDcapacity will be utilized fortreating the Sewage fromthe existing and proposedexpansion activities.

Re-used for green-beltdevelopment

Page 198: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

173

Figure-4.11 Treatment Scheme for Domestic Effluent Stream

Treated water will beutilized for gardening

4.4.2.9. RAIN WATER HARVESTING SYSTEMA combination of recharge pits with bore well & holding ponds with recharge

facility have been proposed for this project.

Filter cake

Recycle to diffusedaeration

P

P

Oil and Grease Tank

ClarifierFilter

Sump

PSF & ACF

Treated water sump

Diffused aeration tank

Equalization cum neutralization tank

Bar screen

Page 199: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

174

4.4.2.9.1. UNDERGROUND TANKS Total yield from roof areas was calculated based on 90% dependability

rainfall (760 mm) & 0.90 runoff coefficients.

Roof top rain water down take pipe is further connected to sand bed

filter for filtration.

Filter needs to be cleaned periodically during the rainy season to

remove the filtered material and to keep the filtration system clean.

The filter water is proposed to be stored in existing cluster wise

underground water tanks.

This would provide additional benefit of flood management via storm

water detention for RWH.

Rooftop downspouts from the respective unit will be designed to drain

to main storm drain system with a flow splitter arrangement for drainage to the

proposed underground storage tank.

During the storm events of the wet season, valve located at the flow

splitter will be operated to direct water to the tank.

This stored water is recommended to be used for gardening and

housekeeping purposes.

4.4.2.9.2. RECHARGE PITS AND HOLDING PONDS

Recharge pits of size 3.0x3.0x3.0 m with bore well and 2 existing

holding ponds have been proposed for recharging at various locations to

enable ground water recharge.

Rain water from storm drain will enter the recharge pit through filter

media and then to bore wells through slotted casing pipes.

Feasibility of recharge through bore wells is based on geotechnical

report.

Four holding tanks are proposed to harvest the runoff from the

landscaped area.

13 recharge pits around existing bore well are proposed.

Page 200: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

175

4.4.2.10. AQUIFER MANAGEMENT PLANThe rock formations occurring in the area fall under category of hard rocks. They

are the oldest rock belongs to ARCHEAN age. They lacks primary inter granular

porosity. They are characterized by secondary porosity through weathering and

fracturing. The thickness of the soil and depth of weathering vary from place to

place.

As per the topographical survey of the area , terrain in North , south west and

south are relatively at higher elevation of granitic and schistose formations

showing a first stage of formation of water Table where run-off is more than

infiltration , an impervious and poor aquifer because of scanty rain fall (760

mm)and higher temperature (38-46°c ).ground water in zone of vegetation, which

is partially filled up with water and air will be dried up during summer season . so

ground water Table fluctuation is more during the summer period . thus the above

area comes under poor aquifers. Only small portion of the area towards north

&north east showing feasibility of aquifer nature. A seasonal nalla which is running

from west to north and north east showing presence of aquifer.

4.4.2.10.1 MANAGEMENT PLAN FOR RECHARGING THE AQUIFERDue to rapid urbanization (industrial) activities, infiltration of rain water into the sub

soil has decreased resulting in lesser recharging of grounded water. The scenario

requires an alternative source to bridge the gap. Rain water which is available and

is purest form of water would be an immediate source of water supply by catching

water wherever it falls.

Rain water harvesting (RWH) is the process of collection and storing of water in a

scientific and controlled use. It includes,

RWH in paved and unpaved areas (open fields,parks,pavement,land

scapes etc)

RWH in large areas with open ponds, lakes, etc.

Capturing rain water in situ.

Replenishing ground water through recharging of rain water by using

soil column.

Check dam across the seasonal nalla.

STEP wells

Lake culture i.e. chain of water storage structures recharged to ground

through recharge pits, dug wells, soak pits etc.

Page 201: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

176

4.4.2.11. LEACHEATE STUDY FOR THE STOCK PILES

The raw materials and finished product are insoluble in nature. There will be no

charge in Chemical composition of the water .These will not be any waste disposal

site in the project area. The possibility of pollution due to seepage or percolation to

the sub surface will be controlled by constructing shed to the stock piles where ever

possible and the flooring will be made impervious by concreting with water proof

plastering.

4.4.2.12. FLOOD HAZARD

River Tungabhadra a tributary to the major River Krishna is with in 10km radius from

the SLR Metaliks project site. Tungabhadra River derives its name from the

confluence of two stream the Tunga and the Bhadra both of which rise in the wooded

eastern slopes of the western ghats in the state of Karnataka and flow eastward.

After confluence of these two streams at Kudali near Shimoga, the Tungabhadra runs

for about 531kms and joins the River Krishna at Sangameshwaram near Kurnool in

the state of Andhra Pradesh .The catchment area of Tungabhadra reservoir is 28,177

km2. The river basin is influenced by the southwest monsoon with copious inflows

during monsoon which dwindles to few cumecs in summer months.The drainage area

of the Tungabhadra river in the western ghats receives about 4500mm of rainfall

while the project area and rivers running in the peninsula receives about 480-760mm

rain fall.

Water AccountYield

1 Opening balance 1.294 TMC ft2 Inflow recoded at T.B. Dam 316.786 TMC ftTotal 318.080 TMC ft

Utilization1. Drawls for irrigation by both states 151.501 TMC ft

2. Spillovers surpluss 119.411 TMC ft

3. Power generation 30.435 TMC ft

4. System losses 5.234 TMC ft

5. Evaporation losses 9.298 TMC ft

6. Closing balance (residual storage) 2.141 TMC ft

Total 318.080 TMC ft

Page 202: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

177

The Tungabhadra reservoir has not been provided with flood storage capacity for

flood absorption .The full reservoir level and maximum water level of the reservoir are

same and is at 1633 ft. Therefore the entire flood impinging the reservoir has to be

either stored to the extent possible or passed over the spillway. The spillway with 33

gates is designed to allow a maximum discharge of 6,50,000 cuses at full reservoir

level. The operation of spillway gates is carried out in accordance with approved

schedules duly ensuring the safely of the dam and is maintained by CENTRAL

WATER COMMISSION.

The proposed project viz SMS plant, rolling mill, coke oven plant, coke oven power

plant, producer gas plant, PCI plant, oxygen plant are part of integrated steel

industry. In the integrated steel industry air pollution is a major concern than the

water pollution. The proposed projects will be designed by keeping the zero

discharge policy or no discharge policy.

Topography of the proposed Project site is at higher level with respect to Temporary

Bench Mark (TBM) compared to the TBM of the river so there will be no flood effect

during the river flooding. The industry is located at a distance of 600 to 700m from the

high flood level (HFL) of the dam. The lowest level in the project site is 504(1653 ft) m

above MSL and HFL level or full supply level is 497m, However the dam gates will

be opened even before reaching 497 (1633 ft) m above MSL. The satellite imagery

showing the water levels of different season is given below which clearly shows that

the water does not enter into the project site.

4.4.2.13 MANAGEMENT PLAN TO PREVENT THE WATER POLLUTION DUE TO

PROPOSED PROJECTS ON TUNGABHADRA DAM.

The existing plant consists of 262m3 blast furnace, 33m2 sinter plant and 6MW blast

furnace off gas based power plant. Now it is proposed to install value addition units

to the existing product viz 0.30 MTPA steel plant, 0.32 MTPA rolling mill, 0.12

MTPA coke oven plant, 9 MW coke oven off gas based power plant, 120 TPD

oxygen plant, 10 TPH pulverised coal injection plant (PCI) and 15000 Nm3/Hr

producer gas plant. As the proposed units require prior Environmental Clearance

(EC ) from MoEF as per EIA notification Act 2006, we have submitted the form-1 ,

Page 203: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

178

prefeasibility report and proposed TOR’s to MoEF. The Proposal was considered

by reconstituted Expert Appraisal Committee (Industry) in its 13th meeting held

during 18th to 20th November,2013 and TOR for EIA studies was deliberated &

accordingly EIA studies were conducted.

The proposed project viz SMS plant, rolling mill, coke oven plant, coke oven power

plant, producer gas plant, PCI plant, oxygen plant are part of integrated steel

industry. In the integrated steel industry air pollution is a major concern than the

water pollution. The proposed projects will be designed by keeping the zero

discharge policy or no discharge policy. The wastewater streams will be in

closed circuit.

Proposed project sites are located at a distance of 600-700m from the HFL of the

Tungabhadra Dam, considering the distance of water body from the proposed

expansion site, SLR Metaliks has proposed management plan to eliminate the

water pollution on Tungabhadra river.

No manufacturing units will be located near water body, north side will be covered

dense vegetation lalyer.

4.4.2.13.1 STORM WATER MANAGEMENTTopography of the proposed Project site is at higher level with respect to HFL/FSL of

the river .The lowest level in the project site is 504(1653 ft) m above MSL and HFL

level or full supply level is 497m, the storm water generated in the proposed site will

be collected through efficient drainage system and stored in 3 number guard ponds

for reuse.

Strom water gutters will be constructed in the premise as per the standards taking

into peak runoff factor and flash flood rate. The storm water drains will lead to rain

water reservoirs/ guard ponds constructed at the lowest level of the premise as

shown in the layout plan. The annual rainfall in the region is about 759 mm and is

spread from June to November. The maximum monthly rainfall is about 287 mm. The

unit posses a total of 190 acres land. The area consists of 76 acre built up plant area,

57 acres open area and 57 acres green belt area. The guard ponds will be designed

by considering the worst case scenario peak monthly rainfall for 12 months and there

is no consumption of collected storm water in process or for other activity. However in

reality The stormwater/ runoff collected in reservoir will be used for process, dust

Page 204: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

179

suppression & greenery development in the factory. The storm water collected from

other premises is given below.

Sl.No. Location

AreaAcres (m2)

AverageRun-offFactor

Rain fallIn

m/month

Rain watercollected ,

m3/yr

1.

Built up area(including roads,plant and parkingplaces)

76(304000) 0.7 0.287 61074

2. Green belt area 57(228000) 0.4 0.287 261743 Open area 57(228000) 0.6 0.287 39262

Total 190(760000) _ 126510

Storm water storage tanks will be constructed with impervious concrete lining work

as per standard practices. The capacity and size of the reservoir is given below

Guard pond Location Capacityin m3

Averagedepth, m Area in m2

Guard pond (I)At Lowerlevel of thefactorypremises

47000 5 9400

Guard pond (II) At Lowerlevel of thefactorypremises

47000 5 9400

Guard pond (III) At Lowerlevel of thefactorypremises

33000 5 6600

The guard ponds will act as a buffer system to handle peak discharges, the waterfrom this facility is used in the process, dust suppression & greenery developmentthus storm water is completely reused.

Guard ponds will be taken for de-silting annually. The silt is being used for gardening,as our area is rocky/ sandy in nature; the silt is used as manure for gardendevelopment.

Double hight compound walls compound will be constructed towards the north side of

plant.

Page 205: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

180

WATER CONSERVATION PLANThe following steps are comprehensively foreseen for optimizing the water

consumption in the expansion project,

Schematic plan of storm water management plan

4.4.2.13.2. RAIN WATER HARVESTINGRain harvesting fits will be constructed along rain water gutters at a distance of about

60-100 m. A total of about 40 pits will be constructed as per practice. Each pit will be

of size 3.0 m X 2.0 m X 3.0 M. They are filled with small boulders, pebbles, and

coarse sand.

Well designed storm water drainage system consisting of open surface drains, catch

pits will be provided to keep the entire plant free from water logging. The area of

coal/coke storage and handling are concreted and drains are provided. Water

Proposed project Area

Guard Pond-1

47,000 m3

Guard Pond-2

47,000 m3

Production units

Storm water

GREEN BELT

Guard Pond-3

33,000 m3

Storm water

Page 206: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

181

collected in these drains may contain suspended solids. The rain water collected at

coal/coke stock yard will be led to settling tanks/catch pits to remove suspended

particles. The coal/coke particles are recycled to the plant. The rain water after

settling is collected in to rain water storage pond for use in the plant, dust

suppression and greenery development.

4.4.2.13.3. WATER CONSERVATION1. Adaptation of less water consuming technologies/ dry processes like air

cooled condenser (ACC) in place of water cooled condenser in proposed

captive power plant, thereby reducing the wastewater generation.

2. Effectively monitoring and control of water consumption on day to day

basis .

3. Water meters will be installed at all consumption and make up water

points to monitor and control the water consumption.

4. All sumps and transfer canals in the plant will be provided with the

adequate RCC and PCC bases to avoid water seepage losses.

5. The drip irrigation system and spray fountain systems shall be adopted

wherever applicable to reduce water consumption for horticulture and

gardening.

6. STP treated water will be re-used for maintenance of garden and green

belt development.

7. Rain water harvesting will be employed for storm water to collect and

conserve the water for future usage.

8. Roads will be asphalted and yards shall be concreted to avoid water

sprinkling needs to keep the emission levels of ambient air low.

9. Necessary caution and educative boards , slogans related with water

conservation will be displayed at vantage points to create awareness among

entire workforce.

10. Plant water balance will be reviewed periodically by top management to

effectuate all steps for continuous improvements on water conservation front.

4.4.2.13.4. GARLAND DRAINSGarland drains will be constructed in the proposed industry to make sure that all the

storm water generated will be collected and diverted to guard pond. Hence there is

water is permitted to go out of the plant premises.

Page 207: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

182

4.4.2.13.5. AIR POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURES

The industry will adopt effective air pollution measures to minimize the dust

generation, by installing APC like ESP, Cyclone, scrubber, bag filters, dedusting

systems, water sprinklers and developing greenbelt around the premises.

Water conservation plans, rainwater harvesting measures and storm water

management system will effectively reduces the impact on Tungabhadra dam due to

proposed integrated steel project.

4.5 NOISE ENVIRONMENT

4.5.1. SOURCE OF NOISE

During the operation phase of the project, major sources of noise pollution are

expected to be from various machines used for production and vehicular traffic. The

principle source of noise from industry are from fans, centrifuge, turbine, steam traps,

steam vents etc., the observed noise level of these machineries in existing Iron

making factories is given below.

i. Steam turbine - 90 – 95 dB(A)ii. Diesel Generator - 80- 85 dB(A)iii. Fans, compressors and blowers - 85-90 dB (A)iv Crusher - 80-90 dB (A)

vi. Vibratory screen & conveyors - 85-90 dB(A)Most of these generate higher noise. The movement of vehicles like trucks & tractors

has noise level of 70-80 dB (A). The machinery and techniques used for

manufacturing proceed would be such that there is minimal nuisance of noise in the

surrounding region. However as a precautionary measure, enclosures will be

provided where ever possible for all the major mechanical units to arrest the sound

waves travelling outside the plant area.

4.5.2. IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURESThe assessment of the impacts due to noise pollution on the surrounding community

depends upon characteristics of noise source (instantaneous, intermittent, or

continuous in nature), period and duration and the location of noise source with

respect to noise sensitive receptor.

Efforts shall be done to bring down the noise level due to the D. G. set, with in the

allowable limits of about 70 dB(A) by sitting and control measures. The D.G. set is

Page 208: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

183

provided with acoustic treatment for minimum 25 dB (A) insertion loss exhaust muffler

of suiTable quality is provided to offer an insertion loss of about 25 dB(A). Steam

turbine is located in the separate building and acoustic treated premise. Workers at

these equipments are provided with noise control appliances. The noise impact of the

industrial activity is insignificant at the boundary level of the industry. The noise level

due to project activity is limited to the project site only and little impact on surrounding

area. However, movement of vehicles will increase noise levels on the roads and

their near vicinity. SuiTable measures have to be adopted for occupational noise

safety in factory and good maintenance of vehicles. The expected noise level from

proposed project activities at project boundary would be less than the statutory

requirement, ie. Less than 75 db (A) during day time and 70 db (A) during night time.

4.5.3. NOISE QUALITY STANDARDS

The permissible occupational noise level and exposer time is given below.

Standards for Occupational Noise Exposure

Total Time of Exposure per day in hours(Continuous or short term Exposure)

Sound pressurelevel in dB (A)

8 906 924 953 972 100

3/2 1021 105¾ 107½ 110

1/4 115NEVER 115

Note:- No exposure in excess of 115 of dB(A) is to be permitted. For any period of

exposure falling in between any Figure and the next higher or lower Figure or

indicated in column (1). The permissible level is to be determined by extrapolation on

a proportionate scale. Similarly, the standards for ambient noise level are given

below.

Page 209: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

184

Standards for Ambient Noise Level

Category of area dB (A) Day dB (A) NightIndustrial Area 75 70Commercial Area 65 55Residential Area 55 45Silence Zone 50 40Day Time : 8 am to 9 pm Night time : 9 pm to 6 am

To meet these limits, noise abaterment measures as indicated in EMP will be

incorporated with the project.

4.6 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT4.6.1 IMPACT OF METALLURGICAL WASTE AND FINESIn an integrated steel plant , the sources of fine dust generation are as under:

i. Raw materials handling plant.ii. EOF plant

Metallurgical waste and fines are carried with the fugitive gases, scrubber water and

quenching water.

Metallurgical waste and fines are generated at furnace, crushers, charging and

unloading, quenching of hot material etc. These are collected at dust arresters and

settling tank of circulating quench and scrubber water. The fumes and exhaust gases

carrying dust are generated at furnace and quenching operations. The

characteristics of metallurgical waste generated in the proposed project is given

below

Characteristics of Solid Waste

Sl.No

Source Composition of Metallurgical waste and finesFe CaO Mg

O

SiO2 Al2O3 C1 Flue dust 34 7 2 12 3 252 Settling tank

dust29 22 10 8 8 10

3 GCP sludge 36 6 1 9 14 19

The detailed solid waste generated and its disposal handling is given insection 2.12.3.

Page 210: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

185

4.6.2 HANDLING AND UTILIZATION OF COAL ASH

Coal ash is produced in producer gas plant (PGP) where in 220 T/d of B- grade

Indian coal is used as an input. The coal contains about 33% ash. Hence, ash

produced from PGP will be 53 T/d. The ash discharged from the unit will be collected

in a shallow pit of size 20m x 30m x 1.0m depth, 4 nos. The ash is sprayed with water

to quench the hot ash and also to prevent dust evolution.

The moistened and cooled ash is then used for brick making. Each pit has a capacity

to hold about 10 d production of ash from the PGP and lined with geo-membrane to

prevent the seepage.

The pit is produced with the arrangement to collect the leachate if any. The leachate

thus collected will be reused for quenching of hot ash. The capacity of leachate pit is

20 m3/d (Size 3m x 3m x 3m). The location of ash pit is shown in lay out plan.

4.7 SOIL QUALITY

The soil characteristics in the study area are given in Chapter-3. It is seen that the

soil quality is of low fertility. Waste water and solid waste if discharged with out

control on land are likely to affect soil quality. Factory effluent, mainly the purge from

circulating cooling water is treated to standards and then utilized on land.

4.8 BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT

The study area is mainly barren vacant land. There are no forests and ecosensitive

sites in the vicinity of the site except the river Tungabhadra which is at 5 km north

from the site. The backwater of TB reservoir is about 600-700m which goes on

increases upto 3km. No human habilitate within 1.5 km from the site. There are no

endangered flora and fauna species in the region. Vehicular movement during night

will be restricted to avoid adverse consequence to birds and wide animals in the

region. The project activities are restricted to the factory site except the

transportation of raw material and products. There is no discharge of solid or liquid

wastes to the environment. Green belt and greenery will be developed in the premise

covering more than 33% of area. The plantation will comprise of fruiting trees, soil

improving and air pollution abatement tress. No eco sensitive receivers or rare /

endangered species of fauna were observed in the study area.. Thus, the impacts on

flora and fauna will be insignificant.

Page 211: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

186

4.9 SOCIO-ECONOMIC IMPACT

This section discusses the project activities and the extent of the potential impacts

anticipated on socio-economic status in the region. Based on the nature and type of

impacts, the assessment has been divided into 3 category i.e. positive, negative and

negligible impacts. For example, the positive impacts include job opportunities for

men and women, better utilization of land, preservation of environment, infrastructural

development, etc. Long term impacts are also taken into account i.e. relocation,

democracy, aesthetics, accessing utilities, impact on archeological sites, etc.

Negative impacts include adverse impacts on health, air pollution including noise,

road safety, odors etc.

4.9.1. POSITIVE IMPACTSJob opportunity: during the social impact assessment process, locals raised the

question regarding more job opportunities. The benefit relate to direct employment

associated with the construction of the facility. Jobs would be given to unskilled, semi

skilled as well as skilled labor category, for which locals would be given preference

and thereby the overall development of the region is envisaged.

Wider economic growth: this project will increase the economic activities around the

area, creating avenues for direct/indirect employment in the post project period.

There would be a wider economic impact in terms of generating opportunities for

other business like workshops, repair and maintenance tasks etc.

Infrastructural development: this project would enhance the infrastructure in the

vicinity, which also involves road upgrading.

Aesthetics environment: the architectural character of the new building, the vistas and

landscaped areas created would improve the aesthetics of the area.

Additional revenues: the development of land for any purpose creates both an

immediate demand for services and a flow of revenues to the community from a

variety of sources, for example property tax, licenses and permits fee etc.

4.9.2. NEGATIVE IMPACTSAdditional traffic in the area is a matter of concern to the local people. This effect

would be prominent during construction as well as operation phase. The probability of

inconvenience faced due to frequency of truck movement during construction phase

and operation phase would be minimized by better control of traffic movement in the

area. Noise levels expected from the planned operating conditions have been

Page 212: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

187

assesses and are likely to be within accepTable levels. The impacts have been

mitigated by the suggested measure in the “air control and management section”.

Transient labor population from the surrounding areas might come and work at the

site. Though majority of population would be recruited locally, limited labor with

specific skills will be recruited from outside the region. Therefore, no significant

pressure on local infrastructure is envisaged. All environment health &safety (EHS)

practices will be followed according to labor commissions notification.

4.9.3. NEGLIGIBLE IMPACTSAs there is no existing settlement on the proposed project area, there are no issues

of resettlement or rehabilitation.

4.9.4. CONCLUSIONOverall, the project will have major positive impacts on the region in sense of

environment as well as social. Negative effects are not expected if there is dedicated

environmental planning and if at the same time the interests of population and the

areas directly adjacent to the project site are considered.

Establishment of project will enhance the transportation activity. This will create

opportunities to the localites to start vehicle garages. With development of the

industry the roads and communication facilities will be enhanced. The expansion of

integrated steel unit will also create job opportunities to the local mass.

Presently the educational facilities in the study area are limited to primary and high

school. With establishment of this industry the transportation, public mobility and job

opportunity along with associated activities in the region may increase. These

activities will improve economic condition of the local population. The presence of

the industry will enhance commercial activities, which inturn will improve the

economic conditions of the population. Service infrastructure like transportation,

health care, education, communication facilities may improve considerably. The

availability of power from the industry will help to reduce the power scarcity and

frequent power failures in the region by stabilization of the power in the grid, which

will improve power supply to irrigation pump sets and house hold requirements.

Page 213: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

188

4.10 GREEN-BELT DEVELOPMENTGreen belt and greenery will be developed in about 65 acres of land. The species

developed will be as per CPCB guide lines. Assistance and guidelines will also be

availed in development of greenery in the industry.

All the premise green belt of about 20 m will be developed. Line trees will be

developed on either side of the internal roads as well on all approach roads to the

industry,

Lawns will be developed around plant and administrative buildings. Green belt of 10

to 20 m will be developed around open bulk storage yards.

A green belt helps to reduce the pollutant level in the ambient air by preventing the

fugitive dust being carried away by wind. They not only act as a pollution sink for

variety of air pollutants but also replenish the air with much needed oxygen. These

can help to reduce the pollutant level in the air environment. The degree of pollution

attenuation by a green belt depends on its height and width, foliage surface area,

density, dry deposition, velocity of pollutants and the average wind speed through the

green belt. The main objective of green belt around the factory is:

1. Mitigation of impacts due to fugitive emissions

2. Attenuation of noise levels

3. Ecological restoration

4. Improvement in aesthetic environment quality

5. Waste water reuse and re-cycling..

6. Soil erosion prevention

The proposed plant will be located adjacent to the existing steel unit. A very

elaborate green belt is already developed by industry at the existing steel unit.

Greenery and green belt will be developed in the proposed project promise as per

CPCB guidelines. Necessary help and guidelines will be availed from the

departments of Karnataka State nurseries and forest to get suiTable species of

plants. Keeping in view of the soil and water quality available in and around the

project site and the topography of land, following species are considered for green

belt development.

4.10.1 SELECTION OF SPECIESThe species for plantation have been selected on the basis of soil quality , place of

plantation , chances of survival , growth rate, timber value, etc. The area wise

distribution of species proposed is as follows:

Page 214: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

189

i. Road side plantationAvenue plantation should include following species:

Albezzia lebbeck

Azadirachta indica

Tamarindus indica

Delonix regia

Lencaena lencocepha

Acacia nilotica cassia siamea

Ficus benbalensis

ii. Around various shopsAs there will be limited space due to various overhead pipelines, thus small and

medium sized species are suggested and they should be planted depending on the

vertical height available for plant growth.

Small speciesDodonia viscose

Cocoloba prosopis juliflora

Cassia auriculata

Medium size speciesProsopis cineraria

Erythroxylum monogynum

Cassia fistula

Acacia Arabica

Loucaenalencocephala

Cassia alta.

Around office and other buildingsCassia siamea

Ailanthus excels albezzia amera

Albezzia lebbeck

Cassia fistula

Cassia javanica erythrina indica

Lagerstroemia flosreginea

Peltophorum feruginium

Delonix

Page 215: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

190

4.10.2 SPECIFIC LOCATION OF PLANTATIONSThe areas which need special attention regarding green belt development are:

i. Along road side

ii. Around various shops and solid storage yards

iii. Around the periphery of premises.

The width of green belts and type of plant species to be developed in the premises

includes the following .

i. 20m width green belt all along the periphery of the site

ii. 10m width green belt all along the border of solid storage yards including coal &

coke.

iii. Tree plantation on both sides of interior roads in the premise.

iv. lawn with aesthetic plants around shops and other buildings.

Open industrial area will be covered with plantation . An average of about 400 plants

will be maintained per acre of the area. 65 acres of project site will be covered with

green belt and its amounts to about 33% of total area. Plantations will also be

provided along the internal & external roads and also around factory buildings.

The plantations will be watered regularly . wherever possible, treated waste water is

used. Regular monitoring of the plants is carried out to record mortality rate, growth

rate, overall appearance , symptoms of disease, etc.

4.11 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH CARESafety officer will be appointed in the industry. He will co-ordinate and manage

occupational health management. A medical facility with qualified doctor and clinical

facilities will be created in the industry to meet the factory and residential colony

requirement of the health services. Higher medical services shall be availed from the

hospitals present in H.B. Halli and Hospet. Health care aspects to be practiced in the

industry are indicated bellow.

4.11.1 MEDICAL FACILITIESM/s SLR limited has occupation health center to provide following medical services to

the employees

Health and safety related displays will be exhibited at strategic locations

in the industry.

Page 216: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

191

Workers are educated workers on health, hygiene and safety and

trained in occupational health safety.

General treatment and advice to the employee.

Maintenance of Medicines.

Spirometry, Pulse-oxyeometry, X-rays and other routine and specific

tests will be conducted and submitted to authorities.

First aid facilities will be provided at different locations. Further first

aiders will be trained from refuted training institute.

Workers are trained to assist emergency management in case of any

such incidences

House keeping in the industry and sanitation in utility rooms, canteen.

Rest rooms and other places will be given top priority.

House Keeping Training will be imparted to 10 workers and 5

supervisors from refuted management institute.

The workers exposed to noisy equipment shall be provided with ear

muffs. If necessary, the duty hours will be rotated, so that noise exposure time

is kept within specified limits.

Regular health check up of the workers will be carried out and health

records of individual workers in form No.16 as per factory Act will be

maintained. Each worker will have a baseline medical check up at the time of

joining followed by annual medical check up.

Maintaining hygienic conditions in areas like canteen, drinking water

sources and toilets.

Keeping all dedusting systems of the plant in good working order.

The coke oven roof courses will be provided with insulation materials.

As specified by MOEF, the Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) study will be

conducted for the workers.

4.11.2. CLEAN TECHNOLOGYClean Technology will be adopted in the industry to achieve highest performance in

production, energy and environment. Good housekeeping is practiced in the industry.

Prime importance is given for safety and occupational health. Energy audit is also

under implementation. An effective monitoring programme as discussed in Chapter-

10 followed in the industry.

Page 217: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

192

4.11.3. PLANT OPERATION

Regular inspection and maintenance of pollution control plants

Regular cleaning of dusts from floor, roads and other lplaces.

Heat insulation of hot surfaces

Wherever necessary, personnel protective appliances will be used by

the workers.

Availability of spray water system for moistening the coal yard/dump.

All pollution control and dust suppression systems shall be interlocked

with operation of process equipment or are run along with process

equipment

4.11.4. HOUSE KEEPINGGood housekeeping is a must to maintain proper working conditions. The following

housekeeping measures will be implemented in the industry.

Regular cleaning of plant roads.

Regular cleaning of shop floors and flat roofs with trolley/truck mounted

type vacuum cleaners.

Regular wetting of roads with water.

Keeping all dedusting systems of the coke oven in good working order.

Keeping ventilation systems in good working order to avoid accumulation

of dust on equipment inside the room. The air filters will be regularly

cleaned as per the manufacturer's instructions.

Maintaining adequate green belts inside and along the plant for not only

suppression of noise and pollutant transportation but also for better

aesthetics.

Proper control of fugitive dust from sources inside coke oven plant

including open stock piles by spraying water.

4.12 TRAFFIC DENSITY AND ITS IMPACT ON ENVIRONMENTAfter expansion of the project the transportation of material to and from industry will

be enhanced. Expansion is basically a production of down stream or associated

products with out the use of additional ore or other raw materials. Earlier coke was

imported and used in the blast furnace. In the proposed plant coke is manufactured

Page 218: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

193

from coking coal. Hence, Coal will be procured to the industry instead of Coke.

Additional low grade coal is also procured for use in producer gas plant and other

furnaces. Liquid fuels needed in heating furnace are procured from refineries located

in Mangalore. In the present plant pig iron is manufactured and sent to the

consumers through lorry transport. After expansion, instead of pig iron rolled and

casted steel products will be sent to the consumers through lorry transport. Hence,

the quantity of product transported from the industry will be nearly same even after

expansion of the project.

The materials from and to the site are transported mainly through lorry vehicles.

These vehicals move mainly through Hospet-Harihar State high way and

Chitradurga-Solapur national high way (NH-13). These high ways consists of 4/6

lines and well developed. The traffic density on this road is much less than its

allowable limits. The existing traffic and additional traffic due to expansion are given

below.

4.12.1 TRAFFIC SURVEYTraffic survey is the study of flow of traffic/vehicles, designing and operating traffic

system to achieve safe and efficient movement of vehicles, persons and goods.

Traffic studies are carried out to analyse the traffic characteristics. These surveys are

conducted to assess the impact of traffic with reference to road safety and carrying

capacity of roads. This will help to in deciding the geometric design feature and

traffic control for safe and efficient traffic movements. The density of vehicles on the

road is given in Table-4.14.

Passenger Car Unit ( PCU)PCU different classes of vehicles such as cars, vans, buses, trucks, auto rickshaws,

motor cycles, pedal cycles, bullock carts, etc are found to use the common road way

facilities without segregation on most of the roads in developing countries like India.

The flow of traffic with unrestricted mixing of different vehicle classes on the road

ways forms the heterogeneous traffic flow or the mixed traffic flow. It is a common

practice to consider the passenger car as the standard vehicle unit to convert the

other vehicle classes and this unit is called as Passenger Car Unit or PCU. Thus in

mixed traffic flow, the traffic volume and capacity are generally expressed as PCU

per hour or PCU/lane/hour and the traffic density as PCU per km length of lane.

Recommended PCU units for the practiced purposes are given below.

Page 219: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

194

Types of vehicles Equivalent PCUPassenger car 1.00

Motorcycle 0.33Light van 1.25

Medium Lorry 1.75Heavy Lorry 2.25

Bus 2.25Trailer 2.25

3-Wheeler 0.55

Data of Traffic Survey on Chitradurga-Solapur HighWay

Date Time Twowheeler

Threewheelers

Lightvehicles

Heavyvehicles

Total

26.12.2013 08AM to10AM

322 52 207 102683

26.12.2013 11AM to01PM

229 61 240 177707

26.12.2013 02PM to04PM

160 45 260 196661

26.12.2013 05PM to07PM

296 49 296 208849

Total 1007 207 1003 683 2990Total in P.C.U. 538 114 1134 176208.01.2014 08AM to

10AM311 48 225 120

70408.01.2014 11AM to

01PM289 69 248 147

75308.01.2014 02PM to

04PM296 43 266 194

79908.01.2014 05PM to

07PM315 51 236 165

767Total 1211 211 975 626 3023

Total in P.C.U. 532 116 1375 184705.02.2014 08AM to

10AM336 58 216 199

80905.02.2014 11AM to

01PM291 57 258 171

77705.02.2014 02PM to

04PM306 47 249 198

80005.02.2014 05PM to

07PM328 44 231 213

816Total 1261 206 954 781 3202

Total in P.C.U. 548 68 1354 1757

Page 220: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

195

4.12.2. TRANSPORTATION DUE TO THE PROPOSED PROJECT4.12.2.1 PERSONNELA maximum of 300 persons will be engaged in construction works. Construction

period is about 3 months. They use company vehicle facilities, public transportation

and own vehicles.

During operation a maximum of about 450 persons (inclusive of employees and

visitors) are attending the industry. A total of about 8 visits by buses, 40 visits by four

wheelers and about 60 visits by two wheelers will made to the industry for

transportation of personnel.

4.12.2.2. MATERIALA maximum of construction material including gravel, sand, stone, steel, bricks and

other construction material & machinery etc. transported per day will be about 40.

During operation, additional transportation of goods will be relatively as explained in

section 7.1. Additional transportation of goods will be about 40 lorry transports per

day. Additional traffic due to the proposed expansion project is given below.

Addition of Traffic Due To the Proposed Expansion Project

Traffic VehicleDaily max.

Hourly max

Two wheelers 40 8

Light vehicles (CPU) 60 10

Heavy vehicles 48 6

4.12.3. IMPACTSThe transportation density on the road is likely to increases by about 5 %. The road is

a major double/four line road and has adequate capacity to take the additional

vehicular load.

Lorries carrying solid material will be covered with tarpaulin. Road side tree plantation

is already present. The industry will take measures to plant additional plantation on

road sides. Bell mouth shape geometry will be provided at entry and exit gates.

Considering the facilities as above the impact of additional transportation on road will

be insignificant.

Page 221: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

196

4.13 CHARTER ON CORPORATE RESPONSIBILITY FOR ENVIRONMENTALPROTECTION (CREP) (Evolved by CPCB, MOEF-2003 for 17 Categories ofIndustries)

CREP Norms applicable to integrated steel industries is given in Annexure—8

Compliance to CREP norms by the present Integrated Steel Industry consisting of

existing Blast furnace and Sinter plant and the proposed Steel plant, Rolling mill and

Non recovery type Coke oven plant are given below.

4.13.1. COKE OVEN PLANTSThe proposed non recovery type coke oven plant will be designed to meet the notified

standards under EPA for the parameters PLD ( % leaking doors), PLL ( % leaking

lids), PLO ( % leaking off take).

4.13.2. STEEL MELT FURNACEFugitive emissions will be completely removed in the proposed SMS by installation of

secondary de-dusting facilities including collection hood, ID fan, Bag filter, duct and

stack.

4.14.3. BLAST FURNACEThe existing blast furnace is incorporated with direct injection of reducing agents.

4.13.4. Solid Waste / Hazardous Waste ManagementA. Utilization of Steel Melting Shop (SMS) / Blast Furnace (BF) slagB.F. slag is completely utilized in preparation concrete mix for use in the production of

concrete blocks, concrete road and other concrete works in the industry. This is also

sent to other consumers for use in cement making, concrete block, concrete roads.

B. Hazardous WasteThe tar produced in producer gas plant will be used as fuel in the proposed coke

oven plant. The hazardous wastes such as coal tar ( 77 T/yr) from producer gasplant and used oil generated from gears, hydraulic machine and diesel engine ( 36T/yr ) are inventoried as per Hazardous Wastes (M. & H.) Rules-1989 (and asamended in 2000).

Page 222: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

197

4.13.5. Water Conservation/Water PollutionAfter proposed expansion, the total production of plat products will be 900 T/d and

the water consumption will be 4626 m3/d. This amounts to the specific water

consumption of 4.7 m3/d. This is well within the limits for long products. The water

consumption given above includes the water usage in power plant, coke oven plant,

oxygen plant and producer gas plant.

Continuous stack monitoring system with with periodic calibration has already been

installed in the existing project. Similar systems will be installed in the proposed plant.

It is proposed to implement Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) study as sponsored by

MOEF during execution of the proposed project..

The industry will adopt the following clean technologies measures in the proposedproject to improve the performance of industry towards production, energy landenvironment.

Energy recovery of top Blast Furnace (BF) gas.

Use of Tar-free runner linings.

De-dusting of cast house at tap holes, runners, skimmers ladle and charging

points.

Suppression of fugitive emissions using nitrogen gas or other inert gas.

To study the possibility of slag and fly ash transportation back to the

abandoned mines, to the abandoned mines, to fill up the cavities through empty

railway wagons while they return back to the mines and its implementation.

Processing of the waste containing flux and ferrous wastes through waste

recycling plant.

To implement rainwater harvesting.

Reduction Green House Gasses by:

- Reduction in power consumption.

- Use of by-products gases for power generation.

- Promotion of energy Optimization technology including energy/audit.

To set targets for Resources conservation such as Raw material, energy and

water consumption to match international standards.

Up gradation in the monitoring and analysis facilities for air and water pollution.

Also to impart elaborate training to the manpower so that realistic data is obtained

in the environmental monitoring laboratories.

To improve overall house keeping.

Page 223: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

198

4.14 FEASIBILITY OF CARBON CREDIT SCHEME FOR THE PROJECTThe 6 MW power plant based on B.F gas in the existing project and the 9 MW power

plant based on coke oven off-gas in the proposed project will come under Clean

Development Mechanism (CDM) and therefore eligible for carbon credit. The

management has approached qualified consultants to conduct study and prepare

documents for CDM rating to the industry. The CDM project will be implemented

along with the execution of the proposed project.

Page 224: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT
Page 225: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

CHAPTER -5

ANALYSIS OFALTERNATIVES

Page 226: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT
Page 227: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

199

CHAPTER-5

ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES(TECHNOLOGY AND SITE)

5.1 SITING OF PROJECTM/s. SLR Metaliks Ltd. Has already established and operating an Iron making plant

at Narayanadevarakere village, Hagaribommanahalli Taluk, Bellary District,

Karnataka State to manufacture pig iron along with sinter product as input to pig iron

unit and blast furnace off-gas based power plant. All the units are fully operational

and running successfully. Now, the company propose to improve viability of the

existing project by the addition of facilities for the production of value added

downstream products with ready market opportunity such as alloy steel, rolled steel

products, metallurgical coke, coke oven gas based power plant, producer gas plant,

pulverized coal injection and oxygen plant in the existing Iron industry. Hence, the

location of the proposed project has necessarily to be at or adjacent to the existing

Iron industrial complex and therefore alternative sites are not considered.

The technology adopted will be more advanced with respect to resource consumption

and environmental sustainability.

5.1.1 ENVIRONMENTAL GUIDELINES

Setting restrictions for the project depend on the sensitivity of the surrounding

environment. Sensitivity of the project site should be assessed in relation to its

proximity to the ecologically sensitive places. As per MoEF guidelines, following

aspects are to be considered while selecting the site

i.Land procured should be minimum but sufficient to provide greenbelt. If

treated effluent is to be utilized for irrigation, additional agricultural land is to be

made available.

ii.Enough space for storing solid waste.

iii.Layout and form of the project must confirm to the landscape of the area

without affecting the existing scenic features.

iv. If associated township of the project is to be created, it must provide

space for phyto-graphic barrier between project and township and also should

take into account of wind direction.

v.The site should not be in migration route.

Page 228: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

200

vi. It should not interfere with the natural water course.vii. Forest, agriculture and fertile and other specified lands to be avoided.

viii. The following distances maintained between the project and specified

location

Estuaries: 200 m

Flood plains of riverine systems: 500 m

Highways and Railways: 500 m

Streams and rivers used for drinking water supply: 1500 m

Ecological and/or otherwise sensitive areas: 15 km

5.1.2 GENERAL CRITERION FOR SELECTION OF LOCATIONThe general criterion for site selection is:

Accessibility for easy disposal of effluents.

Proximity to availability of perennial water supply, raw materials, skilled and

unskilled manpower.

Access to power supply from KPTCL/ own captive generation.

Further important details to be checked up about the site are:

Soil conditions

Contour survey

Rainfall in the area

Ground water resources / potential

Weather conditions, maximum and minimum temperature, humidity etc.

Seismographic soundness of the place.

5.1.3 SITE REQUIREMENT AND PROPOSED LOCATIONThe Company has obtained environmental clearance from MOEF, GOI, New Delhi

and CFO from KSPCB Bangalore for the existing project. The proposed project is

expansion of the existing industry and therefore no alternate sites are considered.

The proposed project is to be located East side of the existing industrial premises. 90

acres of land is already allocated by KIADB for the proposed expansion project and

another 100 acres is under process through KIADB. Expansion is proposed in the

additionally procured land for the proposed plants.

Page 229: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

201

5.1.3.1 AVAILABILITY OF RAW MATERIAL/FUEL

Fluxes and additives will be purchased from local market

Metallurgical Coke –will be imported/ procured from Indian Sources. Scrap,billets, blooms, DRI will be purchased from nearby pig iron plant& steel plants.

5.1.3.2. AVAILABILITY OF WATER SUPPLYThe industry has obtained permission to draw water from the Tungabhadra river

back water source. A water reservoir of about 8 months capacity is provided and this

is filled up during river flood period. The availability of water from the source is found

to be adequate to meet the requirement of the industry.

5.1.3.3. EFFLUENT DISPOSALThe effluent generated from the steel industrial complex will be treated to standards

and the treated effluent used on land for development of greenery and green belt.

The treated effluent is also used to spray on land and roads for dust suppression.

5.1.3.4. AVAILABILITY OF INFRASTRUCTURAL FACILITYIndustrial infrastructural facilities such as roads, transport, security, water, power,

administration etc. are available at the site. Community facilities such as quarters,

medical services, education and training facility etc. are available in the vicinity of the

site.

5.2 ENVIRONMENTAL FEATURES OF SITEThe area experiences a dry climate. Summer temperature is high touching 420C.

There are no eco-sensitive locations such as bio-sphere, mangrove, protected forest,

National parks etc. or environmental sensitive locations such as protected

monuments, historical places within 25 km from the site. However, Tungabhadra river

is at 5 km and back water of Tungabhadra dam is at 600-700 m from the site. The

industry has taken protective measures as per MOEF guide lines to avoid adverse

environmental consequence of the project activities on river or dam.

Page 230: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

202

5.3 TECHNOLOGY/ PROCESS

The process selection is done based on the following considerations:

i.Least stress on resources including raw materials and utilities

ii.Reduce, Recycle and Reuse of wastes

iii.Least or no pollution from the industry

iv.Least or no risk to human and property

v.Least or no adverse impacts on environment

The technology options for the proposed plant were considered based on efficient

utilization of raw materials, fuel, power and water.

5.4 NO PROJECT OPTION

No project option is considered mainly with respect to:

i. Utilization of natural resources

ii. Environmental impacts, harmful or beneficial

iii. Benefits of the industry to the society

The project is proposed mainly for the purpose of best utilization of existing

infrastructural facilities including land, water, manpower, roads etc. The expansion

project does not involve any additional ore. The project is mainly for value added

products such as steel and rolled products utilizing already available B.F iron. Coke

will be produced to meet the its requirement in the existing Blast furnace plant.

Oxygen and nitrogen requirement to the steel plant will be met from the proposed air

separation unit. Power plant is based on waste heat available in coke oven off-gas.

The proposed project will not cause depletion of natural resources or the significant

adverse impacts on environment. On the contrary, it will produce value added

products of national importance resources such as steel with low resource utilization.

Hence, “No Project Option” is not considered.

Page 231: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

CHAPTER -6

ENVIRONMENTMONITORING PROGRAM

Page 232: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT
Page 233: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

203

CHAPTER – 6ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM

6.1 INTRODUCTIONThe Environmental Management Plan as presented in the previous sections for

various components of the environment needs to be monitored for its effectiveness.

Regular monitoring of environmental parameters is of immense importance to assess

the status of environment during project operations. With the knowledge of baseline

conditions, the monitoring programmed will serve as an indicator for any deterioration

in environmental conditions due to operation of the project, to enable taking up

suiTable mitigation steps in time to safeguard the environment. Monitoring is as

important as that of control of pollution since the efficiency of control measures can

be determined by monitoring.

6.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND REPORTING PROCEDUREM/s SLR Metaliks Ltd has set up Environmental Monitoring Cell (EMC) to review the

effectiveness of environment management system during construction and

operational phase of proposed integrated steel and other associated facilities. EMC

will work out a schedule for monitoring and will meet regularly to review the

effectiveness of the EMP implementation. The data collected on various EMP

measures would be reviewed by EMC and if needed corrective action will be

formulated for implementation.

Monitoring shall confirm that commitments are being met. This may take the form of

direct measurement and recording of quantitative information, such as amounts and

concentrations of discharges, emissions and wastes, for measurement against

corporate or statutory standards, consent limits or targets. It may also require

measurement of ambient environmental quality in the vicinity of a site using

ecological / biological, Physical and chemical indicators. Monitoring may include

socio-economic interaction, through local liaison activities or even assessment of

complaints.

The preventive approach to management may also require monitoring of process

inputs, for example, type and stocks of chemical use, resource consumption,

equipment and plant performance etc.

The key aims of monitoring are, first, to ensure that results/conditions are as forecast

during the planning stage, and where they are not, to pinpoint the cause and

Page 234: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

204

implement action to remedy the situation. A second objective is to verify the

evaluations made during the planning process, in particular in risk and impact

assessments and standard and target setting and to measure operational and

process efficiency. Monitoring will also be required to meet compliance with statutory

and corporate requirements.

6.3 OBJECTIVES OF MONITORINGThe Objectives of monitoring are:

Verify effectiveness of planning decisions.

Measure effectiveness of operational procedures.

Confirm statutory and corporate compliance.

Identify unexpected changes.

6.4 MONITORING METHODS AND DATA ANALYSISAll environmental monitoring and relevant operational data will be stored in a

relational database and linked MIS system. This will enable efficient retrieval and

storage and interpretation of the data. Regular data extracts and interpretive reports

will be sent to the regulator.

6.4.1 AIR QUALITY MONITORING6.4.1.1 STACK MONITORINGThe emissions from all the stacks will be monitored regularly. The exit gas

temperature, velocity and pollutant concentrations will be measured. Any

unaccepTable deviation from the design values will be thoroughly examined and

appropriate action will be taken. Air blowers will be checked for any drop in exit gas

velocity.

6.4.1.2 WORK ZONE MONITORINGThe concentration of air borne pollutants in the workspace / work zone environment

will be monitored periodically. If concentrations higher than threshold limit values are

observed, the source of fugitive emissions will be identified and necessary measures

may be taken. Methane and non-methane hydrocarbons shall be monitored in work

zone. If the levels are high suiTable measures as detailed in EMP shall be initiated.

Page 235: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

205

6.4.1.3 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORINGThe ambient concentrations of SPM, SO2, NOX, CO and HC in the ambient air will be

monitored at regular intervals. Any abnormal rise will be investigated to identify the

causes, and appropriate action will be initiated. Green belt shall be developed for

minimizing dust propagation. The ambient air quality data should be transferred and

processed in a centralized computer facility equipped with required software. Trend

and statistical analysis should be done.

6.4.2 NOISE LEVELSNoise levels in the work zone environment such as storage terminal, power

generating locations, etc. shall be monitored. The frequency shall be once in three

months in the work zone. Similarly, ambient noise levels near habitations shall also

be monitored once in three months. Audiometric tests should be conducted

periodically for the employees working close to the high noise sources.

6. 4.3 WATER AND WASTEWATER QUALITY MONITORINGTo ensure a strict control over the water consumption, flow meters shall be installed

for all major inlets. All leakages and excess shall be identified and rectified. In

addition, periodic water audits will be conducted to explore further possibilities for

water conservation.

Methods prescribed in “Standard Methods for Examination of water and Wastewater”

prepared and published jointly by American Public Health Association (APHA),

American Water Works Association (AWWA) and Water Pollution Control Federation

(WPCF); Manual on water and wastewater Analysis published by NEERI, Nagpur are

recommended.

6.4.3.1 MONITORING OF WASTEWATERAll the Wastewater streams in the project area shall be regularly monitored for flow

rate and physical and chemical characteristics. Such analysis is carried out for

wastewater at the source of generation, at the point of influent into the wastewater

treatment plant and at the effluent point for final discharge / injection into deep

ground. These data are properly documented and compared against the design

values for any necessary corrective action.

Page 236: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

206

6.4.3.2 MONITORING OF GROUNDWATERIn order to detect any contamination of the groundwater due to leakage from any

storage tanks and other associated activities, groundwater samples shall be taken

from representative locations periodically and analyzed for necessary corrective

actions, if any.

6.4.4 LAND ENVIRONMENTThe following parameters should be monitored for land environment.

The effectiveness and constant strengthening of green belt development

should be made in and around the project site and associated facilities.

6.4.5 BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT

Development of green belt with carefully selected plant species is of prime

importance due to their capacity to reduce air and noise pollution impacts by

attenuation / assimilation and for providing food and habitat for local micro and

macro fauna. This not only overcomes the problem but also enhances the beauty

of area that will attract bird and insect species and by this way ecology of the area

will maintain to great extent.

The planting of evergreen species may have certain advantages that may

reduce the environmental pollution.

Survival rate of the planted trees should be closely monitored and the trees

which not survive should be counted. Equal number of trees should be replaced

and their survival should be replaced and their survival should be closely

monitored.

Treated sewage and effluent in the best combination should be used for green

belt development. The rain water harvesting should be done. Water scarcity

should not be the reason for not expanding and strengthening green belt.

6.4.6 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT

In order to mitigate the impacts likely to arise out of the proposed project and

also to maintain goodwill of local people for the proposed project, it is necessary

to take steps for improving the social environment. Necessary social welfare

measures by the industry shall be useful in gaining public confidence depending

on local requirement.

Page 237: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

207

Some basic amenities, viz. education, safe drinking water supply, regular

medical check up in the villages may be taken up.

Formal and informal training to be provided to the employees of the effected

villages due to the project shall be taken up on priority basis. Job oriented skill

training, courses may be organized.

Personal protective facilities like helmets, safety (gas) mask / safety dress,

shoes etc. to be ensured for all workers, engaged in operation of process units

within terminal complex.

6.5 REPORTING SCHEDULES OF THE MONITORING DATAIt is proposed that voluntary reporting of environmental performance with reference to

the EMP should be undertaken. The environmental monitoring cell shall co-ordinate

all monitoring programmers at site and data thus generated shall be regularly

furnished to the state regulatory agencies. The frequency of reporting shall be on six

monthly basis to the local SPCB officials and to regional office of MoEF. The

Environmental Audit reports shall be prepared for the entire year of operations and

shall be regularly submitted to regulatory authorities. The frequency of monitoring and

the parameters to be analysis etc. is presented in Table- 6.1

6.6 INFRASTRUCTURE FOR MONITORING OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTIONMEASURESMonitoring of environmental components during operation phase is a part and parcel

of the environmental mitigation measures. Only frequent monitoring can assess the

functioning and efficiency of all pollution control equipment. Thus the project

proponent has to establish a separate full-fledged environmental laboratory to

monitor air, water, noise level in the plant. Monitoring activity is mainly envisaged for

stack emission, raw water quality, treated effluent quality to analyze the performance

of effluent treatment plant, noise level in the working areas. SLR Metaliks Ltd has

already established and managed environmental monitoring plan. This will be suitably

improved to include the additional scope defined due to the expansion project.

A well-equipped laboratory with consumable items shall be provided for monitoring of

environmental parameters in the site. Alternatively, monitoring can be outsourced to a

recognized reputed laboratory. The following equipment and consumable items shall

be made available in the site for environmental monitoring.

Page 238: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

208

AIR QUALITY AND METEOROLOGYHigh volume samplers, Stack monitoring kit, Respirable Dust sampler, Central

Weather Monitoring Station, Spectrophotometer (Visible range), Single pan balance,

Flame photometer, Relevant chemicals as per IS:5182.

WATER AND WASTEWATER QUALITYThe sampling shall be done as per the standard procedures laid down by IS:2488.

The equipments and consumables required are:

BOD incubator, COD reflex set-up, Refrigerator, Oven, Stop watch, Thermometer, pH

meter, Distilled water plant, pipette sets, Titration set, Dissolved Oxygen Analyzer,

Relevant chemicals.

NOISE LEVELSNoise monitoring shall be done utilizing an integrating sound level meter to record

noise levels in different scales like A-weighting with slow and fast response options.

6.7 SAMPLING SCHEDULE AND LOCATIONS

Systematic monitoring of various environmental parameters is to be carried out on

regular basis to ascertain the following

i. Pollution status within the plant and in its vicinity.

ii. Generate data for predictive or corrective purpose in respect of pollution.

iii. Effectiveness of pollution control measures and control facilities.

iv. To assess environmental impacts.

v. To follow the trend of parameters which have been identified as critical;

The environmental quality monitoring program shall be carried out in the impact

zones with suiTable sampling stations and frequency for the parameters identified.

For conventional pollutants the methods prescribed in “Standard methods for Water

and Wastewater Analysis” published by APHA, AWWA & WPCF should be strictly

adhered. Environmental monitoring schedules are prepared covering various phases

of project advancement, such as constructional phase & regular operational phase.

Post Project Monitoring Plan with environmental attributes and schedule of

monitoring is given in Table 6.1.

Page 239: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

209

Table-6.1 Post Project Monitoring Schedule

Sl.No. Particulars Location Frequency &

DurationParameters

1 Metereology 1 No. at site

Continuoususing autoweatherstation

Max. & Min.Temp., Rain

Fall, Rel.Humidity, Atm.Pr., Wind Dir. &

Speed,2 AIR QUALITY

2.1 Ambient air quality

2 no.s downwinddirection and oneeach in upward andcrosswind direction.

24 hr., 2consecutiveworking daysa week, ,

PM, SO2, NOX,CO, HC

2.2 Stack emission Sampling port ofStack

Once aMonth

PM, SO2, NOX ,CO, HC (nonmethane),Temp. Velocity,Temp.

2.3 Fugitive emissionsAt specified locations( crusher, screen,loading, unloading)

Once aMonth

SPM

3 WATER QUALITY

3.1 Ground water 6 Locations Monthly Physico-chemical,

3.2Ground water nearsolid storage area Specified Locations Quarterly

Physico-chemical withheavy metals,

3.3 Surface water 2 location at eachsource

MonthlyPhysic-chemical, Org.,Bacteriologic.

3.4Surface water(susceptible tocontamination)

At each source Quarterly

Physic-chemical, Org.,Bacteriologic.& heavy metals

6 Effluent water At inlet and out let ofETP Daily

Physic-chemical, Org.& heavy metalsand asspecified byKSPCB

5 Soil 6 Locations at &around premise

Pre & postmonsoon

Physic-chemical, Org.

Page 240: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

210

& heavy metals

7Noise level, workzone(hourly)

12 specifiedlocations (Crusher,screen, Turbinehouse, At fans &compressors, Rollingmill.)

Once amonth

Day & Nightnoise level

8 Water utilization,m3/d

For process,domestic, coolingand boiler

Dailym3

9 Power utilizationFor air pollutioncontrol facility (ESP)and for ETP

DailyKWH

10 Health Check All plant personnel Yearly As specified byauthorities

11 Traffic density

12 Socio-economicstatus

13 Ecological Green belt Seasonal Survival rate

6.8 COMPLIANCES TO ENVIRONMENTAL STATUTESThis industry is law-abiding and the Environmental Statutes are proposed to be

complied with letter and spirit.

1) Carrying out “Environmental Audit Statement” of various environmental

aspects, review the environmental policies with the help of experts and make the

up gradation /changes accordingly.

2) Submission of the “Environmental Statement” to the State Pollution Control

Board in Form V under Rule 14 of the Environment (Protection) Second

Amendment Rules 1992 of the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986.

3) Renewal of Consent to Operate under the Water and Air Acts.

4) Filing the Cess returns to the State PCB under the Water (Prevention and

Control of Pollution) Cess Act, 1977.

5) Renewal of the Hazardous Waste Authorization under sub-rule 3 of the

Hazardous Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 1989.

Page 241: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

211

6.9 MONITORING OF COMPLIANCES TO STATUTORY CONDITIONSEnvironmental clearance from KSPCB and MOEF is always accompanied by the

specified terms and conditions. Necessary measures are taken to comply with these

conditions. Environmental Cell and the associated staff will monitor the compliances

regularly.

6.10 FINANCIAL ALLOCATION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL ASPECTS

Table-6.2 Financial Allocation/Budgetary Provisions for EnvironmentalManagement Aspects

Sl.No. Particulars

Amount,Rs. in Lakhs

1

Capital Investment on EMP facilities

3174.00

Air pollution controlWater pollution controlLaboratory and monitoringGreen belt & greenery development, rain waterharvesting, landscape development, health chekup ofemployees and contractorsEnvironment awareness programs 200.00

Total EMP cost 3374.00

2

Recurring Cost of Operation and Maintenance

318.00

Air pollution controlWater pollution controlGreenery, water harvesting and land scapemaintenanceLaboratory & Monitoring of Environmental Quality

Total recurring cost 318.00

6.11 SUCCESS INDICATORSThe success of the sincere and honest efforts put in, will be judged by various

indicators, such as –

1. No complaint from the villagers regarding transfer of lands.2. No complaint f rom the customers regarding quality of product and deliveryschedule.3. No complaints from Government or Non-Government Authorities and Public.4. Statistics of Health, Safety and Environment maintained.5. Other Promoters come to seek our advice.

Demonstration to others for rainwater harvesting, environmental status report,

environmental statements (annually), cess returns (monthly), groundwater

recharging, sand-substitute ash, plastic-free packing, care for disabled etc.

Page 242: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT
Page 243: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

CHAPTER -7

ADDITIONAL STUDIES

Page 244: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT
Page 245: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

212

CHAPTER 7

ADDITIONAL STUDIES

7.1 PUBLIC HEARING AND CONSULTATION

M/s SLR Metaliks Ltd are presently, operating an iron making industry consisting of

one 262 cubic meter capacity Blast Furnace with 2, 00 ,000 TPA.pig iron production

along with a 33 m2 Sinter Plant with 3,31,000TPA. Surplus Blast Furnace Gas is

being utilized to produce 6 MW of electrical power. The industry is located at

Narayanadevarakere village, Hagaribommanahalli Taluk, Bellary District, Karnataka

State. All the units are fully operational. The plant at present produces pig iron for use

in steel making and foundries.

M/s SLR Metaliks propose to improve viability of the existing project by the addition of

facilities for the production of value added downstream products with ready market

opportunity such as alloy steel, rolled steel products, metallurgical coke, coke oven

gas based power producer gas plant pulverized coal injection and oxygen in the

existing steel industry.Expert Appraisal Committee(Industry), MOEF, GOI, New Delhi during their meeting

held during 28-30th November, 2013 has specified TOR and scoping for EIA studies

and preparation of EIA report (vide F.No.J-11011/257/2013-IA-II(I)) . Further, they

have advised the company to approach KSPCB along with Draft EIA Report for

conduct of Public Hearing. Accordingly, the company has conducted EIA studies

and draft EIA report prepared and approached KSPCB, Bangalore with a request to

arrange the Public Hearing.

The Company will participate in the public hearing and make presentation of the

proposed project. The observations made by the public will be attended and

incorporating the same final EIA Report will be prepared for submission to MOEF

GOI New Delhi.

7.2 RISK ASSESSMENT

7.2.1 PURPOSE

An industry with its complex nature of activities involving various plant machineries,

raw materials, products, operations, intermediates and environmental discharge has

a number of associated hazards. A minor failure can lead to major failure resulting

into a disaster causing heavy losses to life, property and environment. Risk

Page 246: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

213

assessment studies are being conducted to ensure safety and reliability of any new

plant, through systematic and scientific methods to identify possible failures and

prevent their occurrences before they actually cause disasters and production loss.

7.2.2 OBJECTIVESThe distillery involves storage and handling of large quantity of ethanol which is

flammable and explosive under unfavorable situations. To ensure safe operation of

the plant, it is proposed to carry out the Risk Analysis Study with the following

objectives

1. To identify the major hazards relating to fire, explosion and toxicity due

to storage and handling of hazardous chemicals.

2. To visualize maximum credible accident scenarios

3. To analyze and quantify primary and secondary effects and damage

potentials of the identified maximum credible accident scenarios using

standard procedure.

4. To study the nature of exposures, pathways and consequences of

maximum credible accident scenarios and characteristics of risk levels.

5. To provide guidelines for disaster management plan.

Risk assessment studies have been carried out to assess the worst case scenarios of

the plant operations to formulate an emergency management plan.

7.3 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN (DMP)A comprehensive DMP that will be implemented in the industry as presented below.

7.3.1 OBJECTIVES• To localize the emergency

• To minimize the consequences

• To ensure that following concepts are considered, namely rescue, first aid,

evacuation, rehabilitation, spreading the information.

7.3.2 ELEMENTS OF ON-SITE EMERGENCY PLAN• Assess the size of event

• Plan formulation and liason

• Actions like: Raise alarm, communication within and outside

Page 247: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

214

• Appoint key personnel and deploy. Appoint Controller.

• Emergency Control Center

• Action on site

• Action off-site.

• Alarm and visual signals at strategic points, first alert sent to

Incidence Controller.

7.3.3 ORGANIZATIONTable-7.1 Organization Chart

Chief Controller of Disasters (Factory General Manager)

Team-1 Team-2 Team-3 Team-4 Team-5 Team-6

AreaCo-Ordinator

MedicalCo-Ordinator

MaterialCo-Ordinator

Fire-SafetyCo-Ordinator

PRCo-Odinator

SecurityCo-Ordinator

plantManager

ChiefChemist

CivilEngineer

Power plantManager

HRManager

SecurityOfficer

7.3.4 DUTY ALLOCATION1. CHIEF DISASTER CONTROLLER (CHIEF OPERATING OFFICER)

• Take control and declare emergency

• Be there

• Contact Authorities

2. AREA CO-ORDINATOR• Take steps. Make emergency shut-down of activities. Put everything

in safe condition.

• Evacuate.

• Commence initial fire-Figurehting, till Fire Department comes to take

up.

• Identify materials requirements and call Material Manager.

3. MEDICAL CO-ORDINATOR• Establish Emergency Center, Treat affected persons, Transfer/Remove

Patients

• Assign and Deploy staff

• Contact Authorities

Page 248: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

215

4. MATERIAL CO-ORDINATOR• Dispatch necessary supplies

• Arrange purchases

5. FIRE & SAFETY CO-ORDINATOR• Overall incharge for Fire and Safety.

• Coordinate with area coordinator and direct the operations

• Cordinate with City and other fire-tenderers.

6. PR & SECURITY CO-ORDINATOR• Remove crowd

• Arrange gate security

• Contact Police

• Arrange evacuation

• Contact outside Agencies if asked.

• Handle news media

• Mobilize vehicles

• Arrange food, clothing to Officers inside.

7. EMERGENCY CONTROL CENTER• Adequate Internal phones

• Adequate external phones

• Workers tally

• Map showing hazardous storages, fire horns, safety equipments, gates

and side gates, assembly points, list of persons.

8. ACTION ON SITE• Evacuate. Non-essential people first at assembly point

• Persons accounting

• Record of next-of-kin

• Public relations

9. POST DISASTER ANALYSIS• Why it happened?

• Whether on-site operations failed? In what respect?

• How to avoid such failure in future?

Page 249: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

216

• Report to be submitted in detail to Authorities.

• Compensation arrangements if any, commenced?

• Call suggestions on shortfalls observed.

• Give rewards openly, pull defaulters individually.

7.4 INDUSTRIAL HAZARDS AND SAFETYMaintenance of occupational safety and health is very closely related to productivity

and good employer-employee relationship. The plant will be operated in compliance

with all applicable safety and health laws and regulations. For occupational safety

following measures will be incorporated in the proposed plant.

7.4.1 HAZARD IDENTIFICATIONSafety Audit will be conducted by qualified technical personnel to study the

installation and activities of the industry and to suggest measures to protect

personnel and property against the risks. The areas of possible hazardous incident

are given for follow up action:

i.Fire in coal & coke storage yard, and diesel storage tanks.

ii.Electric Short circuit and consequent fire accident.

iii.Any likely sort of explosion in Boiler area

iv.Puncture of Boiler tubes.

v.Bursting of pipeline joints.

vi.Fall from high level structures

I. FIRE IN COAL & COKE STORAGE YARD & DIESEL STORAGE TANKThis may occur on account of external cause. Both coal & coke have very high flash

point and do not catch fire at normal temperatures. Coal/Coke fires are slow

progressive in nature and are controlled by simply by spraying plenty of water .

II. SHORT CIRCUIT AND CONSEQUENT FIRE ACCIDENTThe electrical short circuit may happen in any of the plant area due to poor insulation

of the equipments.

III. EXPLOSION HAZARDExplosion is expected due to bursting of high pressure equipments like boiler, turbine

and pipe lines. The water required for Boiler is pumped and transferred to the boiler

Page 250: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

217

by using high-pressure pumps. Also the high-pressure steam generated in the boiler

is sent to the turbine through the pipeline. This pipeline will have flanged joints, with

sandwich gaskets in between for better sealing. At times, due to water hammering

this gasket fails and leads to bursting of the flange joint.

7.4.2 FIRE FIGUREHTING FACILITIESa. Water hydrant system

Fire hydrant system with hose pipe of 7 kg/cm2 pressure with hydrants are located at

in coke & coal storage yard and near diesel storage tank

A jockey pump and accessories. 50 m3/hr at 90 m head

Corrosion protected M.S. underground piping 150 mm dia. and 100

mm all around the plant as closed loop

8 nos. single headed hydrants distributed around the plant at about 30

m spacing to supply pressurized water for fire Figurehting.

10 nos. M.S. hydrant nose cabinet adjacent to each cabinet.

b. Fire extinguishers

Foam water : 2 each at main office and store.

CO2 type : 6 nos. one each at departmental office

and electrical installations.

DCP type : 8 nos. each at coke oven plant Sand buckets

: At different locations

c. Fire protective appliances

Two sets of fire safety appliances each consisting of following units are located at

store and alcohol storage, respectively.

Face masks & gas masks (2),

Face shield (2),

Helmet (6),

Safety belts (2),

Safety ladder (1)

d. Fire brigade

Fire brigade facilities available at H.B Halli will be utilized whenever need arises.

Page 251: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

218

7.5 ON-SITE MANAGEMENT PLAN

The On-Site emergency plan will be circulated to all concerned members of

emergency teams. It is essential that all concerned familiarize themselves with the

overall on-site emergency plan and their respective roles and responsibilities during

and in emergency. They should also participate regularly in the mock drills that will

be conducted so as to keep themselves and the emergency organization in a state

of perpetual preparedness at all times to meet any emergency.

7.5.1 OBJECTIVES, SCOPE AND CONTENTS OF ON-SITE EMERGENCY PLAN

Objectives of Emergency Planning are to maximize the resource utilization and

combined efforts towards emergency operations and would broadly cover the

following.

1. To localize the emergency and if possible eliminate it.

2. To minimize the effects of accidents on people and property.

3. To take remedial measures in the quickest possible time to contain

the incident and control it with minimum damage.

4. To mobilize the internal resources and utilize them in the most

effective way.

5. To get help from the local community and government officials

to supplement internal manpower and resources.

6. To minimize the damage in other sections.

7. To keep the required emergency equipment in stock at right places

and ensure that they are in working condition.

8. To keep the concerned personnel fully trained in the use of

emergency equipment.

9. To give immediate warning to the surrounding localities in case of an

emergency situation arising.

10. To mobilize transport and medical treatment of the injured.

11. To educate the public in the surrounding villages regarding hazards.

12. To arrange for rescue and treatment of casualties.

13. To safe guard the people.

14. To identify the causalities and communicate to relatives.

15. To render necessary help to concerned.

16. To rehabilitate area affected.

17. To provide information to media & government agencies

Page 252: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

219

7.5.2 SCOPE OF ONSITE EMERGENCY PLANThe plan covers information regarding the properties of the Industry, type of

disasters and disaster/accident-prone zones, the actual disaster control plans

with authority delegation, controlling and other details. General details like

location, project layout, neighboring entities and the assistance they can render etc.,

are also provided.

The important elements considered in this plan are

Statutory requirements

Emergency organization

Roles and Responsibilities

Communications during emergency

Emergency shutdown & control of situation

Rescue & Rehabilitation

Emergency facilities

Important Information

The primary purpose of the on-site emergency plan or DMP is to control and

contain the incident and to prevent them from spreading. It is not possible to cover

every eventuality in the plan and the successful handling of the emergency will

depend on appropriate action and decisions being taken on the spot. Other

important aspects needing to be considered include the following.

7.6 EMERGENCY

A major emergency in any situation is one, which has the potential to cause

serious injury or loss of life, which may cause extensive damage to the structures in

the vicinity and environment and could result in serious disruption to normal

operation both inside and outside the industry premises. Depending on the

magnitude of the emergency, services of the outside agencies may also be required

for supplementing the internal effort to effectively handle the emergency and to

contain the damage.

The Management has to take effective steps to assess, minimize and wherever

feasible eliminate the risks to a large extent. Accidents may still occur and it is

necessary to be fully prepared to tackle all such emergencies if and when they

Page 253: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

220

occur.

It is likely that the consequences of such emergencies will be confined to the

units concerned or may affect outside. If the consequences are confined within the

plant boundary, it is then termed as On Site Emergency and will be controlled by

Chief Emergency Controller.

In order to generate the plans it is necessary to first determine the kinds of

accidents leading to an emergency that can occur in the industry. The most

widely used technique in practice is based on experience accumulated over many

years and safety audits.

7.6.1 METHODOLOGYThe considerations in an emergency planning include the following: -

1. Identification and assessment of hazards and risks

2. Hazard, consequence analysis

3. Alarm and communication procedures

4. Identifying, appointment of personnel & assignment of responsibilities

5. Identification and equipping Emergency control centre, Identifying Assembly,

Rescue points, Medical facilities.

6. Emergency preparedness plan, procedures, steps to be taken before,

during and after emergency.

7. Formulation of plan and emergency sources.

8. Training rehearsal, evaluation and updating the plan.

7.6.2 STRUCTURE OF EMERGENCY MANAGEMENTa. Noticing the accidents

b. Informing declarer of emergency

c. Declaration of emergency

d. Functions of declarer

e. Interaction with outside agenciesf. Emergency action plan & chart

g. Emergency action plan

h. In case of major emergency, the steps to be taken immediately by various

agencies are all follows.

Page 254: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

221

Sl.No. Step to be taken Agency

01 Noticing of emergency situation Operator / Supervisor02 Assessment of Situation Section haed03 Information to emergency Declarer HOD04 Plant siren for declaring emergency

depending on situation Emergency Declarer

05 Shutdown of equipments /Plant Shop Head06 Assessment of impact and organizing

control measure Incident / Site Controller

07 Proper function of control rooms Emergency controller08 Co-ordination with outside agencies GM – HR09 Control measures at site

(Rescue, evacuation, Fire Figurehting etc.) Incident Controller

10 Seeking help from outside, nearbyfactories.

Incident controller & safetyHead

11 All clear Signal ( After controllingemergency situation) Emergency Declarer

7.6.3 INFRASTRUCTURE AT EMERGENCY CONTROL CENTRE

Emergency control centers should therefore contain the following

An adequate number of external telephones; if possible, one should accept

only outgoing calls, in order to bypass jammed switchboards during an

emergency.

An adequate number of internal telephones

Radio equipment

A plan of the works, to show:

Areas where there are large inventories of hazardous materials.

Sources of safety and first aid equipment.

The fire-Figurehting system and additional sources of water.

Site entrance and roadways, including up-to-date information on road Traffic.

Assembly points.

Vehicle parking and rail sidings.

Additional work and layout plans detailing alternate routes and affected

areas, during an emergency.

Note pads, pens and pencils.

A nominal role of employees.

A list of key personnel, with addresses, telephone numbers, etc.The emergency control center should be sited in an area of minimum risk.

Page 255: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

222

SuiTable location from where clear view of the plant is possible or the control room

can be designated as Emergency Control Center. All the Site Controller/ Incident

Controller Officers, Senior Personnel would be located here or have access to the

ECC.

7.6.4 EMERGENCY MEDICAL FACILITIESStretchers, gas masks and general first aid materials for dealing with chemical

burns, fire burns, etc., would be maintained in the medical center as well as in the

Emergency Control Room. A range of medicines should be maintained in the ECC/

Medical Center. Breathing apparatus and other emergency medical equipment

should be provided and maintained.

The Medical Center should display poster for treating burns and first aid. Some

medicines and facilities to be kept in the medical center are suggested. The list is

indicative and the qualified doctors of the medical center should use their

professional judgment for medical treatment.

7.7 IDENTIFICATION AND ASSESSMENT OF HAZARDS

This stage is crucial to both on-site and off-site emergency planning and requires

systematic identification of all possible emergencies that could arise in the plants.

These should range from small events, which can be dealt by plant personnel

without any help from external agencies to the largest event that would require

outside help. To tackle such emergencies effectively, it is essential to have clear-cut

action plan. Experience has shown that for every occasion that the full potential of

an accident is realized, there are many occasions when some lesser event

occurs or when developing incident is made safe before reaching full potential.

Page 256: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

223

Table-7.2 Identified Hazards

Equipment Process Potential Hazard Provision

BF Reduction of Iron Ore Explosion, Gasleakage – air pollution

Gas leakage detection system,Strict follow up of Std OperatingPractices

Blower House Generation of blast Noise Proper selection of machinery.Remote controlled, ear mufs

Stoves Pre heating of blast Gas leakage, Fire &Explosion

Safety inter-locking, gasdetectors. Fire extinguishingcylinders

RMHS Raw materialhandling &transportation

Dust Closed system, dust extractionsystem / dry fog dust suppressionsystem.

GCP – Drytype

Cleaning of BF gas Dust & Gas leakage Gas detector system, Fireextinguishing cylinders

Pump House Water pumping Noise Remote control system. Properselection of m/c.

CompressorHouse

Generation ofcompressed air.

Usage of compressedair for human bodycleaning

Creation of awareness & training.

Pig castingmachine

Pigging High ambienttemperature .Spurting of HM.

Isolation, barricading, enggcontrols. Std operating practices.

Equipment Process Potential Hazard Provision

Sinter Plant Crushing & Sintering Excess heat Isolation & unmanned operation

Power Plant Power generation Explosion, electricshocks. Steamleakage.

Safety inter locking, gas leakagedetector system, Electrical safetygadgets & training. Insulation.

Switch Yard Receiving SS forvoltage step down

Fire, electric shock All electrical fittings and cable areprovided as per the specifiedstandards.Barricading. Restricted entry.Protection sys. Earthing. Smokedetectors.

Switch Yardcontrol room

---- Fire in cable galleriesand switch

Sinter Plant Crushing & Sintering Excess heat Isolation & unmanned operation

Power Plant Power generation Explosion, electricshocks. Steamleakage.

Safety inter locking, gas leakagedetector system, Electrical safetygadgets & training. Insulation.

Switch Yard Receiving SS forvoltage step down

Fire, electric shock All electrical fittings and cable areprovided as per the specifiedstandards.Barricading. Restricted entry.Protection sys. Earthlings. Smokedetectors.

Switch Yardcontrol room

---- Fire in cable galleriesand switch

Page 257: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

224

Table-7.3 Identified Occupational Health HazardsType ofHazard Areas Preventive / Mitigation measures

Dust Raw materialhandling &storage yard

Will be transported in the trucks with tarpaulin covers.Envisaged to install a truck tippler. Water sprinklers in theyard. Covered conveyor belts for RM feeding to RMHSbunkers as well to BF. Pneumatic conveyor for dust handlingfrom Dry GCP to Sinter. Providing personnel protectiveequipments like respirators, caps, and aprons. Developmentof greenery all around the yard. Developing Roads,asphalting etc.

Noise Blower house,ID fan house,Turbine hall, Aircompressorhouse, DG &Pump houses.

Selection of equipments confirming to standards. i.e. <90dBA at 1 mtr distance. All these areas will be unmanneddue to high level automation. SuiTable Ear muffs willprovided to the workers during inspections.Green belt corridor will be developed along the periphery ofthe plant.

ExtremeHeat

Cast house, PigCasting M/c,Sintering platform,Steam piping

Providing proper PPE like leg guards with shoes, Faceshield, leather hand gloves, Leather Aprons, helmets etc.Thermal insulation for steam line. Providing fans, personnelcooling devices, water showers etc.

BF Gas– CO

BF Top, Stove,GCP, Casthouse, Sinter platform, Boiler.

Online gas detector systems will be installed in addition toporTable CO monitors. O2 masks & kits will be provided.

7.8 RISK ANALYSISSteel plant being hazardous industry, it is expected to harbor major hazards which

warrant for a details Risk analysis study. Talking in to account the fact that the plant

is handling Toxic gases, molten metal, fuel oils & chemical the Risk analysis is made.

The Risk analysis is made both for existing plants & future projects.

Risk analysis purpose:

Risk analysis will help to identify & quantify the area of strengths & weakness &

provide actions for controlling risks & provide a basis for developing safety programs

& fire prevention & protection measures.

Risk analysis involves study of:

i) Identification of major hazards.

ii) Identifying failure scenario of release of gas or situations such as spillage of

chemicals or leakage of molten metal etc.

iii) Carrying out of effect and damage calculations.

iv) Deciding who are at risk – employees, contractors, visitors etc.,

Page 258: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

225

v) Evaluate the risk in terms of likelihood & severity.

vi) Deciding whether the existing precautions / measures are adequate.

Method of Risk assessment:

i) This includes studying various hazards and control measures adopted to prevent

accidents. Wherever possible the estimation of DOW Explosion and toxicity Index

were also done in addition to PHA and other studies.

ii) Maximum Credible Scenario (MCA) with a maximum damage potential is studied.

iii)Dow Fire and Explosion Index: Index helps to categorize the hazardous

substances into lower or higher hazard potential and help to design safety measures

for storing and handling.

For determination of Toxicity and Fire and Explosion Index, the various factors are

considered.

a) Material Factors :Fire load, Flash point, Flammability, heat of Combustion,

Vapor pressure

b) General Process Hazards: Exothermic, endothermic reactors, process involving

mixing, burning, charging etc.

c) Special process hazards: Process Temperature, Pressures, Operation, correction,

Erosion etc, Engineering Judgment, Analysis of past accidents are also taken into

consideration.

Risk identified in iron & steel plant:

The risks involved in operation & maintenance of an integrated steel plant are

broadly classified in to following categories.

1. Mechanical Risks.

2. Electrical Risks.

3. Fire & explosion Risks.

4. High/low temperature exposure risks.

5. Toxic gases exposure risks.

6. Corrosive/reactive chemical exposure risks.

1. Mechanical & Electrical RisksThese two types of risks are of universal nature associated with any industrial activity

not specific to a particular plant & process.

Mechanical risks are generally encountered with injuries to head, limbs, eyes etc.

Usually as a result of negligence on the part of operating or maintenance personnel

Page 259: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

226

in the use of improper tools, bypassing safety procedure, neglect of personal

protective wear & risk associated with rotating machinery.

Electrical risks which results in shock or burns are most of them a consequence of

poor maintenance, handling by unauthorized personnel & use of improper /

substandard electrical equipment for cables.

The above two types of risks normally do not cause Emergency situation.

2.Other types of Risks such as Fire & explosions, Toxic gas release, Chemical spills

involve the handling of molten metal, fuel oils, toxic gases & chemicals can create

emergency situations.

3.The details of materials involved, emergency scenario, consequence of incidents,

employee’s exposure & the level of risk associated with these activities are given in

summary of Risk analysis.

Table-7.4 Summary of Risk Analysis.

Sl.No

Scenario Envisaged Risk /causes

Consequence Probability Ofoccurrence

1. Release of Toxic gassuch as BF gas & cokeoven gas

Inhalation of“CO”

Health Hazard(Unconsciousnessetc.)

Occasional

2. Fire in fuel oil storage Ignition of Oil Major Fire Occasional3. Catastrophic Rupture

of LDO / FO storageTank

Ignition ofLDO / FO oil

Jet fire Remote

4. Chemical spills(HCl / FO storageTank)

Ignition ofLDO / FO oil

Exposure to corrosiveFumes of HCL &H2SO4 & chemicalburns

Remote

5. Bursting / Explosion ofLPG / Acetylenecylinder

Ignition ofgas

Explosion & injuries tomen working

Remote

6. Molten metal explosionin Blast furnace & SMS

Puncture ofladle /furnace shell

Explosion & injuries tomen working

Remote

7. Fire in UndergroundCable galleries

Insulationfailure &short circuit

Major Fire Remote

8. Boiler Explosion Overpressure dueto failure ofsafetydevices

Pressure wave /missile effect ofexploded pieces

Remote

9. Catastrophic rupture ofsteam line

Overpressure

Burns to Personnel Remote

Page 260: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

227

7.9 RISK MANAGEMENT MEASURESThe risk management measures for the proposed project activities require adoption

of best safety practice at the respective construction zones within the works

boundary. In addition, the design and engineering of the proposed facilities will

take into consideration of the proposed protection measures for air and water

environment. The detailed risk management measures are listed below.

7.9.1 FURNACE

1. PREVENTIVE MEASURESIf any job is to be undertaken in EOF & BOF areas where the EOF & BOF gases

are toxic, the following procedure has to be laid down to ensure safety of men and

the equipment.

a) Gas Safety man will accompany the team and will test the atmosphere for

the presence of CO, before starting the work.

b) If `CO' concentration is found exceeding the safe limit, the job will be

undertaken using necessary safety appliances viz., Oxygen Breathing

Apparatus/ Blower type Gas mask.

c) Any gas cutting/welding job will be undertaken with the clearance from Gas

Safety man.

2. GAS EXPLOSION, PREVENTION & PREVENTIVE MEASURESThe following actions will be taken to prevent any gas explosions in case of gas

leakage.

1. For jobs on gas lines/equipment, non-sparking copper tools will used. If such

tools are not available, grease coated steel tools will be used. Electrical drill &

other electrical equipment will not be used as these can give rise to sparks.

2. The gas line will be thoroughly purged with steam before undertaking the job

on the same.

3. Naked lights will not be used near any de-pressurized gas main or equipment

unless the same has been thoroughly purged.

4. In case of profuse leakage of gas, action will be taken for water sealing

and isolating that portion.

5. The approach road to the gas line complex will be kept free from any

obstructions.

Page 261: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

228

6. If gas catches fire due to some leakage, it will be extinguished with plastic

clay, steam or water. The portion of gas main affected will be cooled down with

water. The valve will not be closed when fire is still there and the pressure in

the main will be maintained at minimum 100 mm (WC).

7. Gas tapping points of flow or pressure measurement will be cleaned with

wooden stick or grease coated wire.

8. If lighting is necessary near gas line, porTable spark proof electric lamps of

low voltage or explosion proof torchlight will be used for enclosed areas.

7.9.2 HOT METAL & SLAG

Sudden break out of molten metal & slag may result in heavy explosions, due to

their coming in contact with water, thereby causing serious burn injuries to persons

and damage to equipment.

1 PREVENTIVE MEASURES1. Any accumulation of water will be prevented in such vulnerable areas.

2. In case of minor leakages, the flow of molten metal & slag will be controlled.

3. If there is major breakout, the area will be cut off and cordoned.

4. Vital connections e.g. water, gas, compressed air, oxygen etc. will be cut off or

regulated, as per requirement.

Fire water sump and its details are explained in the earlier chapters.

7.9.3 RESPIRATORY HAZARDS1 DUST AND GASESDust generated in integrated pig iron complex includes iron and metallic dusts,

which are mainly present in BF, continuous casting buildings and sinter plants; and

mineral dusts which are mainly present in raw material storage, BF. In the former

case, workers may be exposed to iron oxide and silica dust that can be

contaminated with heavy metals such as chromium (Cr), nickel (Ni), lead (Pb), and

manganese (Mn), zinc (Zn), and mercury (Hg). The most significant is the dust

present in the melting and casting processes (e.g. BF, continuous casting), where

the dust, which is generated by high temperature operations, is finer and more

easily inhaled than in the rolling processes. In raw material storage, blast furnace

and coke oven plant, workers are exposed to mineral dust, which may contain

heavy metals. In addition, BF tapping results in graphite release.

Page 262: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

229

In the melting and casting processes where high temperature operations are

conducted, workers may be exposed to gas inhalation hazards, which may

contain heavy metals. In the BF, workers may be exposed to gas inhalation hazards

of carbon monoxide. To prevent exposure to gas and dust, the steps taken

include the following:

Sources of dust and gases will be separated and enclosed;

Designing the facility ventilation to maximize air circulation. Outlet air will

be filtered before discharge to the atmosphere;

Exhaust ventilation will be installed at the significant point sources of dust and

gas emissions, particularly the BF topping area

Providing a sealed cabin with filtered air conditioning if an operator is

needed in a contaminated area;

Providing separated eating facilities that allow for washing before eating;

Providing facilities that allow work clothes to be separated from personal

clothes, and for washing / showering after work;

Implementing a policy for periodic health checks.

Respiratory hazard control technologies will be used when exposure cannot be

avoided with other means, such as manual operations such as grinding or use of

non-enclosed machine-tools; and during specific maintenance and repair operations.

Necessary steps/ precautions for respiratory protection include the following:

Use of filter respirators when exposed to heavy dust (e.g. fettling works);

For light, metallic dust and gases, fresh-air supplied respirators will be

used. Alternatively, a complete facial gas mask (or an “overpressure”

helmet) may be used, equipped with electrical ventilation;

For carbon monoxide (CO) exposure, detection equipment will be installed to

alert control rooms and local personnel. In case of emergency intervention in

areas with high levels of CO, workers will be provided with porTable CO

detectors, and fresh-air supplied respirators.

7.9.4 HEAT AND HOT LIQUID

High temperatures and direct infrared (IR) radiation are common hazards in pig iron

complexes. High temperatures can cause fatigue and dehydration. Direct IR

radiation also poses a risk to sight. Potential contact with hot metal or hot water may

occur from the cooling spray zone of continuous casting, from splashes of melted

Page 263: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

230

metal, and from contact with hot surfaces. Precautionary measures for prevention

and control of exposure to heat and hot liquids / materials include the following:

Shielding the surfaces where close contact with hot equipment or

splashing from hot materials is expected (e.g. blast furnaces, BOF, continuous

casting and heating oven, and ladles);

Implementing safety buffer zones to separate areas where hot materials

and items (e.g. billets, thick slabs, or ladles) are handled or temporarily stored.

Rail guards around those areas will be provided, with interlocked gates to control

access to areas during operations;

Using appropriate PPE (e.g. insulated gloves and shoes, goggles to protect

against IR and ultraviolet radiation, and clothing to protect against heat radiation

and liquid metal splashes);

Installing cooling ventilation to control extreme temperatures;

Implementation of work rotations providing regular work breaks, access to a

cool rest area, and drinking water.

7.9.5 PHYSICAL HAZARDS

Precautions for the prevention and control of general physical hazards are

presented below.

Potential physical hazards in pig iron complex operations are related to handling of

large and heavy raw materials and product (e.g. blast furnace and storage and

movement of billets and thick slabs, movement of large ladles containing molten

metal); heavy mechanical transport (e.g. trains, trucks and forklifts); grinding and

cutting activities (e.g. contact with scrap material ejected by machine-tools); and

work at heights (e.g. platforms, ladders, and stairs).

7.9.6 HEAVY LOADS / GRINDING & CUTTING / ROLLING

Lifting and moving heavy loads at elevated heights using hydraulic platforms and

cranes presents a significant occupational safety hazard in pig iron plant. Measures

taken to prevent and control potential worker injury include the following;

Clear signage in all transport corridors and working areas;

Appropriate design and layout of facilities to avoid crossover of different

Page 264: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

231

activities and flow of processes;

Implementation of specific load handling and lifting procedures,

including:

o Description of load to be lifted (dimensions, weight, position of center of

gravity)

o Specifications of the lifting crane to be used (maximum lifted load,

dimensions)

o Train staff in the handling of lifting equipments and driving mechanical

transport devices

The area of operation of fixed handling equipment (e.g. cranes, elevated

platforms) will not cross above worker and pre-assembly areas;

Material and product handling will remain within restricted zones under

supervision;

Regular maintenance and repair of lifting, electrical and transport equipment

will be conducted.

Prevention and control of injuries related to grinding and cutting activities, and use

of scrap, include the following:

Locating machine-tools at a safe distance from other work areas and from

walkways;

Conducting regular inspection and repair of machine-tools, in particular

protective shields and safety devices /equipment;

Training staff to properly use machines-tools, and to use appropriate

personal protection equipment (PPE).

7.9.7 MUSCULOSKELETAL DISORDERSMusculoskeletal disorders are injuries that affect muscles, tendons, ligaments

and nerves. These injuries can develop when the same muscles are used over and

over again or for a long time without taking time to rest. The chance of getting this

type of injury increases if the force exerted is high and/or the job requires an

awkward posture. Some examples of musculoskeletal disorders include back pain,

carpal tunnel syndrome, tendonitis and tenosynovitis.

Preventing musculoskeletal disorders requires recognition, assessment and

control of the hazards that cause them. Keep in mind that the most knowledgeable

person about problems with a job is usually the person doing it.

Page 265: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

232

7.9.8 CONTROL HAZARDS, PREFERABLY AT THEIR SOURCEConsider changes to

Mechanizing a repetitive task or process

Designing workstations and work processes using ergonomic principles

Using well maintained tools and equipment that decrease force or

awkward position

Providing lifting devices to eliminate heavy lifting

Ensuring that all employees receive comprehensive training on how to do

their job safely

Using ergonomic principles, to avoid

Awkward body positions

Overextended and awkward reaches

Repetitive or heavy bending, twisting, reaching, lifting, lowering, pushing and

pulling

Sustained or static exertions

7.9.9 NOISENoise is not a new hazard. It has been a constant threat since the industrial

revolution. Too much noise exposure may cause a temporary change in hearing

(your ears may feel stuffed up) or a temporary ringing in ears (tinnitus). These short-

term problems usually go away within a few minutes or hours after leaving the noise.

However, repeated exposures to loud noise can lead to permanent, incurable

hearing loss or tinnitus. Removing hazardous noise from the workplace whenever

possible and using hearing protectors in those situations where dangerous noise

exposures have not yet been controlled or eliminated.

7.10 HEALTH AND SAFETY MEASURES FOR THE WORKERS

a. BUILDINGS AND STRUCTURESNo walls, Chimneys, Galleries, Stairways, Floor, Platform, Staging or structure

whether of a permanent or temporary character will be constructed in such

manner as to cause risk or bodily injury.

Page 266: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

233

b. PROVISION OF CRAWLING BOARDS ETCNo person will be required to stand to pass over or work on or near by any roof

of ceiling cover with fragile material through which he is liable to fall, in case it

breaks or gives away the distance for more than 3 meters without use of

sufficient number of suiTable ladders, duck ladders or crawling boards which

are securely support.

c. SERVICE PLATFORMSWhenever practicable and demanded service platforms and gangways

will be provided for overhead shafting, and where required by him these will

be securely fence with guardrails and toe boards.

d. BELTS, ETCAll belts will be regularly examined to injure that the joints are safe and the belts

are proper tension.

e. HELMETSHelmets will be provided to the workers for safe guarding themselves

against any head injuries.

f. MACHINERYNo machineries are equipments will be Situated, Operated or maintained in such

a manner as to cause risk of bodily injury.

g. METHODS OF WORKNo process of work will be carried out in such a manner as to cause risk of

bodily injury.

h. ELECTRICITYNo electricity installation will be provided during construction so as to be dangers

to human life or safety.

i. MEDICAL CHECK-UPMedical examination for every employee will be examined by certified surgeon at

least once in 3 months of a calendar.

Page 267: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

234

j. Inspection and maintenance of pollution control systems only after getting

official shutdown or with permission of authorized officer.

k. Regular cleaning of floors, road, rooftops, conveyer galleries and any other

dusty place.

l. Checking for availability of spray water system for moistening the coal

yard/dump. Heat insulation of hot surfaces

m. All pollution control systems will be interlocked with operation of process

equipment.

n. The workers exposed to noisy equipment will be provided with ear plugs.

If necessary, the duty hours will be rotated, so that noise exposure time is kept

within specified limits.

7.10.1 SAFETY OF PERSONNELAll workmen employed in working conditions will be provided with adequate

personal safety equipments as applicable to the work like:

Industrial Safety Shoes

Industrial Helmets

Hand gloves

Ear Muffs

Welder’s screen

Aprons

Gas masks

Respirators

Safety Belts

Goggles

Page 268: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

235

Table-7.5 Health Register

Name of the Company: Address:

1. Department Works2

Name of worker

3 Sex

4 Age (at least birthday)

5 Date of employment on present work

6Date of leaving or transfer to other work with reasonsfor discharge or transfer

7. Nature of job or occupation

8.Raw materials products or by-products likely to beexposed to

9. Dates of medical examinationand results thereof

Dates

Result :Fit or unfit

10. Signs and symptoms observed during examination

11. Nature of tests and resultsthereof

1.Spirometry:

2.Pulse oxymetry

3.Lungs function test:

12.If declared unfit for work stateperiod of suspension withreasons in detail

13.Whether certificate of unfitnessissued to the worker

14.Re-certified fit to resume dutyon

15.Signature of the certifyingsurgeon with date

Page 269: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

236

7.11 FOLLOWING SAFETY SLOGANS WILL BE DISPLAYED

7.12 EMERGENCY ACTION PLANS

7.12.1 EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN FOR CYLINDER FIRE

1. When filled container containing LPG is involved in fire, internal pressure if

not relieved, will build up above 70KG/SQ.CM and ultimately rupture the

container. Rupture weak by direct flame impingement. Ruptured containers can

be propelled at distance by jet action.

2. If container’s pressure is not raised up to 70KG/SQ.CM, leakage from

screwed valve joint can occur due to different expansion of steel and brass.

3. Ignition of the escaping gas would aggravate the fire but release of fire

reduces the possibility of rupture.

4. No attempt should be made to extinguish the burning gas but the container

under fire and other containers in vicinity should be kept cool by water spray.

5. If the gas leakage does not ignite, the container should be approached

from up and removed to the place of safety away from the source of ignition.

236

7.11 FOLLOWING SAFETY SLOGANS WILL BE DISPLAYED

7.12 EMERGENCY ACTION PLANS

7.12.1 EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN FOR CYLINDER FIRE

1. When filled container containing LPG is involved in fire, internal pressure if

not relieved, will build up above 70KG/SQ.CM and ultimately rupture the

container. Rupture weak by direct flame impingement. Ruptured containers can

be propelled at distance by jet action.

2. If container’s pressure is not raised up to 70KG/SQ.CM, leakage from

screwed valve joint can occur due to different expansion of steel and brass.

3. Ignition of the escaping gas would aggravate the fire but release of fire

reduces the possibility of rupture.

4. No attempt should be made to extinguish the burning gas but the container

under fire and other containers in vicinity should be kept cool by water spray.

5. If the gas leakage does not ignite, the container should be approached

from up and removed to the place of safety away from the source of ignition.

236

7.11 FOLLOWING SAFETY SLOGANS WILL BE DISPLAYED

7.12 EMERGENCY ACTION PLANS

7.12.1 EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN FOR CYLINDER FIRE

1. When filled container containing LPG is involved in fire, internal pressure if

not relieved, will build up above 70KG/SQ.CM and ultimately rupture the

container. Rupture weak by direct flame impingement. Ruptured containers can

be propelled at distance by jet action.

2. If container’s pressure is not raised up to 70KG/SQ.CM, leakage from

screwed valve joint can occur due to different expansion of steel and brass.

3. Ignition of the escaping gas would aggravate the fire but release of fire

reduces the possibility of rupture.

4. No attempt should be made to extinguish the burning gas but the container

under fire and other containers in vicinity should be kept cool by water spray.

5. If the gas leakage does not ignite, the container should be approached

from up and removed to the place of safety away from the source of ignition.

Page 270: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

237

7.12.2 EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN FOR ELECTRIC FIRE1. Disconnect the affected areas electric supply.

2. Attempt to extinguish fire with the help of CO2, DCP

3. If fire is not extinguished, extinguish by spraying water with fog

nozzle after ensuring complete isolation of electric circuit.

7.12.3 EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN FOR OFFICE FIRE1. Disconnected electric supply of the affected area.

2. Attempt to extinguish the fire with the help of CO2, DCP and sand.

3. If large fire, use hydrant system.

4. Attempt to save the record.

5. Attempt fire extinguisher.

7.12.4 EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN FOR OIL FIRE1. Attempt to extinguish small fire with the help of DCP

2. If the fire is not controlled, use water foam to blanket the fire and

further action is to be taken

THE PROPOSED PROJECT WILL PROVIDE ELABORATE ARRANGEMENTSFOR MANAGING ANY INCIDENTS OF FIRE

Water Tender

Foam Tender

PorTable Pump

Wireless set

Water Hoses

Hot line Telephone etc.,

7.12.5 EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN FOR MEDICAL AID

I. EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN FOR ELECTRIC SHOCK CASUALTIESELECTRIC SHOCK RESULTS IN

Irreversible damage to brain cell begins followed by deterioration of the organs.

Page 271: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

238

RESCUE AND FIRST AID

Do first aid quickly and without fuss and panic

Switch off the supply if this can be done at once.

If not possible use a dry stick, dry cloth or other non-conductor to separate

the victim from electrical contact.

The rescuer must avoid receiving shock himself by wearing gloves or using a

jacket to pull the victim.

Always keep in mind that delay in rescue and resuscitation may be fatal.

Every sound counts.

ii. ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATIONGive artificial respiration if breathing has stopped. There are several methods

of artificial respiration, if the victim is not injured over the face, try mouth to

mouth.

a. MOUTH TO MOUTH METHOD If there is obstruction to breathing, remove it with your fingers if it in mouth.

Several sharp blows between shoulder blade may help to is lodge an obstruction.

Lay casually on his back, put something under his shoulder to raise them &

allow his head to fall backwards. The head should be, if possible be a little

lower than the trunk. Remember that speed is essential.

Kneel at the causalities head and grasp his arms at the wrists then cross

them firmly over the lower chest. This movement should force air out of his

lungs. Press with the hands crossed on the lower part of the chest and maintain

pressure for two seconds.

Release this pressure and pull out his arms with a sweeping movement

upwards and outwards above his head and backwards as far as possible.

This movement should cause air to be drawn in to his lungs. Retain the

arm in this position for three seconds.

Repeat these movements rhythmically about twelve times a minute checking

the mouth frequently for obstructions. Each cycle will thus take give seconds-

two seconds for chest pressure and three seconds for arm lift.

With the causality on his back there is danger of aspiration of vomit,

mucus or blood reentering the system. This risk can be reduced by keeping his

Page 272: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

239

head extended and a little lower than the trunk.

If an assistant is available, he can press the causality lower jaws so that the

chin is jutting out.

The assistant should also ensure that the mouth is kept open as far as

possible and head is tilted to one side.

When natural breathing begins, your movement should be adapted to

correspond to it.

If burns are present, cover them with a dry sterile dressing

Handle the causality gentle.

Do not allow people to crowd around and block fresh airflow.

Arrange to remove the injured to the care of a doctor as early as possible.

7.13 NATURAL HAZARDS7.13.1 EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN FOR TORNADO/HIGH WINDS

a. Weather reports will be monitored from broadcast warnings regarding

threatening conditions.

b. If the tornado has been sighted or effect is felt, following steps should

be taken by plant personnel.

Persons will be notified over public address system or through siren.

Emergency services will be alerted for assistance.

Plant personnel should be advised to assemble in the

administration building basement, staff room, recreation room and rest

rooms.

All safety systems should be kept on alert and all nonessential

utilities should be put off.

c. After the status is restored, personnel should inspect all the facilities for

resource, first aid and damage control activities, damage assessment, and clean

up, restoration and recovery.

7.13.2 EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN FOR EARTHQUAKESa. When first tremors are sensed during an earthquake, all personnel should

evacuate buildings and assemble at safe place away from structures, walls

and falling objects. Emergency shutdown should be declared.

b. Emergency services should be contacted for assistance.

c. After the status is restored, personnel should inspect all the facilities for

Page 273: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

240

rescue, first aid and damage control activities, damage assessment, cleanup,

restoration and recovery.

7.13.3 EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN FOR BOMB THREAT When bomb threat call is received the following measures are to be taken.

Inform the message to the highest local police authority and seek their

assistance for patrolling and security need.

Inform Controller of Explosives the details and nature of the anonymous

message and read operations.

Request the Local Fire Brigade to position at least on fire tender at the

Location immediately.

Keep the Concerned Department at the Regional Level informed with the

developments at regular intervals.

Alert the Local Government / Private Hospitals and seek their help for

providing Ambulances if necessary

IN THE LOCATION PREMISES Keep the Fire Hydrant System/all Fire Figurehting and Personnel protective

Equipment in readiness.

Every one entering the Location must be frisked at the Gate/check all

Hand Bags, Parcels etc., for suspected explosive/dangerous objects.

Have thorough inspection of the Location for any suspected dangerous

object.

Materials and other Boxes to be brought in to the Location must be

deposited at Gate for minimum curing period of 48 Hrs.

Organize Employees Vigilance cell for round the clock observation of

industry Premises.

IF THE SUSPECTED OBJECT IS FOUND In case of finding of suspected Article, do not disturb its position, but the area

around it should be cordoned off to a distance of 100 meters and more

depending upon the gravity of situation.

Adequate Staff or Police Squad posted to prevent any unauthorized entry into

the enforced cordon.

Contact Controller of Explosives immediately, who on reaching the Site will

Page 274: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

241

decide suiTable action for defusing and disposal of the suspected object.

Evolution of thick billowing smoke is an indication of impending explosion and

in such a case, with draw or evacuates all personnel from the spot, which has

been identified.

As a general measure regulate the movement of the outsiders inside our

Premises and restrict their entry with permits.

7.14 SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT, R & R ACTION PLAN

7.14.1 EXISTING SOCIAL STATUSIt is proposed to describe the existing social status in as to demography, amenities,

public health, agriculture, land-use pattern, employment and industries.

1. POPULATION

The decadal growth in the State is 15.67% which is comparable with

general corresponding national Figures (17.64%). However Bellary district

shows a growth rate of 20.38%.

The male female ratio of H.B.Halli taluk is 975 females for 1000 males

which corresponds to the national average of 975 females for 1000 males.

Total literacy rate in Bellary district is 68%. However the literacy rate in

H.B.Halli taluk is only 58.58%%. The literacy rate is better in male than in

female.

2. TRANSPORTATION & COMMUNICATIONAll villages in the study zone are connected by road network. However surfacing

needs to be improved. The establishment of this industry is catalytic to the road

development.

3. PUBLIC HEALTHThe villages in the study zone facilities are scanty. Few have some semblance of

health centre, in others visiting practitioners visit. A Government Hospital is present in

H.B Halli.

4. AMENITIES IN STUDY AREAIt is peculiar that all the villages are inhabitated. The information compiled by

record and interviews is as follows:

Page 275: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

242

In absence of any commensurate industrial development, agriculture is the

only source of livelihood.

Primary school education is available in all the villages.

Drinking water is available to all the villages, the source being open dug

well/borewell with or without pump/electricity.

It is encouraging to find that all the all the villages are connected by road

network, though it needs good surfacing. This is a good infra- structure for

bringing cane from the villagers and they will get benefited.

7.14.2 ECONOMIC STATUS IN THE REGION: LAND USE PATTERNAGRICULTUREThe cropping pattern in the district reveals that food crops like paddy, maize, bajra and

sorghum among cereals, red gram, bengal gram and green gram among pulses are

major crops cultivated in the district. The major oilseed crops are sunflower, groundnut

and safflower. Horticulture crops like banana, mango, citrus, pomegranate, Figure,

grapes are also grown. A recent trend shows that there is a low shift towards fruit

crops like pomegranate and grapes. Of the total area of 8,610 square kilometers

covered during 2002-03 cereals occupy about 55.2% by oilseeds 24.5% pulse 15.6%

and other commercial crops like cotton and sugarcane about 4.8%. There is a slight

shift towards commercial crops like cotton and sugarcane over last 2 years.

IRRIGATIONThe individual land holding is small. Irrigation and communication facilities are

scanty. Only 17.3% of the net cultivable area is irrigated and the balance 82.7% of

the area has to depend on the monsoon. This tehsil is in Tungabhadra basin and

hence have a relatively better situation of support by man-made efforts of wells, river

impoundment or tank for irrigation, though only one crop is possible. In spite of this

difficult situation, a large percent are supported by cultivation.

ANIMAL HUSBANDRYThe people are turning to mechanical engineering means both for agriculture as well

as for transport. The cattle population density of the District is moderate to low and it

is reflected in the persons employed in this sector. It may be found that in Influence

zone area, the percent is less than 1% who are dependent on livestock.

All this leads to one conclusion that industrialization has to be stepped up

Page 276: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

243

To provide more livelihood.

To provide male employment with women participation, for economic

independence.

To improve agriculture by increasing the spending capacity of the

people by other avenues and diverting the gains.

To improve livestock census per sq. km by utilizing employment gains.

Employment & wages:

The information related to this is tabulated below:

Table-7.6 Comparative Occupations

Sl. No. Particulars District Level Study Zone1 Main workers to total population,

%

26.06 43.182 Marginal workers to total population,

%

2.52 8.213 Non-workers to total population,

%

71.41 48.59

AS WOULD BE SEEN FROM THE TABLE Maximum employment is in the agricultural sector only. Here there are two

classes, one who own the land and cultivate by themselves, and two who are

employed as workers on others’ fields.

In Agricultural sector women participation is insignificant in

cultivators class, which means women do not have much economic

independence.

The number of people not having any source of revenue is substantially high.

The marginal workers too do not get satisfactory duration of employment in

the year.

HERITAGEThe study zone does not have archaeological, monument, defense installation,

airport, hospitals, ports, national park, religious places, resorts or other historical

places within 10 km area.

7.14.2.1 REHABILITATION & RESETTLEMENT PLANThe expansion project is proposed to be developed in an un-inhabited open barren

land. The vegetation in the area is scanty and is only bushes and shrubs. In view of

the above, the proposed expansion project does not involve any displacement of

persons and no rehabilitation or resettlements is necessary.

Page 277: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

CHAPTER -8

PROJECT BENEFITS

Page 278: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT
Page 279: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

244

CHAPTER 8PROJECT BENEFITS

8.1 IMPROVEMENTS IN PHYSICAL INFRASTRUCTURE

The physical infrastructure of this area will improve due to various activities of the

proposed project as enumerated below.

8.2. SITE AREA IMPROVEMENT

190 acres of additional land adjacent to the existing project site is allocated through

KIADB for establishment of the proposed expansion project. The site area is

proposed to be extensively used for landscape development. Storm water gutter,

water reservoir and rain water harvesting will be provided in the premises. This will

improve water Table in the area. The enhanced groundwater source will be useful to

the surrounding farmers who mainly depend on groundwater for irrigation.

Also nursery will be developed keeping the concept of bio-diversity in mind to meet

the tree plantation needs of the industry and surrounding villages. Greenery and green

belt covering 33 % of the total area will be developed. Lawns and associated

ornamental tree hedges will be developed around plants, buildings, parking and,

storage area. Line trees will be planted on either side of the roads present in the

premise and in the vicinity of the site.

The industry is dependent on roads for transportation of men and material. Road

connectivity will improve. Vehicular movement for raw materials and products and

also for the movement personnel in the roads of this area will considerably increase.

This will result in development and maintenance of roads. Automobile related activity

such as vehicle repair and maintenance garages, workshops and shops will be

started. The location is rural and economically backward. The industry will lead to

creation of new job opportunities and scope for transport and other petty business

activity.

This improved physical infrastructure will be an added facility to the community

for surface transport.

Page 280: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

245

8.2.1 INDUSTRIAL AREA (PROCESSING AREA)/ RESIDENTIAL AREA (NONPROCESSING AREA)

The industrial processing premise will be provided with internal roads, road side

gutters, Storm water gutters, sewage lines, Street lights, Flood lights, Parking area.

Landscaping, lawn and greenery will be developed in the premise.

Rain water harvesting and rain water reservoir of adequate capacity will

be built.

Fire Figurehting and disaster management facility will be provided.

8.2.2 GREEN-BELTGreen belt and greenery will be developed in about 65 acres of land. The species

developed will be as per CPCB guide lines. Assistance and guidelines will also be

availed in development of greenery in the industry.

All the premise green belt of about 20 m will be developed. Trees will be developed

on either side of the internal roads as well on all approach roads to the industry,

Lawns will be developed around plant and administrative buildings. Green belt of 10

to 20 m will be developed around open bulk storage yards.

8.3 IMPROVEMENTS IN THE SOCIAL INFRASTRUCTURE

The location is rural and economically backward. Creation of job opportunity and

scope for transport, civil works and supply of material and services and other petty

business activity associated to the project will improve. With this the economic status

and purchasing power of public will improve. This will result in improved attitude of

the public towards education and health. This may cause in creation of education and

health care facilities in this rural area.

It will not disturb the existing pattern of social relations and democratic setup.

In rural areas much of the time and energy is wasted in reaching from one place to

another. This is due to lack of swift mode of transport. By the establishment of this

industry, movement of vehicles in this area will generally improve (both private and

public-owned).

With establishment of the In the study zone of 10 km radius, the purchasing power of

people is very less. The agricultural implements, agro-chemicals and vehicles will be

Page 281: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

246

in more demand as also village grown milk products, vegeTables and agricultural

produce.

Present level of education and literacy (especially rural and women) is very poor and

it needs improvement. The establishment of this industry will play a catalytic role in

this. Education level will go up with flow of funds and avenue of livelihood. Likewise

the healthcare facilities are also said to improve.

Living in harmony is an important aspect of the society. This can happen only if all

the components are comfortably placed. Persons engaged in their respective

vocation and accruing job satisfaction leads to this. This will become possible by this

venture.

The improvements in social infrastructure are discussed below

8.3.1 CONNECTIVITYA good quality tar road will be developed from the site to to S.H.Way-25. The S.H.-

25 connected to N.H.-13 near Mariammanahalli in NE and N.H. 4 at Harihar in South.

Existing Tarred road to join the site to S.C. railway station at Vyasanakere. Will also

be up graded.

8.4 EMPLOYMENT POTENTIAL – SKILLED, SEMI-SKILLED AND UNSKILLED

The industry and its supporting activities need people from manual to managerial

strength. The production activities, transportation, maintenance of machineries and

civil works associated with the project will need unskilled and skilled workers. people

on tractors and tractor repairers as skilled ones. So in manufacturing activity all three

types i.e skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled people are required. The overall potential

including the garages, loading-unloading actions, eateries, small shop owners is

substantial. The local people can get a good share out of this. In the factory, science

and technology prevails and there some outsiders will have to be engaged at least for

the time being. If the second generation local people acquire that skill, they too will be

able to fill the gap and accrue benefit of higher jobs. If the activity of sugar and

alcohol manufacturing becomes sTable by that time, perhaps expansion may become

possible further and then employment availability may further enhance.

Page 282: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

247

The total direct employment potential of the proposed industry is about 450 people.

However, the commencement of this industry will create direct and indirect

employment opportunities to more than 2,000 people in terms of factory employment,

transportation, vehicle maintenance, petty shops etc.

Category Existingunit

ProposedExpansion

Total

Managerial 20 25 45Supervisory 40 50 90Administration 30 30 60Skilled 70 80 150Semiskilled 180 215 395Trainee 60 50 110Total 400 450 850

8.5 OTHER TANGIBLE BENEFITS

Both tangible and non-tangible benefits will result from this activity and many of

those are described above. Apart from direct employment, other benefits are listed

below.

I. Time saving by quicker transport

II. Aesthetics improvement by general greening with emphasis on

biodiversity

III. Availability of nursery facilitates

IV. Developed economy brings with it literacy and healthy living.

V. Improved safety-security in surrounding with better Law and Order.

VI. Symbiosis and sustainable development will be the ultimate objective.

The rural economy is found generally dwindling because they depend only on one

single source of livelihood namely conventional agriculture. With the activities of the

present industry the local population will become aware of alternative means for

livelihood and utilize such opportunities to improve their living standard.

8.6 CSR (CARPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY) ACTIVITIES

The 5% of project cost is earmarked for CSR activity and the details of CSR spread in5 years is given below

Page 283: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

248

Table – 8.1 Budget for Corporate Social Responsibility Activities

Sl.No. Description

1st Year(Amount

in Lakhs)

2nd Year(Amount

in Lakhs)

3rd Year(Amount

in Lakhs)

4th Year(Amount

in Lakhs)

5th Year(Amountin Lakhs)

Total(Amount

in Lakhs)

1

Training of Local eligibleunemployed youth through a tie

up with National Academy ofConstruction

1.3 1.3 3 5 8 18.6

2

Providing training tounemployed educated youth inspoken English language and

personality development toenable them to appear for

interviews

1.3 1.3 4 6 8 20.6

3 Sponsoring computers forschool childrens 1 1 1 1 1 5

4Providing one well equipped

ambulance and maintenance ofthe same

2.5 0.6 3 0.6 0.6 7.3

5Sponsoring of selected talentyouth in sports in consultation

with District authority1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 6.5

6Setting up health center andproviding medical assistance

and medicines2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 12.5

7

Providing training to localfarming community in goodagricultural/ livestock and

horticultural practices

1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 6.5

8

Providing support for self-helpgroups especially women and

housewives for training inemployment oriented schemes(DWCRA model) in consultation

with District Authority

0.5 0.8 1.3 1.3 1.3 5.2

9Sponsoring of Sports events,activities in consultation with

District Authority1.3 1.3 5 8 10 25.6

10Repair of School buildings /

Anganwadis, Bal vihars, womenand child welfare centers

0

11 Provision of drinking watersupply and toilets in Schools 2.5 3.8 10 13 18 47.3

Page 284: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

249

12Providing furniture, black board,

teaching material, stationery,etc. for schools

1.3 5 10 25 38 79.3

13Repair/ Extension of existingprimary Health centers and

supply of Medical Equipment2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 12.5

14Adoption of parks, community

playground and othercommunity areas

2.5 2.5 3.5 6.5 8.5 23.5

15

Providing Infrastructural facilitieslike upgrading of bus-shelters,

village roads, desilting oftanks, Providing additional

facilities

1.3 2.5 3.5 4.5 6.5 18.3

16Development of park inconsultation with District

Authorities6.3 2.5 10 25 45 88.8

17 Miscelanious 5 14 42 55 88 204

Total amount to be spend on CSR activity in lakhs 2490

Page 285: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

CHAPTER -9

ENVIRONMENTAL COSTBENEFIT ANALYSIS

Page 286: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT
Page 287: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

250

CHAPTER – 9ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS

M/s. SLR Metaliks Ltd. propose to improve the viability of the existing project by the

addition of facilities for the production of value added downstream products with

ready market opportunity such as alloy steel, rolled steel products, metallurgical coke,

coke oven gas based power and oxygen in the existing steel industry. The need and

benefits of the integrated steel industry are well established. During scoping stage the

authorities have not specified the requirement of environmental cost benefit analysis.

Hence, the environmental cost benefit analysis was not considered in the report.

Page 288: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT
Page 289: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

CHAPTER -10

ENVIRONMENTALMANAGEMENT PLAN

Page 290: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT
Page 291: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

251

Chapter - 10ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

10.1 INTRODUCTIONEnvironmental management plan (EMP) describes the administrative aspects of

ensuring that mitigation measures are implemented and their effectiveness

monitored, after approval of EIA. It consists of various policies, control measures

etc. for abatement of critical environmental impacts arising out of the proposed

project. Based on the impacts identified, mitigation measures are proposed and

these will be incorporated with the plant. Further a suiTable environment

management plan will be introduced in the project to implement and practice

measures to protect and enhance the quality of environment. The EMP is only as

effective as its implementation. An appropriate environmental management strategy

is developed and presented in the form of an EMS.

The proposed project involves utilization of natural resources and generation of

waste and polluting substances. Depletion of natural resources will affect the

competitive users. The waste and polluting materials if discharged without control

and treatment is likely to have adverse consequence to the environment

parameters including water, air ,soil, flora and fauna. Further, it may exert stress to

the existing infrastructural and other facilities and also to the existing socio

economic status of the region. It is the responsibility of the project proponents to

control the utilization of resources and discharges of waste products by adopting

suiTable control measures in the factory to avoid adverse consequence of

industrial activities on the environment and in turn to enhance the quality of the

existing environment.

10.2 NEED

Environmental management is a crucial segment of Industrial Project.

Management of project, in view of the global concept of sustainable

development will do their best. Therefore, preparation of Environmental

Management Plan is a must to fulfill bifocal aspect of the statutory compliance as

well as that of social concern. Water needs of project may be reasonable, but

generally this resource is dwindling. Thus, on hand one should use it less and on

the other the source should not be left polluted for others. Air environment needs

to be continuously managed, because man needs inhalation every moment, so

Page 292: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

252

also is Flora and Fauna dependent on it. The biological aspects, soil and ground

water are all interdependent. Thus, a need of proper environmental management

and a conscious plan for it.

10.3 OBJECTIVES

To define the components of environmental management..

To prepare an environmental hierarchy.

To prepare a checklist for statutory compliance.

To prepare environmental organization.

To prepare a schedule for monitoring and compliance.

To establish a watchdog committee voluntarily with an ultimate aim to get ISO

14001 certification.

10.4 ENVIRONMENT COMPONENTS

10.4.1 Air Environment

Monitor the consented parameters at ambient air quality stations, regularly.

Monitor the work zone at various stations to satisfy the corporate

requirements for health and environment.

Monitor the stack.

hourly average concentration of total suspended particulate matter in

ambient air shall be monitored at 40 meter distance from the primary

vibratory / rotary / screen or the site boundary whichever lesser, using high

volume sampler instrument.

Use of low Sulphur coal

Covered storage for coal, wherever necessary

Water sprinklers

Smooth Roads. Covered Trucks

Green Belt development

10.4.2 WATER ENVIRONMENT

Keep record of input water every day for quantity and quality.

Measures are taken to segregate the sub-streams of effluent as per their

characterization.

Water conservation is accorded high priority in every section of the activity.

Captive power plant Boiler blow down & cooling purging water reused after

Page 293: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

253

treatment through PCT (Physico Chemical Treatment).

Keep record of wastewater returned back to boiler make up, process

and to gardening, for both the quantity and quality details.

10.4.3 SOLID WASTE

Monitor solid waste disposal zone environment. (Water, groundwater,

leachates, air, soil, up-gradient-down-gradient, upwind-downwind)Monitor

garden sweepings and dry leaves

Stored on raised platform

10.4.4 AESTHETIC (NOISE & ODOUR) ENVIRONMENTThe Project will generate noise from various locations like

Steam Generator

Rotary equipments like fans, blowers and compressors

Combustion Chamber Steam traps and leaking points The proponent note

that the Project will have the following facilities, which will reduce the overall

impact of noise pollution

Use of better acoustic systems to minimize noise generated by the

equipments

Regular maintenance of equipments to minimize noise pollution

Monitor the ambient noise level and work zone noise level to conform the

stipulated norms.

Creation of awareness for noise attenuation and mitigation program.

Monitor the ambient Odour level and work zone Odour level by sensing.

Creation of awareness for Odour attenuation and mitigation program.

10.4.5 BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT

Special attention is planned to maintain green belt in and around the

Amenities premises.

Adequate provisions are made to facilitate daily watering of all plants and

lawns.

Special attention provided during summer to ensure that the green belt

does not suffer from water shortage.

Page 294: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

254

Development & maintenance of green belt to be considered as a priority issue.

Return water collection, treatment and reuse under watch.

10.4.6 WORK-ZONE COMFORT ENVIRONMENT

Monitor the work zone temperature levels.

Monitor the work zone humidity.

Examine the health of staff workers and keep record.

10.4.7 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT

The operators and workers are trained in various aspects of ESH(Environment, Safety and Health).

The managers and officers involved in Environment Management Cellshall undergo refresher workshop and up gradation of information onvarious environmental issues.

The industrial authority shall help in promoting the activities related toenvironmental awareness in nearby villages and visitors.

The industrial authority shall help in promoting local people for livelihood

Commensurate with their will, skill and abilities

Health Statistics will be assembled, compiled and displayed.

Environmental status will be displayed.

Page 295: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

255

Figure 10.1Structures for EMPFigure-10.1 Structure of EMP

Page 296: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

256

10.5 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT HIERARCHY

Developer is aware that environmental management is not a job, which can be handledwithout a careful planning. The success lies if three components are simultaneously presentviz. (1) management support, (2) efficiency of the environment management cell and (3)acceptability of resulting environmental quality, both by SPCB and by public. A structure ofthis plan and hierarchy of process flow for environmental management is prepared andenclosed as logics, which is self-explanatory. Developers will adopt this structure andhierarchy, which is akin to principles and practice.

10.6 CHECKLIST OF STATUTORY OBLIGATIONSThere are a number of environmental status required to be attended to by the industries or

projects. Industry has prepared a checklist of these obligations, which facilitates the

obedience of the laws of land. These are advised to industry as follows:

1 The Consents, whether under the Water Act or under the Air Act, are normally issued

for a fixed validity period. Please check whether the Consent is valid. If the same is

expiring, it is better to apply for a fresh renewal at least 120 days prior to the expiry date.

2 The Consent normally describes the items of manufactured products with

quantity.One should see that, the described framework is not overstepped. In case, there

is any likely hood of such increase, it will be worthwhile to obtain permission for the same.

At least a letter to that effect be posted to the relevant board officer.

3 The Consent lays down a condition as to the volume and rate of discharge of

effluents both for domestic as well as the industrial activity. By routine checks at the

measuring devices, this can be ascertained.

4 There should be a continuous performance evaluation of the treatment units like

Page 297: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

257

STP, so as to always remain inside tolerance limits. Following measures can be

adopted,

a. Characterization of raw effluents/emissions.

b. Attempting in-plant controls.

c. Operation, maintenance, repairs and replacement of the STP,

d. Retrofit equipment to the existing plant.

5 Disposal is the last ditch battle. Disposal, dispersion, dilution, diversion, therefore, has

to be planned very methodically and operated efficiently. This is a place where more

reliable staff is required to be deployed.

6 The drainage network has been planned in such a way that, storm water and

effluents do not get mixed. Keep the terminal manhole clean and always hospiTable to

facilitate taking of sample by the Board officials. Also check that no effluent is admitted in

the channel down-stream of the terminal manhole, which means all the effluent, finally

should pass via the terminal manhole only.

7 Monitoring aspects are always very crucial. For operating the plant, certain

parameters be constantly checked. However, it will be a good practice to check monthly

all the parameters through standard and approved laboratories. In case there is a

water body in the vicinity, it is advised to take periodically samples from it. This applies

both to the surface water as well as ground water. The findings will either give you a

confident satisfaction or may give you a timely warning for improvement in the treatment

or more so in the disposal system.

8 The environmental audit statement is required to be submitted on annual basis,.

9 The industry should device their own format for a daily log book recording of the

running of their STP. A printed format shows your conscious efforts towards the goal of

pollution control, whenever any inspection takes place.

10 An inspection book to note observations made by the visiting KSPCB field officer is

maintained. The compliance of the unsatisfactory remarks are shown during next

inspection.

11 In case, there is an unfortunate accident, unforeseen act or event by which pollutants

are excessively released into the environment, the same to be brought immediately to the

notice of the board and other concerned agencies. This will enable you to get

experienced timely help from them. Your burden gets shared. Synergistic effects can be

predicted by an overview.

Page 298: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

258

12 In case, you feel aggrieved by any conditions imposed in the Consent, approach the

board immediately for discussion, or thereafter prefer an appeal timely. Therefore, read

the Consent carefully as soon as you receive the same.

13 The Water Cess Act, 1977, is applicable to certain specified industries. In case your

industry is covered, the regular returns to be submitted. Water meters be installed,

whether the industry is covered or not under the Cess Act. Also check from time to time

whether the class of your industry, which may not be presently specified, has since got

covered under the Cess Act.

14 The Cess amount be paid as per assessment orders and record maintained.

15 In case you feel aggrieved by excessive cess assessment or non-sanction of rebate,

the appeal is preferred in time that is within 30 days. And in case, you are late in doing

this, at last submit with reasons for the delay.

16 The Government or Board while giving site clearance or Consent normally puts a

condition of plantation of trees. Otherwise also, planting trees within the compound gives

a good demonstration of your plant performance. A better practice is to select about three

varieties and species selected to be tough and tolerant for existing type of environment.

17 An unsafe working and the environmental pollution generally goes hand-in-

hand.Therefore, the obligations under the Factories Act be scrupulously followed and

record maintained.

18 There are certain responsibilities regarding the hazardous waste. These can be

summarized as follows: a) Identification of quantity, constituents and compatibility of

hazardous waste, being generated during the activity.

a. Proper labeling and marking of containers, which are used for store, transport, or

disposal of hazardous waste.

b. Use of appropriate containers for storage and transport.

c. Furnishing of information regarding the waste, its nature, its hazards, antidotes, and non-

compatibility etc. to the persons who either transport, treat, store or dispose off the waste.

Page 299: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

259

d. Use of authorized operator agency system to ensure the proper disposal of

hazardous wastes (i. e. used oil) and to streamline the treatment and disposal.

e. Training of personnel for handling and proper storage of such categorized waste.

f. Identify a transporter specialized in such wastes, and the practice of hexplicate

manifest (gate-pass) be followed.

g. Submission of reports to MOEF and KSPCB.

h. To provide safety measures for handling of hazardous waste.

i. In case of an unforeseen act or event in transit occurs, the transporter should

Immediately report to the nearest police station about The accident, and The clean- up

measures.

j. He should also report to SPCB on the Form prescribed by the Hazardous Waste

(Management and Handling) Rules, 2008 and the guidelines issued by the Central

Government.

k. A container be opened for a short duration while receiving the hazardous material in it

and while removing out from it, or otherwise it must always be kept closed in storage

yard.

l. A container be opened or handled so carefully and slowly as not to rupture/damage the

container. Always keep in spare some empty, clean and sturdy containers handy and

immediately available.

m. Inspect the filled and stored containers every day and if any found in bad

conditions transfer the contents to a good container immediately but carefully.

n. Keep a daily record of your custody.

o. Documentation is always a matter of evidential value. No job is complete unless

paper work is complete. Occupier/generator should carefully note this, and following be

developed.

p. Gate-pass when waste leaves the factory by a transport towards the treatment

facility. Keep the receipts.

q. A receipt of material as signed by the facility Operator as a manifested colour coded

copy is preserved for three years.

r. Analyze the out-going waste and keep the results for three years from the date of

dispatch.

Page 300: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

260

10.7 RECORDS OF WASTE GENERATION TO BE MAINTAINED AS PER FOLLOWING

Quantity and points of generation.

Physical state and chemical constituents.

Hazardous waste category as per E. P. Rules of 2008.

Hazardous waste class, as per Motor Vehicle Rules of 1989.

Certify internally, the limit of 90 days and storage of ten tons.

Under the Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules,

1989,the immediate duties can be summarized as:

i. To forecast the possible situations of major accidents.

ii. To design steps in advance to avoid accidents and itsconsequences including cascading effect.

iii. To educate the related workers to stand to such occurrence.

1. The occupier should not merely do the above job, but also make a show of his work.

Occupier is best advised to inform the concerned authorities and agencies, as to his

preparing documents like risk analysis, emergency plan, safety training, avoidance of

major accidents, health plan, etc.

2. Under the Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991 the industrial manager is advised

to check some important activities, such as

a. Owner should take out one or more insurance policies.

b. He should take out such policies before he starts handling any hazardoussubstances.

c. The policies should always be kept renewed and alive.

d. The amount insured shall not be less than the paid capital. Check this from time totime by taking a review of your position.

e. General Insurance Corporation or similar agencies may be able to throw more light, ifapproached.”

10.8 ENVIRONMENTAL ORGANIZATION

Environmental organization will have an environmental cell responsible for pollution

control and also for self-examination through monitoring.

Page 301: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

261

10.8.1 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT CELLSuch massive work cannot be conceived unless a framework of men, material and

money is specially earmarked. This is done by establishing a Environment

Management Plan first and the an Environment Management Cell. The cell shall be

backed by the highest person of the Organization.

Table - 10.1 Environment Management Cell

Sl.No.

Level Designation Purpose

1 HighestManaging Director Policy making

2 TopDirector & CEO ,COO

Policy making

& guidance

3 Overview Steering Committee Monitoring

4 Manager Civil Engineer Job AEnvironment Engineer * Job B

Safety In charge

Chief Medical officer Job C5 Executive Various Levels Implement

The Cell working under CEO is explained later in this section.

The Jobs are described below

Page 302: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

262

Table-10.2 Job of Environment Management Cell

Job Of Facet Aspects

1 Civil Engineer. ConstructionPhase

Material waste minimization, laborcamp sanitation, Noise, oil-greaseand vibration nuisance control,accident prevention.Job A Post-construction Remediation of ugly sites

2 EnvironmentEngineer.

Air Truck census, PUC control, ODScontrol, Noise & Odor mitigation,Dust control

Job BWater Water budget, O & M of Water

Purification andWastewater Treatment Plants.Solid waste Segregation, Collection, Composting,CartingGreening Tree Census, Tree Planting, LawnDevelopment, Storm water, RecycleWater, Control use of pesticides,nurseryMonitoring Field observations, laboratory tests,interpretation & Reporting

Public relations &Press

Documentation, Updating,rehabilitation, training, Meetings,Rapport

3 Medical Officer.Job C

OccupationalHealth

Routine surveillance, prevention,accident relief, Snake biteremedies.

Bio-Medical waste Prevention, Abatement, Controland Disposal. Training.

10.9 Environmental Monitoring ScheduleTo measure the success of the cell, monitoring is a useful tool. The monitoring

schedule is decided as under

Table-10.3 Monitoring schedule

Subject From Frequency ParametersWater Drinking M Standard

Raw M pH, BOD, COD,TSS, TDS, N, P,SS,TDS, ColiWastewater Treated M

Storm water Raw Y BOD, N, P, SS, TDS, ColiTreated Y

Airstack M SPM, SO2, NOx, CO.Ambient air M

Noise Ambient M dB(A)Soil - Y C, N, P, K

Aesthetics Odour, comfort, visual,housekeeping, Roads W

Marks: Severe, Tolerable,Average, Excellent.

Page 303: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

263

SUBJECT FROM FREQUENCY PARAMETERSWater Drinking M Standard

Raw MWastewater Treated M

pH, BOD, COD, TSS,TDS, N, P, SS,TDS, Coli

Storm water Raw YTreated YStack M

BOD, N, P, SS, TDS, Coli

Air Ambient Air M SPM, SO2, NOx, CO.

Noise Ambient M dB(A)Soil - Y C, N, P, K

Aesthetics Odour, comfort, Visual,Housekeeping, Roads.

Legend: W = Weekly, M = Monthly, Y = Yearly.

Marks: Severe, Tolerable,Average, Excellent.

It is being considered to have a full-fledged laboratory, allotted to these facilities of

analysis. It is felt that, this arrangement will be adequate enough for

Environmental Protection. Monitoring is a technique of drawing a sample and

understanding from it the universe. The sampling station, the parameters and

frequency is of extreme importance as also the careful analysis, reporting and

interpretation.

10.10 SCHEDULESThere will be three facets to design and follow the schedules viz.: (A) for compliance

of responsibilities, (B) for day-to-day operation and management of WTP and ECE,

and (C) for routine environmental monitoring, to assess the impact and take timely

warning. The schedule:

10.10.1 DAILY COMPLIANCE1. Take the meter readings -initial and final, for checking the water

consumption.

2. Maintain the electricity consumption record for pollution control.

3. Monitor wastewater generation, treatment system & reuse of treated water.

10.10.2 MONTHLY COMPLIANCE1. Monitor the emission sources through the competent authority and submit

the analysis reports to the board.

2. Monitor ambient/work zone noise levels & ensure conformance to

standards.

10.10.3 QUARTERLY COMPLIANCE1. Monitor the ambient air quality at upwind and downwind locations of the factory.

2. Review the Water Reuse performance.

3. Monitor ambient air per quarterly.

10.10.4 YEARLY COMPLIANCE

1. Carryout “Environmental Audit Statement” of various environmental

aspects,review the environmental policies with the help of experts and

make the up gradation/changes accordingly.

Page 304: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

264

2. Submit the “Environmental Statement” to the State Pollution Control Board in

Form V under Rule 14 of the Environment (Protection) Second Amendment

Rules 1992 of the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986.

3. Renew the Consent to Operate under the Water and Air Acts.

4. File the Cess returns to the State PCB under the Water (Prevention and

Control of Pollution) Cess Act, 1977.

5 Renew the Hazardous Waste Authorization under sub-rule 3 of the Hazardous

Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 2008.

10.10.5 CONSENT COMPLIANCE

Project undertakes to comply the conditions prescribed by the Consent. In this

direction, the following discipline will be followed:

Table –10.4 Consent Compliance

Condition Regarding Mode Of ComplianceQuantity of Effluent To be measured daily and in-plant control. Not to exceed

any time

Quantity of Sewage To be measured periodically. Not to exceed theconsent conditions.

Total water input To be measured daily. Repair meters. Not to exceed.Make breakup as per usages. Fill monthly Cess returns.Pay as perassessmentQuality of Effluents By running ETP in correct fashion. Monitor. Report

Disposal Not over application. No percolation, no spillages.Monitor.Ambient Air Regular monitoring.

Noise levels Check foundation for vibrations, Tree plantationSolid Waste Quantity to be measured & record kept..Environ. Audit To be complied every year before 30th Sept., as also

theESR Environmental status reportInspections Inspection Book to be opened. Instructions given byKSPCBvisiting officer to be complied and reported.

10.11 STEERING COMMITTEE

A high power steering committee is in place having a power of sudden spot

inspections, checking of documents and listening to complaints if any. This committee

will supervise over the monitoring and environmental management cell as may be

necessary, generally over the following facets of works:

Page 305: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

265

1. Permit management

2. Construction management

3. Treatment and emission management

4. Transport management

5. Disposal management

6. Monitoring

7. Documentation

8. Law enforcement

9. Customer and Third party audits

10. Following CII Model of excellence

10.12 CONSTRUCTION PHASE MANAGEMENTIn this particular case, this phase is very important. It will continue for a long

time, in the developmental stage. The component will commence from site

preparation.

1. SITE PREPARATIONThe clearance of site may involve the movement of soil. No major leveling

operations are envisaged, though at places this will be encountered. During dry

weather conditions it is necessary to control dust nuisance created by excavation

and transportation activities. Else at some sensitive locations, water sprinkling will

be resorted to.

2. SANITATIONa. LABOUR CAMPSThe construction site shall be provided with sufficient and suiTable toilet facilities

for construction workers to allow proper standards of personal hygiene. These

facilities shall be connected to a septic tank and maintained to ensure minimum

or no environmental impact. Water taps will be provided in the labour camps, but

it will be seen that spilled water will be directed towards collection sump first and to

the treatment scheme next.

b. NOISEThough the noise effect on the nearest inhabitants due to construction

Page 306: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

266

activity will be negligible (as at present there are no residents to begin with), it is

advisable that on site workers using high noise equipment adopt noise protection

devices like earmuffs. Noise sources are heavy earth moving and construction

machineries, air compressors and D.G Sets. Proper oiling, maintenance, non-

vibrating sturdy foundations and closed rooms shall be provided to minimize the

effects.

c. CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT AND WASTEIt shall be ensured that both gasoline and diesel powered construction vehicles

are properly maintained to minimize smoke in the exhaust emissions. The vehicle

maintenance area shall be located in such a manner to avoid sources by

accidental spillage of oil. Unauthorized dumping of waste oil should be prohibited.

Wastes shall be disposed off at an approved site.

d. STORAGE OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALThe following hazardous materials may be used for site preparation and

construction activity.

These shall be stored as per international standards.

1. Explosives for rock blasting (This is not proposed)

2. Petrol and diesel

3. LPG

4. Painting materials

5. Asbestos products are avoided.

e. SITE SECURITYConstruction site is a potential hazardous environment. To ensure that the local

inhabitants and stray cattle are not exposed to these hazards, the site shall be

secured by fencing and manned entry points. It will be fully illuminated.

f. LAND ENVIRONMENTAn inventory shall be prepared of standing trees and bushes of significance. To

prevent unauthorized felling of trees by construction workers for their fuel needs

it will be ensured that the contractor provides fuel to them. The construction

workers will be educated on importance of maintaining the existing tree.

Page 307: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

CHAPTER -11

SUMMARY ANDCONCLUSIONS

Page 308: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT
Page 309: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

267

CHAPTER – 11SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS

M/s. SLR Metaliks Ltd. propose to improve the viability of the existing project by the

addition of facilities for the production of value added downstream products with

ready market opportunity such as alloy steel, rolled steel products, metallurgical coke,

coke oven gas based power and oxygen in the existing Iron making industry. The

expansion does not require additional ore. The steel industries in general are on

priority list as they contribute in overall development of the country. Integrated steel

industries in particular will produce steel and steel products at economic cost and

also has export potential to earn/save foreign exchange.

i. Additional land needed to the project is already allotted by KIADB.

ii.The proposal is for manufacture of downstream and associated products. This

will reduce transportation and operation cost and result into overall economy

and viability of the industry. Coke oven off gases are advantageously utilized in

the power generation for captive use.

iii. The product mix includes Steel alloy from steel plant, TMT bars from

rolling mill. Based on market demand and pricing capacity utilization of these

plants can be varied.

iv. Metallurgical coke from coke oven plant will be utilized as captive

source in the existing BF plant. Coke oven off gases will be used in waste heat

recovery boiler for generation power. The power thus generated will be used in

the industry as a captive source.

v. Water requirement will be met within the available permissible limits

from the river source.

vi. This industry does not produce any toxic products and does not have

significant adverse effect on the quality of land, water and air. The industry has

taken all the necessary preventive measures to mitigate even the small effects

which might be caused by industrial activities.

vii. Gaseous emissions will be generated from furnaces, boiler, fume

exhaust will be treated in suiTable APC system and vented through the stacks of

adequate height.

viii. The concept of Reduce, Reuse and Recycle is also practiced in the

industry as per the eco-policy of Govt. of India. This will result in high

performance, and minimal resource utilization. With the addition of steel making

units energy savings of 405 KWH/ton of pig iron will be saved as it avoids re-

melting of pig iron.

Page 310: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

268

ix. Wastewater generated in the industry will be treated and re used for

industrial purpose and green belt and greenery development in the factory

premise.

x. The industry will adopt an effective environment management system

and environment management plan to protect the environment. Due priority will

be given for greenery development and rain water harvesting at the factory

premises.

xi. The site is connected to supply of raw material and product utilizers

through well laid national and state high ways and railway lines. The traffic on

these lines is with in the permissible limits.

PROJECT FEASIBILITY AS A SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT MODEL This project is very essential in-view of production of high value downstream

products.

The local people desire the setting up of the industry to create additional direct

& indirect job opportunities as well as business opportunities.

Water, power, Raw material and Market are available.

Adequate precautions will be taken for Pollution Control, Resource

Conservation and Environmental Protection.

This is cost effective and aims Sustainable Development.

The project is proposed in economically & industrially backward / rural area of

Karnataka State.

Page 311: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

CHAPTER -12

DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS

Page 312: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT
Page 313: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

269

CHAPTER- 12DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS ENGAGED

12.1 THE NAMES OF THE CONSULTANTS ENGAGED WITH THEIR BRIEFRESUME & NATURE OF CONSULTANCY RENDERED

This EIA report is prepared on behalf of the proponents, taking inputs from

proponent’s office staff, their R & D wing, Architects, Project Management

Professionals etc. by Environmental Consultants M/s. Ultra-Tech Environmental

Consultancy & Laboratory, Thane, Mumbai , who have been accredited by QCI-

NABET vide official memorandum of MoEF S.N. 93 of LIST ‘A’ of MoEF - O.M. No. J

11013/77/2004/IA II(I) dated September 30, 2011. S.No.154 of list of Accredited

Consultants of dated 5th April, 2014.

M/s Ultra-Tech Environmental Consultancy & Laboratory:

Ultra-Tech Environmental Consultancy & Laboratory [Lab Gazetted by MoEF – Govt.

of India] not only give environmental solutions for sustainable development, but make

sure that they are economically feasible. With innovative ideas and impact mitigation

measures offered, make them distinguished in environmental consulting business.

The completion of tasks in record time is the key feature of Ultra-Tech. A team of

more than hundred environmental brigadiers consists of engineers, experts,

ecologists, hydrologists, geologists, socio-economic experts, solid waste and hazard

waste experts apart from environmental media sampling and monitoring experts and

management experts , strive hard to serve clients with up to mark and best services.

Ultra-Tech offers environmental consultancy services to assist its clients to obtain

environmental clearance for their large buildings, construction, CRZ, SEZ, high rise

buildings, township projects and industries covering sugar and distilleries from

respective authorities. Ultra-Tech is in the process of getting QCI-NABET final

accreditation for its EIA organization.

Ultra-Tech also provide STP/ETP /WTP project consultancy on turn-key basis apart

from Operation and Maintenance of these projects on annual contract basis. Also,

having MoEF approved environmental laboratory, Ultra-Tech provide laboratory

services for monitoring and analysis of various environmental media like air, water,

Page 314: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

270

waste water, stack, noise and meteorological data to its clients all over India and

abroad.

Functional area experts and assistance to FAE involved in the EIA study for “M/s.

SLR Metaliks Ltd.” at Narayanadevarakere Village, Hagaribommanahalli Taluk,

Bellary District in Karnataka State is as follows:

Table No-12.1 List of Functional Area Experts

FUNCTIONAL AREA EXPERTS INVOLVED IN THE EIA

Sl.No.

NAME OFSECTOR

NAME OFPROJECT

NAME OFCLIENT

NAME OF EIACOORDINATOR

FUNCTIONAL AREA EXPERTSINVOLVEDFA NAME/S Signature

1. Metallurgical industries(Ferrous &nonferrous)

– bothprimary andSecondary(Sector-8)

IndustrialProject

M/s. SLR MetaliksLimited,

Narayanadevarakere

Mr. Santosh Gupta

Team Member:Dr. S. S. Hotanahalli AP

Mr. ShekharTamhaneTeamMember:Ms. DeepteeSamant

WP

Mrs. DeepaTamhane –KarnikTeamMember:Ms.SampadaShidid

EB

Dr. T. K.GhoshTeamMember:Ms. BharatiKhairnar

SE

Dr. V.G.PanwalkarTeamMember:Dr. KishoreWankhede

SHW

Mr. SantoshGuptaTeamMember:Dr. S. S.Hotanahalli

LU

Mr. SwapnilAwaghade

TeamMember: Mr.Ajay Kadam

Page 315: FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT

271

Sl.No.

NAME OFSECTOR

NAME OFPROJECT

NAME OFCLIENT

NAME OF EIACOORDINATOR

FUNCTIONAL AREA EXPERTSINVOLVEDFA NAME/S Signature

RH Dr. RavindraKode

Table No-12.2 Laboratory DetailsLABORATORY FOR ANALYSIS:

NAME OFLABORATORY SCOPE OF SERVICES ACCREDITATION STATUS

M/s. Bangalore TestHouse#65, 20th Main,,Marenahalli,Vijaynagar, Bangalore –560 040

Monitoring and Analysis of:1. Ambient Air Quality Monitoring2. Ground and Surface Water

Quality Monitoring3. Noise Level Monitoring and4. Soil Quality Monitoring5. Metrological data collection

M/s. Bangalore Test House isa NABL certified laboratory


Recommended